Polaris Sportsman 800 EFI 2009 Service Manual

GENERAL INFORMATION
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
1
MODEL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
MODEL NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
ENGINE DESIGNATION NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
VIN IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
TRANSMISSION I.D. LOCATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
ENGINE AND MACHINE SERIAL NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
PUBLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
PAINT CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
REPLACEMENT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
2009 SPORTSMAN 800 EFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
MODEL NUMBER: A09MN76AX, AZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
2009 SPORTSMAN X2 800 EFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
MODEL NUMBER: A09TN76AL, AX, AZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
2009 SPORTSMAN TOURING 800 EFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
MODEL NUMBER: A09DN76AB, AL / A09DN76FC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
MISC. NUMBERS/CHARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10
STANDARD TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10
SAE TAP DRILL SIZES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11
METRIC TAP DRILL SIZES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11
DECIMAL EQUIVALENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11
CONVERSION TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12
GLOSSARY OF TERMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13
1.1
GENERAL INFORMATION
MODEL INFORMATION Engine and Machine Serial Numbers
Be sure to refer to the engine model number and serial number
Model Number whenever corresponding about an engine.
The machine model number must be used with any
correspondence regarding warranty or service.
This information can be found on the sticker applied to the top
side of the crankcase (A). An additional number is stamped on
A 09 DN 76 AS the side of the crankcase beneath the cylinder coolant elbow.
Engine Designation Numbers

EH068OLE - Twin Cylinder, Liquid Cooled,4 Stroke, Electric
Start
EH076OLE - Twin Cylinder, Liquid Cooled,4 Stroke, Electric
Start
VIN Identification
9
xx
xxx
xxx
TRANSMISSION I.D. LOCATION

Sportsman X2 and Touring
The machine model number and serial number are important for
vehicle identification. The machine serial number is stamped on
the lower left side of the frame tube (B).
Sportsman
1.2
GENERAL INFORMATION
PUBLICATIONS
Table 1-1: Publications

1
Owner's Parts
Year Model Model No.
Manual PN Manual PN
2009 Sportsman 800 EFI A09MN76A 9921831 9921833
2009 Sportsman X2 800 EFI A09TN76A 9921845 9921925
Sportsman Touring 800 EFI A08DN76A 9921788 9921793
2009
International A08DN76F 9921792 9922175
PAINT CODES
Table 1-2: Paint Codes

COLOR DITZLER POLARIS
PAINTED PART
DESCRIPTION NUMBER NUMBER
Sportsman 800 Frame Black 9440 P-067
REPLACEMENT KEYS
Replacement keys can be made from the original key. To identify which series the key is, take the first two digits on the original
key and refer to the chart to the right for the proper part number. Should both keys become lost, ignition switch replacement is
required.
Table 1-3: Key Numbers

Series # Part Number
20 4010278
21 4010278 Key Boot
PN 5433534
22 4010321
23 4010321
27 4010321
28 4010321
31 4110141
32 4110148
67 4010278
68 4010278
1.3
GENERAL INFORMATION
2009 SPORTSMAN 800 EFI

MODEL NUMBER: A09MN76AX, AZ
ENGINE MODEL: EH076OLE
Table 1-4: Sportsman 800 EFI

General Specifications
Category Dimension / Capacity
Length 83 in./205.74 cm
Width 48 in./116.8 cm
Height 48 in./119.4 cm
Seat Height 34 in./86.4 cm
Wheel Base 50.75 in./128.9 cm
Dry Weight 770 lbs./326.6 kg
Gross Vehicle Weight 1220 lbs. / 553 kg
Front Rack Capacity 100 lbs./45.4 kg
Rear Rack Capacity 200 lbs./90.7 kg
Towing Capacity 1500 lbs./680 kg
Body Style Spirit
Hitch Tongue Capacity 150 lbs./68 kg
Combination of rear rack
weight and tongue weight not
to exceed 200 lbs. (91kg)
1.4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Table 1-5: 2009 800 EFI Specifications Table 1-6: 2009 800 EFI Specifications
ENGINE Drivetrain 1
Platform Polaris Twin Cylinder Transmission Type Drumshift - H/L/N/Rev/Park
Engine Model Number EH076OLE Transmission Capacity 15 oz. / 450ml
Engine Displacement 760cc Front Gearcase Capacity- CH 8.97 / 265 ml
Number of Cylinders 2 Rear Gearcase Capacity 5 oz. / 150ml

Bore & Stroke (mm) 80 x 76.5 mm Gear Ratio : Low 7.49:1
Rev 5.11:1
Compression Ratio 11:1
High 2.88:1
Compression Pressure 150-200 psi Front Drive 3.82:1
Rear Drive 3.10:1
Engine Idle Speed 1150 ± 100 RPM
Clutch Type PVT w/ EBS
Engine Max Operating Rpm 6600 Rpm ± 200 Rpm
Belt 3211113
Cooling System / Capacity Liquid - 3.6 qt/ 3.4 ltr.
Overheat Warning HOT on Instrument Cluster Steering / Suspension
Lubrication Pressurized Wet Sump Front Suspension / Shock A-arm / MacPherson Strut
Oil Requirements / Capacity Polaris 2W-50 2 qt. / 1.9 liters Front Travel 8.2 in. / 21 cm
Exhaust System Dual Pipe / Silencer Rear Suspension / Shock Progressive Rate Independent -
Coil - over shock
Fuel System
Rear Travel 9.5 in. / 24.13 cm
Fuel System Electronic Fuel Injection
Ground Clearance 11.25 in. / 28.6 cm
Fuel Pump 25L per hour at 39 PSI
Shock Preload Adjustment Front -Non Adjustable.
Fuel Filter(s) 30 micron in Tank - (unserviceable) Front / Rear Rear - Ratchet Style- Std.
Fuel Injector(s) Bosch Turning Radius 76 in. / 193 cm
EFI Controller Bosch MSE 1.1B Toe Out 0 - 1/16 in / .0 - .159 mm
Fuel Capacity / Requirement 4.13 gal US / 15.6 liters
Wheels / Brakes
87 Octane (minimum) or 89 Oxygenated
Wheel Size / Pattern - Front 26 x 8 - 12 / 4-156
Electrical
Wheel Size / Pattern - Rear 26 x 11 - 12 / 4-156
Alternator Output 500 w @ 6000 RPM
Front Tire Size 26 x 8 - 12
Lights : Pod 50 watts
Rear Tire Size 26 x 11 - 12
Grill Two x 37 watts
Recommended Air Pressure Front - 5 psi & Rear - 5 psi
Brake 8.26 watts
Brake - Front Dual Hydraulic Disc
Tail 26.9 watts
Brake - Rear Dual Hydraulic Disc
Worklights
2 x 13 watts
(If equipped)
Ignition System DC/CDI Ignition Table 1-7: A09MN76A Clutching
Ignition Timing 13°BTDC @ 1200 RPM Altitude
Shift Drive Clutch Driven Clutch Type
Meters Weight Spring (Non-Adjustable)
Spark plug / Gap RC7YC/ .035 in. / 0.9 mm (Feet)
Battery / Amp Hr Lead Acid / 30 Amp Hr 21-74 Red/Wht
0-1800
Circuit Breakers Fan 20 amp / Harness 20 amp / A08MN76 5632170 7043349 EBS - 1322751
(0-6000)
ECU 15 amp / Inst. Cluster / w/EBS w/EBS
Voltage Regulator 6 amp 21-72 Red/Wht
1800-3700
A08MN76 5632119 7043349 EBS - 1322751
Starting Electric (6000-12000)
w/EBS w/EBS
Instrument Cluster Analog Speedo w/ LCD
1.5
GENERAL INFORMATION
2009 SPORTSMAN X2 800 EFI

MODEL NUMBER: A09TN76AL, AX, AZ
Table 1-8: Sportsman X2 800 EFI

General Specifications
Length 93 in./236 cm
Wheel Base 57 in./144.7 cm
Dry Weight 830 lbs./376.5 kg
Gross Vehicle Weight 1500 lbs./680.3 kg
Front Rack/ Box Capacity 90 lbs./40.8 kg
Rear Box Capacity 400 lbs./181.4 kg
Body Style Spirit
to exceed 400 lbs. (181.5 kg)
1.6
GENERAL INFORMATION
Table 1-9: 2009 X2 800 EFI Specifications Table 1-10: 2009 X2 800 EFI Specifications
ENGINE Drivetrain 1
Engine Model Number EH076OLE Transmission Capacity 32 oz. / 946.3ml
Engine Displacement 760cc Front Gearcase Capacity- ADC 9.3 / 275 ml
Number of Cylinders 2 Gear Ratio : Low 23.91:1

Rev 21.74:1
Bore & Stroke (mm) 80 x 76.5 mm
High 8.28:1
Compression Ratio 11:1 Front Drive 3.82:1
Compression Pressure 150-200 psi Clutch Type PVT w/ EBS
Engine Idle Speed 1150 ± 100 RPM Belt 3211113
Engine Max Operating Rpm 6500 Rpm ± 200 Rpm Steering / Suspension
Cooling System / Capacity Liquid - 3.4 qt/ 3.2 ltr. Front Suspension / Shock A-arm / MacPherson Strut
Overheat Warning HOT on Instrument Cluster Front Travel 8.2 in. / 21 cm
Lubrication Pressurized Wet Sump Rear Suspension / Shock Progressive Rate Independent -
Oil Requirements / Capacity Polaris 2W-50 2 qt. / 1.9 liters Coil - over shock
Exhaust System Single Pipe / Silencer Rear Travel 8.75 in. / 22.22 cm
Fuel System Ground Clearance 11.25 in. / 28.6 cm
Fuel System Electronic Fuel Injection Shock Preload Adjustment Front -Non Adjustable.
Front / Rear Rear - Ratchet Style- Std.
Turning Radius 82 in. / 208.2 cm
Fuel Filter(s) 30 micron in Tank - (unserviceable)
Toe Out 0 - 1/16 in / .0 - .159 mm
Fuel Injector(s) Bosch
Wheels / Brakes
EFI Controller Bosch
87 Octane (minimum) or 89 Oxygenated Wheel Size / Pattern - Rear 25 x 11 - 12 / 4-156
Electrical Front Tire Size 25 x 8 - 12
Alternator Output 500 w @ 6000 RPM Rear Tire Size 25 x 11 - 12
Lights : Pod 50 watts Recommended Air Pressure Front - 5 psi & Rear - 5 psi
Grill Two x 37 watts Brake - Front Dual Hydraulic Disc
Tail 2 x 26.9 watts Brake - Rear Dual Hydraulic Disc
Brake 2 x 8.26 watts
Worklights Table 1-11: A09TN76A EFI Clutching
2 x 13 watts
(Deluxe Only) Altitude
Indicator Panel 1 watt Meters Weight Spring (Non-Adjustable)
(Feet)
Ignition System DC/CDI Ignition
21-74 Red/Wht
Ignition Timing Variable - ECU controlled 0-1800
A09TN76A 5632170 7043427 EBS - 1322751
(0-6000)
Spark plug / Gap RC7YC/ .035 in. / 0.9 mm w/EBS w/EBS
Battery / Amp Hr Lead Acid / 30 Amp Hr 21-72 Red/Wht
1800-3700
A09TN76A 5632119 7043427 EBS - 1322751
Fuses Fan 20 amp / Harness 20 amp / (6000-12000)
w/EBS w/EBS
ECU 15 amp / Inst. Cluster /
Voltage Regulator 5 amp
Starting Electric
1.7
GENERAL INFORMATION
2009 SPORTSMAN TOURING 800 EFI

MODEL NUMBER: A09DN76AB, AL / A09DN76FC
(Domestic) (International)
Table 1-12: 2009 Sportsman Touring

800 EFI General Specifications
Length 86 in./218.44 cm
Wheel Base 57 in./144.7 cm
Dry Weight 795 lbs./361 kg
Gross Vehicle Weight 1500 lbs./680.3 kg
Front Rack/ Box Capacity 90 lbs./40.8 kg
Rear Rack Capacity 180 lbs./82 kg
Unbraked Trailer
1995.1 lbs./905 kg
Towing Capacity (EU)*
Body Style Spirit
to exceed 180 lbs. (82kg)
* Data Based On EU Directive 76/432/EEC
1.8
GENERAL INFORMATION
Table 1-13: 2009 Touring 800 EFI Table 1-14: 2009 Touring 800 EFI
Specifications Specifications 1
ENGINE Drivetrain
Engine Model Number EH076OLE Transmission Capacity 32 oz. / 946.3ml
Engine Displacement 760cc Front Gearcase Capacity- ADC 9.3 / 275 ml
Number of Cylinders 2 Gear Ratio : Low 23.91:1

Rev 21.74:1
Bore & Stroke (mm) 80 x 76.5 mm
High 8.28:1
Compression Ratio 11:1 Front Drive 3.82:1
Compression Pressure 150-200 psi Clutch Type PVT w/ EBS (Standard and Deluxe)
Engine Idle Speed 1150 ± 100 RPM Belt 3211113
Engine Max Operating Rpm 6600 Rpm ± 200 Rpm Steering / Suspension
Cooling System / Capacity Liquid - 3.4 qt/ 3.2 ltr. Front Suspension / Shock A-arm / MacPherson Strut
Overheat Warning HOT on Instrument Cluster Front Travel 8.2 in. / 21 cm
Lubrication Pressurized Wet Sump Rear Suspension / Shock Progressive Rate Independent -
Oil Requirements / Capacity Polaris 2W-50 2 qt. / 1.9 liters Coil - over shock
Exhaust System Single Pipe / Silencer Rear Travel 8.75 in. / 22.22 cm
Fuel System Ground Clearance 11.25 in. / 28.6 cm
Fuel System Electronic Fuel Injection Shock Preload Adjustment Front -Non Adjustable.
Front / Rear Rear - Ratchet Style- Std.
Turning Radius 82 in. / 208.2 cm
Fuel Filter(s) 30 micron in Tank - (unserviceable)
Toe Out 0 - 1/16 in / .0 - .159 mm
Fuel Injector(s) Bosch
Wheels / Brakes
EFI Controller Bosch
87 Octane (minimum) or 89 Oxygenated Wheel Size / Pattern - Rear 25 x 11 - 12 / 4-156
Electrical Front Tire Size 25 x 8 - 12
Alternator Output 500 w @ 6000 RPM Rear Tire Size 25 x 11 - 12
Lights : Pod 50 watts Recommended Air Pressure Front - 5 psi & Rear - 5 psi
Grill Two x 37 watts Brake - Front Dual Hydraulic Disc
Tail 2 x 26.9 watts Brake - Rear Dual Hydraulic Disc
Brake 2 x 8.26 watts
Worklights Table 1-15: A09DN76A Clutching
2 x 13 watts
(Deluxe Only) Altitude
Indicator Panel 1 watt Meters Weight Spring (Non-Adjustable)
(Feet)
Ignition System DC/CDI Ignition
21-74 Red/Wht
Ignition Timing Variable - ECU controlled 0-1800
A09DN76 5632170 7043427 EBS - 1322751
(0-6000)
Spark plug / Gap RC7YC/ .035 in. / 0.9 mm w/EBS w/EBS
21-72 Red/Wht
Battery / Amp Hr Lead Acid / 30 Amp Hr 1800-3700
A09DN76 5632119 7043427 EBS - 1322751
(6000-12000)
Fuses Fan 20 amp / Harness 20 amp / w/EBS w/EBS
ECU 15 amp / Inst. Cluster /
Voltage Regulator 5 amp
Starting Electric
1.9
GENERAL INFORMATION
MISC. NUMBERS/CHARTS
Standard Torque Specifications
The following torque specifications are to be used as a general guideline. FOR SPECIFIC TORQUE VALUES OF FASTENERS Refer to exploded
views in the appropriate section. There are exceptions in the steering, suspension, and engine sections.
Bolt Size Threads/In Grade 2 Grade 5 Grade 8

Torque in. lbs. (Nm)
#10 - 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 (3.1) . . . . . . . . . 43 (5.0) . . . . . . . . 60 (6.9)
#10 - 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 (3.6) . . . . . . . . . 49 (5.6) . . . . . . . . 68 (7.8)
Torque ft. lbs. (Nm)*
1/4 - 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 (7) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 (11) . . . . . . . . . . 12 (16)
1/4 - 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 (8) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 (14) . . . . . . . . . 14 (19)
5/16 - 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11(15). . . . . . . . . . . 17 (23) . . . . . . . . . 25 (35)
5/16 - 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12(16) . . . . . . . . . . 19 (26) . . . . . . . . . 29 (40)
3/8 - 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20(27) . . . . . . . . . . 30 (40) . . . . . . . . . 45 (62)
3/8 - 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23(32) . . . . . . . . . . 35 (48) . . . . . . . . . 50 (69)
7/16 - 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30(40) . . . . . . . . . . 50 (69) . . . . . . . . . 70 (97)
7/16 - 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35(48) . . . . . . . . . . 55 (76) . . . . . . . . . 80 (110)
1/2 - 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50(69) . . . . . . . . . . 75 (104) . . . . . . . . 110 (152)
1/2 - 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55(76) . . . . . . . . . . 90 (124) . . . . . . . . 120 (166)
Metric / Torque
6 x 1.0. . . . . . . . . . 72-78 In.lbs. . . . . . . . . . 8 x 1.25 14-18 ft.lbs . . . . 10 x 1.25 26-30 ft.lbs.
SPECIAL TOOLS
Special tools may be required while servicing this vehicle. Some of the tools listed or depicted are mandatory, while other tools maybe
substituted with a similar tool, if available. Polaris recommends the use of Polaris Special Tools when servicing any Polaris product.
Dealers may order special tools through Polaris’ official tool supplier, SPX Corporation, 1-800-328-6657.
1.10
GENERAL INFORMATION
SAE Tap Drill Sizes Decimal Equivalents
Thread Size/ Drill Size Thread Size / Drill Size 1/64 .................
1/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.0156
.0312 . . 1 mm= .0394"
1
#0-80 3/64 1/2-13 27/64 3/64 ................. .0469
#1-64 53 1/2-20 29/64 1/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0625
#1-72 53 9/16-12 31/64 5/64 ................. .0781 . . 2 mm = .0787"
3/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0938
#2-56 51 9/16-18 33/64 7/64 ................. .1094 . . 3 mm =.1181"
#2-64 50 5/8-11 17/32 1/8 . . . . . . . . .1250
#3-48 5/64 5/8-18 37/64 9/64 ................. .1406
5/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1563 . . 4 mm = .1575"
#3-56 45 3/4-10 21/32 11/64 ................. .1719
#4-40 43 3/4-16 11/16 3/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1875 . . 5mm= .1969"
13/64 ................. .2031
#4-48 42 7/8-9 49/64
7/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2188
#5-40 38 7/8-14 13/16 15/64 ................. .2344 . . 6 mm = .2362"
#5-44 37 1-8 7/8 1/4 . . . . . . . . .25
17/64 ................. .2656 . . 7 mm = .2756"
#6-32 36 1-12 59/64 9/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2813
#6-40 33 1 1/8-7 63/64 19/64 ................. .2969
#8-32 29 1 1/8-12 1 3/64 5/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3125 . . 8mm= .3150"
21/64 ................. .3281
#8-36 29 1 1/4-7 1 7/64 11/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . .3438 . . 9 mm = .3543"
#10-24 24 1 1/4-12 1 11/64 23/64 ................. .3594
#10-32 21 1 1/2-6 1 11/32 3/8 . . . . . . . . .375
25/64 ................. .3906 . . 10 mm = .3937"
#12-24 17 1 1/2-12 1 27/64 13/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . .4063
#12-28 4.6mm 1 3/4-5 1 9/16 27/64 ................. .4219 . . 11 mm =.4331"
1/4-20 7 1 3/4-12 1 43/64 7/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4375
29/64 ................. .4531
1/4-28 3 2-4 1/2 1 25/32 15/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . .4688 . . 12 mm = .4724"
5/16-18 F 2-12 1 59/64 31/64 ................. .4844
1/2 . . . . . . . . .5. . . . ....... 13mm = .5118"
5/16-24 I 2 1/4-4 1/2 2 1/32
33/64 ................. .5156
3/8-16 O 2 1/2-4 2 1/4 17/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . .5313
3/8-24 Q 2 3/4-4 2 1/2 35/64 ................. .5469 . . 14 mm = .5512"
9/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5625
7/16-14 U 3-4 2 3/4 37/64 ................. .5781 . . 15 mm = .5906"
7/16-20 25/64 19/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . .5938
39/64 ................. .6094
Metric Tap Drill Sizes 5/8 . . . . . . . . .625. . ....... 16mm=. 6299"
41/64 ................. .6406
21/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . .6563 . . 17 mm =.6693"
Tap Size Drill Size Decimal Nearest 43/64 ................. .6719
Equivalent Fraction
11/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . .6875
3x.50 #39 0.0995 3/32 45/64 ................. .7031 . . 18 mm = .7087"
3x.60 3/32 0.0937 3/32 23/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . .7188
47/64 ................. .7344 . . 19 mm = .7480"
4x.70 #30 0.1285 1/8
3/4 . . . . . . . . .75
4x.75 1/8 0.125 1/8 49/64 ................. .7656
5x.80 #19 0.166 11/64 25/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . .7813 . . 20 mm = .7874"
51/64 ................. .7969
5x.90 #20 0.161 5/32 13/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . .8125 . . 21 mm =.8268"
6x1.00 #9 0.196 13/64 53/64 ................. .8281
7x1.00 16/64 0.234 15/64 27/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . .8438
55/64 ................. .8594 . . 22 mm = .8661"
8x1.00 J 0.277 9/32 7/8 . . . . . . . . .875
8x1.25 17/64 0.265 17/64 57/64 ................. .8906 . . 23 mm = .9055"
9x1.00 5/16 0.3125 5/16 29/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . .9063
59/64 ................. .9219
9x1.25 5/16 0.3125 5/16 15/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . .9375 . . 24 mm = .9449"
10x1.25 11/32 0.3437 11/32 61/64 ................. .9531
31/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . .9688 . . 25 mm = .9843"
10x1.50 R 0.339 11/32 63/64 ................. .9844
11x1.50 3/8 0.375 3/8 1. . . . . . . . . . 1.0
12x1.50 13/32 0.406 13/32
12x1.75 13/32 0.406 13/32
1.11
GENERAL INFORMATION
Conversion Table
Unit of Measure Multiplied by Converts to

ft. lbs. x 12 = in. lbs.
in. lbs. x .0833 = ft. lbs.
ft. lbs. x 1.356 = Nm
in. lbs. x .0115 = kg-m
Nm x .7376 = ft. lbs.
kg-m x 7.233 = ft. lbs.
kg-m x 86.796 = in. lbs.
kg-m x 10 = Nm
in. x 25.4 =mm
mm x .03937 = in.
in. x 2.54 = cm
mile (mi.) x 1.6 = km
km x .6214 = mile (mi.)
Ounces (oz.) x 28.35 = Grams (g)
Fluid Ounces (fl. oz.) x 29.57 = Cubic Centimeters (cc)
Cubic Centimeters (cc) x .03381 = Fluid Ounces (fl. oz.)
Grams (g) x 0.035 = Ounces (oz.)
lb. x .454 = kg
kg x 2.2046 = lb.
Cubic inches (cu. in) x 16.387 = Cubic centimeters (cc)
Cubic centimeters (cc) x 0.061 = Cubic inches (cu. in)
Imperial pints (Imp pt.) x 0.568 = Liters (l)
Liters (l) x 1.76 = Imperial pints (Imp pt.)
Imperial quarts (Imp qt.) x 1.137 = Liters (l)
Liters (l) x 0.88 = Imperial quarts (Imp qt.)
Imperial quarts (Imp qt.) x 1.201 = US quarts (US qt.)
US quarts (US qt.) x 0.833 = Imperial quarts (Imp qt.)
US quarts (US qt.) x 0.946 = Liters (l)
Liters (l) x 1.057 = US quarts (US qt.)
US gallons (US gal) x 3.785 =Liters (l)
Liters (l) x 0.264 = US gallons (US gal)
Pounds - force per square inch (psi) x 6.895 = Kilopascals (kPa)
Kilopascals (kPa) x 0.145 = Pounds - force per square inch (psi)
Kilopascals (kPa) x 0.01 = Kilograms - force per square cm
Kilograms - force per square cm x 98.1 = Kilopascals (kPa)
π(3.14)xR x H (height)
2
= Cylinder Volume
°C to °F: 9 (°C + 40) ÷ 5 - 40 = °F

°F to °C: 5 (°F + 40) ÷ 9 - 40 = °C
1.12
GENERAL INFORMATION
Glossary Of Terms
ABDC: After bottom dead center.
ACV: Alternating current voltage.
1
ADC: Active Descent Control. Engages front wheels for 4-wheel EBS.
Alternator: Electrical generator producing voltage alternating current.
ATDC: After top dead center.
BBDC: Before bottom dead center.
BDC: Bottom dead center.
BTDC: Before top dead center.
CC: Cubic centimeters.
Center Distance: Distance between center of crankshaft and center of driven clutch shaft.
Chain Pitch: Distance between chain link pins (No. 35 = 3/8" or 1 cm). Polaris measures chain length in number of pitches.
CI: Cubic inches.
Clutch Buttons: Plastic bushings which aid rotation of the movable sheave in the drive and driven clutch.
Clutch Offset: Drive and driven clutches are offset so that drive belt will stay nearly straight as it moves along the clutch face.
Clutch Weights: Three levers in the drive clutch which relative to their weight, profile and engine RPM cause the drive clutch to close and
grip the drive belt.
Crankshaft Run-Out: Run-out or "bend" of crankshaft measured with a dial indicator while crankshaft is supported between centers on V
blocks or resting in crankcase. Measure at various points especially at PTO.
CVT: Centrifugal Variable Transmission (Drive Clutch System)
DCV: Direct current voltage.
Dial Bore Gauge: A cylinder measuring instrument which uses a dial indicator. Good for showing taper and out-of-round in the cylinder bore.
EBS: Engine Braking System. Uses engine compression to slow the ATV without the use of hydraulic brakes.
Electrical Open: Open circuit. An electrical circuit which isn't complete.
Electrical Short: Short circuit. An electrical circuit which is completed before the current reaches the intended load. (i.e. a bare wire touching
the chassis).
End Seals: Rubber seals at each end of the crankshaft.
Engagement RPM: Engine RPM at which the drive clutch engages to make contact with the drive belt.
ft.: Foot/feet.
Foot Pound: Ft. lb. A force of one pound at the end of a lever one foot in length, applied in a rotational direction.
g: Gram. Unit of weight in the metric system.
gal.: Gallon.
ID: Inside diameter.
in.: Inch/inches.
Inch Pound: In. lb. 12 in. lbs. = 1 ft. lb.
kg/cm2: Kilograms per square centimeter.
kg-m: Kilogram meters.
Kilogram/meter: A force of one kilogram at the end of a lever one meter in length, applied in a rotational direction.
l or ltr: Liter.
lbs/in2: Pounds per square inch.
Left or Right Side: Always referred to based on normal operating position of the driver.
m: Meter/meters.
Mag: Magneto.
Magnetic Induction: As a conductor (coil) is moved through a magnetic field, a voltage will be generated in the windings. Mechanical energy
is converted to electrical energy in the stator.
mi.: Mile/miles.
mm: Millimeter. Unit of length in the metric system. 1 mm = approximately .040".
Nm: Newton meters.
OD: Outside diameter.
Ohm: The unit of electrical resistance opposing current flow.
oz.: Ounce/ounces.
Piston Clearance: Total distance between piston and cylinder wall.
psi.: Pounds per square inch.
PTO: Power take off.
qt.: Quart/quarts.
Regulator: Voltage regulator. Regulates battery charging system output at approximately 14.5 DCV as engine RPM increases.
Reservoir Tank: The fill tank in the liquid cooling system.
Resistance: In the mechanical sense, friction or load. In the electrical sense, ohms, resulting in energy conversion to heat.
RPM: Revolutions per minute.
Seized Piston: Galling of the sides of a piston. Usually there is a transfer of aluminum from the piston onto the cylinder wall.
Possible causes: 1) improper lubrication; 2) excessive temperatures; 3) insufficient piston clearance; 4) stuck piston rings.
Stator Plate: The plate mounted under the flywheel supporting the battery charging coils.
TDC: Top dead center. Piston's most outward travel from crankshaft.
Volt: The unit of measure for electrical pressure of electromotive force. Measured by a voltmeter in parallel with the circuit.
Watt: Unit of electrical power. Watts = amperes x volts.
WOT: Wide open throttle.
1.13
GENERAL INFORMATION
NOTES
1.14
MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 2
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
OVERVIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
2
LUBRICATION / FLUIDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7
SPORTSMAN COMPONENT LOCATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7
SPORTSMAN X2-TOURING COMPONENT LOCATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
POLARIS LUBRICANTS, MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9
POLARIS LUBRICANT SYMBOL IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
PRE-RIDE / DAILY INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
LUBRICATION / GREASE POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11
FRONT GEARCASE LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
REAR GEARCASE LUBRICATION - 800 EFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13
TRANSMISSION LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14
ADC DIFFERENTIAL HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT FLUID CHANGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15
VEHICLE INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15
SHIFT LINK ROD INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15
THROTTLE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
THROTTLE CABLE / ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . 2.16
FUEL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
VENT LINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
COMPRESSION TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
ENGINE MOUNTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18
SPARK PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18
ACTIVE DESCENT CONTROL (ADC) RESERVOIR LEVEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18
BATTERY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19
COOLING SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19
COOLANT STRENGTH / TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20
COOLING HOSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20
RADIATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20
COOLING SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20
RESERVOIR LEVEL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20
RADIATOR COOLANT LEVEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21
AIR FILTER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21
AIR BOX SEDIMENT TUBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22
ENGINE BREATHER HOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22
PVT INSPECTION / DRYING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23
ENGINE GROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23
ENGINE OIL LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23
OIL/FILTER CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24
STEERING INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25
TIE ROD / STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25
CAMBER/CASTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25
WHEEL ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26
TOE ALIGNMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26
EXHAUST PIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27
BRAKE SYSTEM INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27
BRAKE PADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28
BRAKE HOSE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28
AUXILIARY (REAR) BRAKE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28
AUXILIARY BRAKE ADJUSTMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29
SUSPENSION: SPRING PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29
FRONT SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29
REAR SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29
CV SHAFT BOOT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29
2.1
MAINTENANCE
ATV CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30
WHEEL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30
WHEEL REMOVAL: FRONT OR REAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30
WHEEL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30
TIRE PRESSURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31
TIRE INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31
FRAME, NUTS, BOLTS, FASTENERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31
FRONT / REAR STORAGE COMPARTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31
WINCH OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32
CLEANING AND STORAGE OF ATV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.34
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.37
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.38
2.2
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
Overview
Careful periodic maintenance will help keep your vehicle in the safest, most reliable condition. Inspection, adjustment and
lubrication of important components are explained in the periodic maintenance chart.
Inspect, clean, lubricate, adjust and replace parts as necessary. When inspection reveals the need for replacement parts, use genuine
Polaris parts available from your Polaris dealer.
2
NOTE: Service and adjustments are critical. If you're not familiar with safe service and adjustment procedures, have a qualified
dealer perform these operations.
Maintenance intervals in the following chart are based upon average riding conditions and an average vehicle speed of approximately
10 miles per hour. Vehicles subjected to severe use must be inspected and serviced more frequently.
• Frequent immersion in mud, water or sand
• Racing or race-style high RPM use
• Prolonged low speed, heavy load operation
• Extended idle
• Short trip cold weather operation
Pay special attention to the oil level. A rise in oil level during cold weather can indicate contaminants collecting in the oil sump or
crankcase. Change oil immediately if the oil level begins to rise. Monitor the oil level, and if it continues to rise, discontinue use
and determine the cause.
Maintenance Chart Key

The following symbols denote potential items to be aware of during maintenance:
= CAUTION: Due to the nature of these adjustments, it is recommended this service be performed by an authorized
Polaris dealer.
= SEVERE USE ITEM --If vehicle is subjected to severe use, decrease interval by 50% (Severe Use is defined as frequent
vehicle immersion in mud, water or sand, racing or race-style high rpm use, prolonged low speed - heavy load operation or
extended idle. More preventative maintenance is required under these conditions. Fluid changes, cable, chain and chassis
lubrication are required more frequently. For engine oil, short trip cold weather riding also constitutes severe use. Pay
special attention to oil level. A rising oil level in cold weather can indicate contaminants collecting in the oil sump or
crankcase. Change oil immediately and monitor level. If oil level begins to rise, discontinue use and determine cause.)
E = Emission Control System Service (California).
NOTE: Inspection may reveal the need for replacement parts. Always use genuine Polaris parts.
WARNING: Improperly performing the procedures marked with a could result in component failure and lead to serious injury
or death. Have an authorized Polaris dealer perform these services.
2.3
MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Chart
Table 2-1: REQUIRED MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
ITEM MAINTENANCE INTERVAL REMARKS
Hours Calendar Miles (KM)
Steering -- Pre-Ride --
Front Suspension -- Pre-Ride --
Rear Suspension -- Pre-Ride --
Tires -- Pre-Ride --
ADC Fluid Level -- Pre-Ride --
Brake Fluid Level -- Pre-Ride --

Make adjustments as needed.
Brake Lever
-- Pre-Ride --
Travel
Brake Systems -- Pre-Ride --
Wheels/Fasteners -- Pre-Ride --
Frame Fasteners -- Pre-Ride --
, E Engine Oil Level -- Pre-Ride --
Air filter,
, E -- Daily -- Inspect; clean often
pre-filter
Air Box Sediment

, E -- Daily -- Drain deposits when visible
Tube
Coolant
-- Daily -- Check level daily, change coolant every 2 years
(if applicable)
Head lamp/tail
-- Daily -- Check operation; apply dielectric grease if replacing
lamp
Air filter, main

, E -- Weekly -- Inspect; replace as needed
element
Recoil housing Drain water as needed, check often if operating in

-- Weekly --
(if applicable) wet conditions
, E Brake Pad Wear 10 H Monthly 60 (100) Inspect periodically
Battery 20 H Monthly 125 (200) Check terminals; clean; test
= Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use.
E = Emission Control System Service (California)
= Have an authorized Polaris Dealer perform these services.
2.4
MAINTENANCE
Front gearcase oil

(if equipped)
25 H Monthly 155 (250) Inspect level; change yearly 2
Middle gearcase
25 H Monthly 155 (250) Inspect level; change yearly
oil (if equipped)
Rear gearcase oil

25 H Monthly 155 (250) Inspect level; change yearly
(if equipped)
Transmission Oil 25 H Monthly 155 (250) Inspect level; change yearly
Engine breather
, E filter (if 25 H Monthly 155 (250) Inspect; replace if necessary
equipped)
Engine oil change

, E 25 H 1M 155 (250) Perform a break-in oil change at one month
(break-in)
General
50 H 3M 310 (500) Lubricate all fittings, pivots, cables, etc.
lubrication
Shift Linkage 50 H 6M 310 (500) Inspect, lubricate, adjust
Steering 50 H 6M 310 (500) Lubricate
Front Suspension 50 H 6M 310 (500) Lubricate
Rear Suspension 50 H 6M 310 (500) Lubricate
Throttle Cable/
,E 50 H 6M 310 (500) Inspect; adjust; lubricate; replace if necessary
ETC Switch
E Air intake ducts 50 H 6M 310 (500) Inspect ducts for proper sealing/air leaks
Drive belt 50 H 6M 310 (500) Inspect; adjust; replace as needed
Cooling system Inspect coolant strength seasonally; pressure test

50 H 6M 310 (500)
(if applicable) system yearly
Engine Oil
, E 100 H 6M 620 (1000) Perform a break-in oil change at 25 hours/one month
Change
, E Oil filter change 100 H 6M 620 (1000) Replace with oil change
Oil tank vent hose

, E 100 H 12 M 620 (1000) Inspect routing, condition
(if applicable)
, E Valve Clearance 100 H 12 M 620 (1000) Inspect;
2.5
MAINTENANCE
Check for leaks at tank cap, lines, fuel pump, filter,

, E Fuel system 100 H 12 M 620 (1000)
pump, injectors; replace lines every two years
Fuel filter
, E 100 H 12 M 620 (1000) Replace yearly (if equipped)
(if equipped)
Radiator
100 H 12 M 620 (1000) Inspect; clean external surfaces
(if applicable)
Cooling hoses
100 H 12 M 620 (1000) Inspect for leaks
(if applicable)
Engine mounts 100 H 12 M 620 (1000) Inspect
Exhaust
100 H 12 M 620 (1000) Inspect
muffler/pipe
, E Spark Plug 100 H 12 M 620 (1000) Inspect; replace as needed
, E Ignition Timing 100 H 12 M 620 (1000) Inspect
Inspect for wear, routing, security; apply dielectric

Wiring 100 H 12 M 620 (1000)
grease to connectors subjected to water, mud, etc.
Clutches
100 H 12 M 620 (1000) Inspect; clean; replace worn parts
(drive & driven)
Front wheel 1000

100 H 12 M Inspect; replace as needed
bearings (1600)
1240
Brake fluid 200 H 24 M Change every two years
(1000)
1240
ADC fluid 200 H 24 M Change every two years
(1000)
1860
Spark arrestor 300 H 36 M Clean out
(3000)
E Idle Speed ---- Adjust as needed
Toe Adjustment ---- Inspect periodically; adjust when parts are replaced
,
Auxiliary brake ---- Inspect daily, adjust as needed
Headlight aim ---- Adjust as needed
2.6
MAINTENANCE
LUBRICATION / FLUIDS
SPORTSMAN Component Locations
(Deluxe)
(Sportsman Only)
2.7
MAINTENANCE
SPORTSMAN X2-Touring Component Locations
Instrument Cluster AWD/ADC Switch
(Sportsman X2 Shown) Brake Fluid Reservoir Worklight (Speedometer)
Brake Lever
Diagnostic Light Control

Port (under access panel) & Run Switch
Reverse Throttle
Override Differential Switch
Ignition/Key
Front Storage
Compartment
& Rack
Front Demand
Drive Unit X2 Rear Dump Box / Passenger Area
(Behind Radiator)
Battery (Under Tank)

Oil Dipstick
PVT Cover
Gear Shifter Gas Cap
Muffler
Transmission
Rear Drive CV Shafts
Right Side View

Front Prop Shaft
(Between Transmission
and Front Gearcase)
Front Drive CV Shafts
Auxiliary Brake
2.8
MAINTENANCE
Polaris Lubricants, Maintenance and Service Table 2-2:
Products
PART
DESCRIPTION
Table 2-2: NUMBER
Coolant
PART
DESCRIPTION 2871323 60/40 Coolant (Gallon) (6 count)
NUMBER
Engine Lubricant
2871534 60/40 Coolant (Quart) (12 count) 2
Additives / Sealants / Thread Locking Agents / Misc.
2870791 Fogging Oil (12 oz. Aerosol)
2874275 Loctite™ Primer N, Aerosol
Engine Oil (Quart) Premium Synthetic
2876244
2W-50 (4-cycle) (12 count) Loctite™ Thread Sealant 565
2871956
Engine Oil (Gallon) Premium Synthetic (50 ml.) (6 count)
2876245
2W-50 (4-cycle) (4 count) Loctite™ Threadlock 242
2871950
Gearcase / Transmission Lubricants (6 ml.) (12 count)
2876251 Demand Drive LT Premium Hub Fluid Loctite™ Threadlock 262
2871951
3234438 Polaris ADC Hydraulic Fluid (50 ml.) (10 count)
Premium Synthetic AGL Gearcase Lube Loctite™ Threadlock 271
2873602 2871953
(12 oz. bottle) (12 count) (6 ml.) (12 count)
Premium Synthetic AGL Gearcase Lube 3-Bond 1215 Sealant
2873603 2871557
(1 Gal. bottle) (4 count) (5 oz.)
Premium ATV Angle Drive Fluid Premium Carbon Clean
2876160 2871326
(32 oz.) (12 count) (12 oz.) (12 count)
Premium ATV Angle Drive Fluid 2870652 Fuel Stabilizer (16 oz.) (12 count)
2872276
(2.5 Gal.) (2 count)
Black RTV Silicone Sealer
2870465 Oil Pump for 1 Gallon Jug 2871957
(3 oz. tube ) (12 count)
Grease / Specialized Lubricants Black RTV Silicone Sealer
2871958
Premium All Season Grease (11 oz. cartridge) (12 count)
2871322
(3 oz. cartridge) (24 count) 2872189 DOT 4 Brake Fluid (12 count)
Premium All Season Grease 2871557 Crankcase Sealant, 3 Bond 1215 (5 oz.)
2871423
(14 oz. cartridge) (10 count)
2871460 Starter Drive Grease (12 count)
Premium U-Joint Lube
2871515
(3 oz.) (24 Count)
Premium U-Joint Lube
2871551
(14 oz.) (10 count)
2871312 Grease Gun Kit
2871329 Dielectric Grease (Nyogel™)
2.9
MAINTENANCE
Polaris Lubricant Symbol Identification Pre-Ride / Daily Inspection
NOTE: The symbols used are for quick reference in identifying Perform the following pre-ride inspection daily, and when
which lubricant/grease to use on each component. servicing the vehicle at each scheduled maintenance.
• Tires - check tire condition and air pressures
• Fuel and oil - fill both to their proper level; Do not
overfill
• All brakes - check operation and adjustment (includes
auxiliary brake)
Polaris DOT 4
Brake Fluid Polaris Synthetic AGL • Throttle -check for free operation
Gearcase Lube
• Headlight/Taillight/Brakelight - check operation of all
Polaris ADC indicator lights and switches
Hydraulic Fluid
• Engine stop switch - check for proper function
• Wheels - check for loose wheel nuts and axle nuts;
check to be sure axle nuts are secured by cotter pins
Polaris Synthetic Polaris 60/40 • Air cleaner element - check for dirt or water; clean or
2W/50 Coolant replace
• Steering - check for free operation, noting any unusual
looseness in any area
• Loose parts - visually inspect vehicle for any damaged
or loose nuts, bolts or fasteners
Polaris ATV Angle Demand Drive LT • Engine coolant - check for proper level at the recovery
Drive Fluid Premium Hub Fluid bottle
• ADC Fluid Level - check for proper level
Polaris U-Joint Lube Polaris All

Season Grease
2.10
MAINTENANCE
Lubrication / Grease Points
1. Engine Oil 2. Transmission Fluid 4. Rear Gearcase
2
6. Front A-Arm
3. Front Gearcase
5. Brake Fluid
8. Front Propshaft
7. Rear A-Arm
# ITEM LUBE METHOD FREQUENCY*

Change after 1st month, 6 months, or 100
Check dipstick and add to hours thereafter; Change more often (25-50
1. Engine Oil Polaris 2W/50
proper level. hours) in extremely dirty conditions, or short
trip cold weather operation.
Polaris AGL Synthetic
2. Transmission Add lube to bottom fill hole. Change annually o
Gearcase Lube
Demand Drive LT
3A. Front Gearcase Drain as directed. Gearcase - Change annually o
Premium Hub Fluid
3B. ADC Fluid Add specified quantity. ADC - Change fluid every 2 years
Polaris ADC Hydraulic
Drain completely. Add lube to
4. Rear Gearcase ATV Angle Drive Fluid Change annually o
specified quantity.
Fill master cylinder reservoir
5. Brake Fluid Polaris DOT 4 Brake Fluid As required, change fluid every 2 years
to indicated level
6. Front A-Arm Polaris All Season Grease Locate fitting and grease. Semi-annually n
7. Rear A-Arm Polaris All Season Grease Locate fitting and grease Semi-annually n
5. Front Propshaft Polaris U-Joint Greasep Locate fitting and grease. Semi-annually n
* Perform more often under severe use, such as operation in water and under severe loads.
nSemi-annually or 50 hours of operation 9refer to Maintenance Schedule for additional information). More often under severe
conditions (operating in water or hauling heavy loads.
oAnnually or 100 hours of operation (refer to Maintenance Schedule for additional information). More often under severe
conditions (operating in water or hauling heavy loads.
pGrease conforming to NLGI No. 2, such as Polaris Premium All Season Grease, Conoco Superlube M, or Mobilgrease Special
2.11
MAINTENANCE
Front Gearcase Lubrication To Change Gearcase Lubricant:
The front gearcase lubricant level should be checked and

changed in accordance with the maintenance schedule.
• Be sure vehicle is level before proceeding and in PARK
• Check vent hose to be sure it is routed properly and
unobstructed
• The correct front gearcase lubricant to use is Polaris
Premium Demand Hub Fluid.
FRONT GEARCASE
Drain Plug
1. Remove gearcase drain plug (A) located on the bottom of

Fill Plug the gearcase and drain oil. (The drain plug is accessible
8-10 ft.lbs. through the skid plate.) Catch and discard used oil
(11-14 Nm) properly.
2. Clean and reinstall drain plug (A) using a new sealing
washer (B). Torque to specification.
Drain Plug
11 ft.lbs. (15 Nm)
Fill Plug
=
Specified Lubricant:
Demand Drive LT Premium Hub Fluid
ADC Gearcase Capacity: 9.3 oz. (275 ml.) Left Side View
3. Remove fill plug. Inspect the O-ring.

=T
4. Fill with the recommended fluid amount or to the bottom
Fill Plug Torque: 8-10 ft.lbs. (11-14 Nm) of the fill plug hole threads. (See Illustration below).
Front Gearcase
Drain Plug Torque: 11 ft.lbs. (15 Nm)
To Check the Lubricant Level:
The front gearcase lubricant level cannot be checked with a
dipstick. The gearcase must be drained and re-filled with the
proper amount of lubricant or be filled to the bottom of the fill Fill - Premium
plug hole threads. Refer to procedures. Demand Drive
Hub Fluid
5. Install / torque fill plug and check for leaks.
2.12
MAINTENANCE
Rear Gearcase Lubrication - 800 EFI To Change Gearcase Lubricant:
The rear gearcase lubricant level should be checked and 1. Remove gearcase drain plug (A) located on the bottom of
changed in accordance with the maintenance schedule. the gearcase and drain oil. (The drain plug is accessible
through the skid plate.) Catch and discard used oil
• Be sure vehicle is level before proceeding and in PARK
properly.
• Check vent hose to be sure it is routed properly and
unobstructed
2
Drain Plug
2. Clean and reinstall drain plug (A) using a new sealing

washer (B). Torque to specification.
3. Remove fill plug. Inspect the o-ring and replace if
necessary.
4. Fill with the recommended fluid amount or to the bottom
of the fill plug hole threads. (See Illustration below).
=
Premium Synthetic AGL Gearcase Fluid
Gearcase Capacity: 5.0 oz. (150 ml.)
Fill Plug
=T
Fill Plug Torque: 8-10 ft.lbs. (11-14 Nm)
Drain Plug Torque: 11 ft.lbs. (15 Nm) Drain Plug
To Check the Lubricant Level: 5. Install / torque fill plug and check for leaks.
The rear gearcase lubricant level cannot be checked with a
dipstick. The gearcase must be drained and re-filled with the
proper amount of lubricant or be filled to the bottom of the fill
plug hole threads. Refer to procedures.
2.13
MAINTENANCE
Transmission Lubrication
The (transmission) lubricant level should be checked and =
changed in accordance with the maintenance schedule.
• Be sure vehicle is level and in Park before proceeding. Transmission - Specified Lubricant:
Polaris AGL Gearcase Lubricant
• Check vent hose to be sure it is routed properly and (Gallon - PN 2873603) (12 oz. - PN 2873602)
unobstructed.
• Follow instructions to check / change transmission Sportsman - Capacity: 15 oz. (450 ml)
lubricant. X2-Touring - Capacity: 32 oz. (948 ml)
=T
Transmission
Sportsman - Drain / Fill Plug Torque:
14 ft.lbs. (19 Nm)
Sportsman X2-Touring -
Drain / Fill Plug Torque:
20-25 ft.lbs. (27-34 Nm)
To Check the Fluid Level:

1. Remove fill plug from the back of the transmission and
visually inspect the oil level. Level is correct when it
SPORTSMAN reaches the bottom of the fill hole as shown at below.
NOTE: The drain and fill plug use a 5/16” hex for
removal and installation.
To Change Lubricant:
1. Remove transmission drain plug to drain the oil. Discard
used oil properly.
2. Clean and reinstall the drain plug. Torque to specification.
3. Remove fill plug.
4. Add the correct amount of Polaris AGL Gearcase
Lubricant.
Oil Fill Plug 5. Check for leaks.
6. Install fill plug. Torque to specification.
Oil Fill Level-

Bottom Fill Plug
Hole Threads
SPORTSMAN X2-Touring
2.14
MAINTENANCE
ADC Differential Hydraulic Circuit Fluid VEHICLE INSPECTION
Change
1. Make sure vehicle is parked on flat ground and allowed to
Shift Link Rod Inspection
sit at least 30 minutes prior to bleeding hydraulic circuit. NOTE: Shift rod is preset at time of manufacturer.
2. Thoroughly clean area around and on remote reservoir and
bleeder valves.
3. Remove reservoir cap and diaphragm assembly.
1. Inspect shift link tie rod ends and replace if worn or
damaged. Lubricate pivot points with a light aerosol 2
4. Make sure hydraulic oil inside reservoir is free of debris. lubricant or grease if desired.
If any debris is found, use clean rag or suction device to
remove from the reservoir.
NOTE: Debris in reservoir may block porting and
produce inadequate bleeding of the system.
Decreased performance may be encountered with
inadequate bleed of the hydraulic circuit. Shift Mount
5. Begin the bleeding process by filling reservoir to ‘MAX’

line with clean Polaris ADC hydraulic fluid.
6. Locate bleeder valves found on either side of differential
and remove the protective caps. Shifter
7. Turn bleeder valves counter-clockwise to loosen. Loosen
bleeder screw slowly, allowing oil and any trapped air to
flow out of fitting.
IMPORTANT: Do not allow hydraulic fluid in reservoir Shift Link Rod
to drain below minimum fill line. Close bleeder valve
before oil level falls below minimum fill line. Refilling
empty reservoir will result in air pockets becoming
trapped.
NOTE: If empty reservoir is encountered, filling of
fluid is still possible. Verify air is not trapped before
proceeding with step 7.
8. Continue steps 6-8 on both sides in sequence until clean

fluid is seen when bleeding occurs.
9. Re-torque both bleeder valves to specification and reinstall
cover caps.
=T
Bleeder Valve Torque:
80 in. lbs. (9 Nm)
10. Fill reservoir with to a level midway between ‘MAX’ and

‘MIN’ fill lines. Verify no debris is found in reservoir oil.
11. Replace reservoir cap securely and wipe clean any residue.
2.15
MAINTENANCE
Throttle Inspection Throttle Cable / Electronic Throttle Control
(ETC Switch) Adjustment
Check for smooth throttle opening and closing in all handlebar
positions. Throttle lever operation should be smooth and lever 1. Slide boot off throttle cable adjuster and jam nut.
must return freely without binding.
2. Place shift selector in neutral and set parking brake.
1. Place the gear selector in neutral. 3. Loosen lock nut on in-line cable adjuster (Ill. 1).
2. Place shift selector in neutral and set parking brake.
3. Loosen lock nut on in-line cable adjuster (Ill. 1). Boot
Boot
4. Turn handlebars from full right to full left. If idle speed Adjuster Sleeve Lock Nut
increases at any point in the turning range, inspect throttle
cable routing and condition. Adjust cable tension as needed
until lock-to-lock turning can be accomplished with no rise
in engine rpm.
5. Replace the throttle cable if worn, kinked, or damaged.
To Remove ETC Cover:

1. Use a medium flat blade screwdriver and insert blade into
the pocket of the cover starting on the #1 position.
2. Twist screwdriver slightly while lifting on the cover to 4. Turn adjuster until specified freeplay is achieved at thumb
release snap. lever. (see illustration). After making adjustments, quickly
3. Repeat procedure at the other five locations as shown. actuate the thumb lever several times and reverify freeplay.
NOTE: Do not attempt to remove cover until all latch
points are released.
Direction of Travel
ETC Cover
Removal Sequence 1/16-1/8” Freeplay
= In. / mm.
Throttle Freeplay:
.0625 - .1250" (1.58 - 3.17mm)
5. Tighten lock nut securely and slide boot completely in

place to ensure a water-resistant seal.
6. Turn handlebars from left to right through the entire turning
range. If idle speed increases, check for proper cable
routing. If cable is routed properly and in good condition,
repeat adjustment procedure
2.16
MAINTENANCE
Fuel System 4. Remove fuel lines from filter, use shop towels to catch any
leaking fuel.
5. Install new filter in line with arrow pointed in direction of
WARNING fuel flow.
6. Install line locks on fuel lines and verify locks are seated.
* Gasoline is extremely flammable and explosive 7. Start engine and inspect for leaks.
under certain conditions.
* EFI components are under high pressure. Verify
2
Vent Lines
system pressure has been relieved before
disassembly. Check fuel tank, oil tank, battery and transmission vent lines for
* Never drain the fuel system when the engine is signs of wear, deterioration, damage or leakage. Replace Be
hot. Severe burns may result sure vent lines are routed properly and secured with cable ties.
* Do not overfill the tank. The tank is at full capacity
when the fuel reaches the bottom of the filler neck.
CAUTION
Leave room for expansion of fuel.
* Never start the engine or let it run in an enclosed
Verify vent lines are not kinked or damaged
area. Gasoline powered engine exhaust fumes are
poisonous and can cause loss of consciousness
and death in a short time. Compression Test
* Do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks in NOTE: This engine does NOT have decompression
or near the area where refueling is performed or components. Compression readings will vary in
where gasoline is stored. proportion to cranking speed during the test.
* If you get gasoline in your eyes or if you should Average compression (measured) is about 150-200
swallow gasoline, seek medical attention psi during a compression test.
immediately.
* If you spill gasoline on your skin or clothing, A smooth idle generally indicates good compression. Low
immediately wash with soap and water and change engine compression is rarely a factor in running condition
clothing. problems above idle speed. Abnormally high compression can
be caused by carbon deposits in the combustion chamber or
* Always stop the engine and refuel outdoors or in worn, damaged exhaust cam lobes. Inspect camshaft and
a well ventilated area.Keep away from open flames combustion chamber if compression is abnormally high.
and electrical components when removing fuel
A cylinder leakdown test is the best indication of engine
filter. condition. Follow manufacturer's instructions to perform a
cylinder leakage test. (Never use high pressure leakage testers,
NOTE: Only Touring and X2 models have a as crankshaft seals may dislodge and leak).
serviceable external fuel filter.
Cylinder Compression
Touring and X2 Only - The fuel filter (1) should be replaced in Standard: 150-200 PSI
accordance with the Periodic Maintenance Chart. To replace the
filter:
Cylinder Leakdown
Service Limit 15%
EFI Example
(1) (Inspect for cause if test exceeds 15%)
1. Disconnect negative battery cable.

2. Relieve the pressure on the fuel rail. (See Ch. 4)
3. Remove line locks at both ends of the filter.
2.17
MAINTENANCE
Engine Mounts 5. Measure gap with a wire gauge. Refer to specifications for
proper spark plug type and gap. Adjust gap if necessary by
Inspect rubber engine mounts (A) for cracks or damage. bending the side electrode carefully.
Check engine fasteners and mounts, ensure they are tight.
Spark Plug Gap
.036 (0.9 mm)
6. If necessary, replace spark plug with proper type.
CAUTION
Severe engine damage may occur if the incorrect

spark plug is used.
7. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the spark

plug threads.
8. Install spark plug and torque to specification.
Spark Plug
1. Clean plug area so no dirt and debris can fall into engine =T
when plug is removed. Remove spark plug high tension
lead. Recommended Spark Plug
2. Remove spark plug. Refer to the Specifications page in
3. Inspect electrodes for wear and carbon buildup. Look for Chapter 1 for spark plug type.
a sharp outer edge with no rounding or erosion of the Spark Plug Torque: 18 ft.lbs. (24 Nm)
electrodes.
Active Descent Control (ADC) Reservoir
Level
The Active Descent Control reservoir is located by the radiator
fill cap. Check the level and verify it is between the ‘MAX’ and
‘MIN’ lines. Add only Polaris ADC fluid when required.
4. Clean with electrical contact cleaner or a glass bead spark

plug cleaner only.
CAUTION
A wire brush or coated abrasive should not

be used for cleaning sparkplugs.
2.18
MAINTENANCE
Battery Maintenance To Remove the Battery:
Complete battery servicing information for both conventional 1. Disconnect holder strap and remove cover.
and sealed batteries can be found in Chapter 10 of this 2. Disconnect battery negative (-) (black) cable first, followed
manual. by the positive (+) (red) cable.
WARNING CAUTION
2
Battery electrolyte is poisonous. It contains sulfuric To reduce the chance of sparks: Whenever
acid. Serious burns can result from contact with removing the battery, disconnect the negative
skin, eyes or clothing. Antidote: (black) cable first. When reinstalling the battery,
install the negative cable last.
External: Flush with water.
3. Disconnect the vent hose.
Internal: Drink large quantities of water or milk.
Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten egg, or 4. Remove the battery.
vegetable oil. Call physician immediately. 5. (Conventional Battery Only) Remove the filler caps and
add distilled water only as needed to bring each cell to the
Eyes: Flush with water for 15 minutes and get
prompt medical attention. proper level. Do not overfill the battery.
IMPORTANT: Use only distilled water. Tap water
Batteries produce explosive gases. Keep sparks, contains minerals which are harmful to a battery.
flame, cigarettes, etc. away. Ventilate when
charging or using in an enclosed space. Always IMPORTANT: Do not allow cleaning solution or tap
shield eyes when working near batteries. water to enter a battery, as it will shorten the life of the
KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN. battery.
6. Fully recharge the battery.
NOTE: Expected battery shelf life is 6-8 months 7. Reinstall battery caps (Conventional Battery Only).
depending on storage conditions. As a general rule 8. Clean battery cables and terminals with a stiff wire brush.
before placing the battery into service, check the Corrosion can be removed using a solution of one cup water
battery condition and charge accordingly. and one tablespoon baking soda. Rinse well with clean
NOTE: New Batteries: Batteries must be fully water and dry thoroughly.
charged before use or battery life will be reduced by 9. Reinstall battery, attaching positive (+) (red) cable first and
10-30% of full potential. Charge battery for 3-5 hours then the negative (-) (black) cable.
at a current equivalent of 1/10 of the battery's rated 10. Reattach vent hose making sure it is properly routed and not
amp/hour capacity. Do not use the alternator to kinked or pinched.
charge a new battery. (Refer to battery video PN 11. Coat terminals and bolt threads with Dielectric Grease (PN
9917987). 2871329).
(Conventional Battery Only) Inspect the battery fluid level. 12. Reinstall battery cover and holder strap.
When the electrolyte nears the lower level, remove the battery
and add distilled water only to the upper level line . Cooling System
The engine coolant level is controlled or maintained by the
recovery system. The recovery system components are the
recovery bottle, radiator filler neck, radiator pressure cap and
connecting hose.
Maintain between
upper and lower As coolant operating temperature increases, the expanding
level marks (heated) excess coolant is forced out of the radiator past the
pressure cap and into the recovery bottle. As engine coolant
temperature decreases the contracting (cooled) coolant is drawn
back up from the tank past the pressure cap and into the radiator.
• Some coolant level drop on new machines is normal as
the system is purging itself of trapped air. Observe
coolant levels often during the break-in period.
• Overheating of engine could occur if air is not fully
purged from system.
• Polaris Premium 60/40 anti-freeze is premixed and
ready to use. Do not dilute with water.
2.19
MAINTENANCE
Coolant Strength / Type Radiator
Test the strength of the coolant using an antifreeze 1. Check radiator external air flow passages for restrictions or
hydrometer. damage.
2. Carefully straighten any bent radiator fins.
3. Remove any obstructions with compressed air or low
pressure water.
Cooling System Pressure Test

See Chapter 3 for pressure test procedures.
Antifreeze Hydrometer Reservoir Level Inspection

• A 50/50 or 60/40 mixture of antifreeze and distilled
water will provide the optimum cooling, corrosion WARNING
protection, and antifreeze protection.
• Do not use tap water, straight antifreeze, or Never remove the radiator pressure cap when the
straight water in the system. Tap water contains engine is warm or hot. Escaping steam and fluid
minerals and impurities which build up in the
system. can cause severe burns. The engine must be
allowed to cool before removing the pressure cap.
• Straight water or antifreeze may cause the system
to freeze, corrode, or overheat. Remove any obstructions with compressed air or low pressure
water.
Polaris 60/40 Anti-Freeze/ Coolant With the engine at operating temperature, the coolant level
should be between the upper and lower marks on the coolant
(PN 2871323) reservoir. If it is not:
1. Remove reservoir cap. Verify the vent is clear and open.
Cooling Hoses 2. Fill reservoir to upper mark with Polaris Premium 60/40
Anti Freeze / Coolant (PN 2871323) or a mixture of
Inspect all hoses for cracks, deterioration, abrasion or leaks.
Replace if necessary. antifreeze and distilled water as required for freeze
protection in your area.
Coolant Bottle 3. Reinstall cap.
Upper Radiator Hose NOTE: If overheating is evident, allow system to
cool completely and check coolant level in the
radiator. Inspect for signs of trapped air in system.
Recovery Bottle
Lower Radiator Hose

Fan
1. Check tightness of all hose clamps.

2. Do not over-tighten hose clamps at radiator or radiator
fitting may distort, causing a restriction or leak.
2.20
MAINTENANCE
Radiator Coolant Level 3. Remove clips (A) from air box cover and remove cover.
Inspect the gasket. It should adhere tightly to the cover and
seal all the way around.
WARNING
Never remove the radiator pressure cap when the

engine is warm or hot. Escaping steam and fluid
can cause severe burns. The engine must be 2
allowed to cool before removing the pressure cap.
NOTE: This procedure is only required if the cooling

system has been drained for maintenance and/or
repair. However, if the recovery bottle has run dry,
or if overheating is evident, the level in the radiator
should be inspected via the radiator cap first and
coolant added if necessary.
NOTE: Use of a non-standard pressure cap will not 4. Loosen clamp and remove air filter assembly.
allow the recovery system to function properly.
Cover
To Access the Radiator Pressure Cap:
Lift the front cargo cover. Remove access cover (A) by placing Seal
your fingers under the front of the cover and pulling upward.
The radiator cap (B) is now accessible.
Pre-filter
Main Element
A
Cleaning:
B
5. Slip the pre-filter element off of main element. Clean the
pre filter with hot soapy water.
6. Rinse and dry thoroughly.
7. Inspect element for tears or damage.
Air Filter Service 8. Inspect main filter and replace if necessary. If the filter has
It is recommended that the air filter and pre filter be replaced been soaked with fuel or oil it must be replaced.
annually. When riding in extremely dusty conditions,
replacement is required more often. Installation:
The pre filter should be inspected before each ride, and if 9. Reinstall pre-filter element over main filter. Be sure the
required, cleaned using the following procedure: element covers entire surface of main filter without folds,
1. Lift up on the rear of the seat. creases, or gaps.
2. Pull the seat back and free of the tabs. 10. Reinstall filter on main filter mount. Place filter clamp over
NOTE: When reinstalling seat, make sure the slots the assembly and tighten.
in the seat engage the tabs in the fuel tank.
2.21
MAINTENANCE
NOTE: Apply a small amount of general purpose NOTE: The sediment tube will require more frequent
grease to the sealing edges of the filter before service if the vehicle is operated in wet conditions or
reinstalling. at high throttle openings for extended periods.
B
A
Proper Filter Main Filter

Engine Breather Hose
Placement Four-cycle ATV engines are equipped with a engine breather
hose. The breather line is located on top of the cylinder head
cover, below the gas tank. Be sure breather line is routed
properly and secured in place. Make sure the line is not kinked
Filter Support or pinched.
Air Box
To Cylinder
Head Cover
Front of ATV
NOTE: The air filter should rest on the filter support. Breather
Proper placement of the air filter is important to Hose
prevent rattles and air leaks.
11. Install air box cover and secure with clips.
Air Box Sediment Tube

Periodically check the air box drain tube located toward the rear
of the machine. Drain whenever deposits are visible in the clear
tube.
1. Remove drain plug (A) from end of sediment tube (B).
2. Drain tube.
3. Reinstall drain plug.
2.22
MAINTENANCE
PVT Inspection / Drying Procedure Engine Oil Level
NOTE: If operating the ATV in or through water, be The twin engine is a wet-sump engine, meaning the oil is
sure to check the PVT cover and other components contained in the bottom of the crankcase. To check the oil level:
for water ingestion. The ATV should be checked
immediately.
1. To release any water that maybe trapped in the PVT cover, 2

simply remove the PVT drain plug and O-ring (A) located
on the bottom of the PVT cover and let the water drain out.
The PVT drain plug is shown below.
Dipstick
1. Set machine on a level surface.

2. Be sure the machine has sat for awhile before removing the
dipstick. Do not run the engine and then check the oil level,
as this will result in an incorrect reading.
A
A
2. To further expel water from the cover and to dry out the
PVT system, shift the transmission to neutral and rev
engine slightly to expel the moisture and air-dry the belt and
clutches. Allow engine RPM to settle to idle speed, shift
transmission to lowest available range and test for belt
slippage. Operate ATV in lowest available range for a short
period of time until PVT system is dry.
Engine Ground
Inspect engine-to-frame ground cable connection. Be sure the 3. Unlock the lever lock (A). Remove dipstick (B) and wipe
connection clean and tight. dry with a clean cloth.
A
B
Typical Ground Cable
2.23
MAINTENANCE
4. Reinstall dipstick and push it into place. Do not lock the Oil/filter Change
dipstick.
1. Place vehicle on a level surface.
NOTE: Make certain the dipstick is inserted all the
2. Run engine two to three minutes until warm. Stop engine.
way into the filler tube to keep the angle and depth of
stick consistent. When reinstalling the dipstick, 3. Clean area around drain plug at bottom of engine.
make certain to seat the lever lock. 4. Place a drain pan beneath crankcase and remove drain plug.
5. Remove dipstick and check to see that the oil level is in the CAUTION
normal range. Add oil as indicated by the level on the
dipstick. Do not overfill. (See NOTE below!) Do not allow hot oil to come into contact
NOTE: Due to the dipstick entry angle into the with your skin, as serious burns may result.
crankcase, the oil level will read higher on the
bottom side of the dipstick. Proper level indication 5. Allow oil to drain completely.
is determined on the upper side of the dipstick as it 6. Replace the sealing washer on drain plug.
is being removed, regardless of the level marks NOTE: The sealing surfaces on drain plug and oil
being on top or on bottom. (See illustration) tank should be clean and free of burrs, nicks or
scratches.
Dipstick 7. Reinstall drain plug and torque to specification.
=T
Always read top side of dipstick to Drain Plug Torque:
properly check oil level in crankcase.
15 ± 2 ft.lbs. (21.7 ± 2.7 Nm)
8. Place shop towels beneath oil filter. Using Oil Filter

Wrench PV-43527, turn filter counterclockwise to remove.
NOTE: A rising oil level between checks in cool

weather driving can indicate contaminants such as Oil Filter
gas or moisture collecting in the crankcase. If the oil
level is over the full mark, change the oil
immediately.
9. Using a clean dry cloth, clean filter sealing surface on

crankcase.
10. Lubricate O-ring on new filter with a film of fresh engine
oil. Check to make sure the O-ring is in good condition.
11. Install new filter and turn by hand until filter gasket contacts
the sealing surface, then turn an additional 1/2 turn.
12. Remove dipstick and fill sump with 2 quarts (1.9 l) of
Polaris PS 4 Plus Synthetic Oil.
13. Place gear selector in park and set the parking brake.
2.24
MAINTENANCE
14. Start the engine and let it idle for one to two minutes. Stop Tie Rod / Steering
the engine and inspect for leaks.
• To check for play in the tie rod end, grasp the steering
15. Re-check the oil level on the dipstick and add oil as tie rod, pull in all directions feeling for movement.
necessary to bring the level to the upper mark on the
dipstick. • Repeat inspection for inner tie rod end on steering post.
16. Dispose of used filter and oil properly.
2
Recommended Engine Oil:
2W/50 Synthetic
Oil Filter Wrench: (PV-43527)
Oil Filter Torque: Turn by hand until filter

gasket contacts sealing surface, then turn an
additional 1/2 turn
Steering Inspection
• Replace any worn steering components. Steering
should move freely through entire range of travel
WARNING without binding.
• Elevate front end of machine so front wheels are off the
Due to the critical nature of the procedures outlined ground. Check for any looseness in front hub / wheel
in this chapter, Polaris recommends steering assembly by grasping the tire firmly at top and bottom
component repair and adjustment be performed by first, and then at front and rear. Try to move the wheel
and hub by pushing inward and pulling outward.
an authorized Polaris MSD-certified technician
when replacing worn or damaged steering parts. • If abnormal movement is detected, inspect the hub and
Use only genuine Polaris replacement parts. wheel assembly to determine the cause ( possible loose
wheel nuts or loose front hub components).
The steering components should be checked periodically for
loose fasteners, worn tie rod ends, and damage. Also check to
make sure all cotter pins are in place. If cotter pins are removed,
they must not be re-used. Always use new cotter pins.
Replace any worn or damaged steering components. Steering
should move freely through entire range of travel without
binding. Check routing of all cables, hoses, and wiring to be
sure the steering mechanism is not restricted or limited.
NOTE: Whenever steering components are
replaced, check front end alignment. Use only
genuine Polaris parts.
Check for loose wheel or hub.
One of two methods can be used to measure toe alignment. The
string method and the chalk method. If adjustment is required,
refer to following pages for procedure.
• Refer to the Body/Steering Chapter 5 or Final Drive
Chapter 7 for service procedures.
Camber/Caster
Camber and caster are non-adjustable.
2.25
MAINTENANCE
Wheel Alignment Toe Alignment
1. Place machine on a smooth level surface. If toe alignment is incorrect, measure the distance between
2. Set handlebars in a straight ahead position and secure vehicle center and each wheel. This will tell you which tie rod
needs adjusting.
handlebars in this position.
3. Place a chalk mark on the center line of the front tires NOTE: Be sure handlebars are straight ahead before
approximately 10" (25.4 cm) from the floor or as close to determining which tie rod(s) need adjustment.
the hub/axle center line as possible.
NOTE: It is important that the height of both marks
be equally positioned in order to get an accurate
CAUTION
measurement.
During tie rod adjustment, it is very important that
4. Measure the distance between the marks and record the the following precautions be taken when tightening
measurement. Call this measurement “A”. tie rod end jam nuts. If the rod end is positioned
5. Rotate the tires 180° by moving vehicle forward or incorrectly it will not pivot, and may break.
backward. Position chalk marks facing rearward, even with
the hub/axle centerline. To Adjust Toe Alignment:
6. Again measure the distance between the marks and record. • Hold tie rod end to keep it from rotating.
Call this measurement “B”. Subtract measurement “B”
from measurement “A”. The difference between • Loosen jam nuts at both end of the tie rod.
measurements “A” and “B” is the vehicle toe alignment. • Shorten or lengthen the tie rod until alignment is as
The recommended vehicle toe tolerance is 1/8" to 1/4" (.3 required to achieve the proper toe setting as specified.
to .6 cm) toe out. This means the measurement at the front
• IMPORTANT: When tightening the tie rod end jam
of the tire (A) is 1/8" to 1/4" (.3 to .6 cm) wider than the nuts, the rod ends must be held parallel to prevent rod
measurement at the rear (B). end damage and premature wear. Damage may not be
immediately apparent if done incorrectly. See
illustration.
• After alignment is complete, torque jam nuts to
specification.
Hold Rod
End
Chalk Line Correctly Incorrectly

Measurement “A” Measurement “B” Tightened Tightened Jam
Jam Nut Nut
= In. / mm.
=T
Wheel Toe-Out: Tie Rod Jam Nut Torque:
(A) - (B) = 1/8 - 1/4" (.3 to .6 cm) 12-14 ft. lbs. (16-19 Nm)
2.26
MAINTENANCE
Exhaust Pipe 6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 until no more particles are
expelled when the engine is revved.
The exhaust pipe must be periodically purged of accumulated
carbon as follows: 7. Stop the engine and allow the arrestor to cool.
8. Reinstall the clean out plugs.
1. Remove the clean out plugs located on the bottom of the
muffler as shown WARNING
2
* Do not perform clean-out immediately after the
engine has been run, as the exhaust system
becomes very hot. Serious burns could result from
contact with hot exhaust components.
Clean Out Plug * To reduce fire hazard, make sure that there are no
combustible materials in the area when purging the
2. Place the transmission in neutral and start the engine. Purge spark arrestor.
accumulated carbon from the system by momentarily * Wear eye protection.
revving the engine several times. * Do not stand behind or in front of the vehicle while
3. If some carbon is expelled, cover the exhaust outlet and rap purging the carbon from the spark arrestor.Never
on the pipe around the clean out plugs while revving the run the engine in an enclosed area.
engine several more times. * Exhaust contains poisonous carbon monoxide
gas.
* Do not go under the machine while it is inclined.
Set the hand brake and block the wheels to prevent
roll back.
Failure to heed these warnings could result in
serious personal injury or death.
Brake System Inspection

The following checks are recommended to keep the brake
system in good operating condition. Service life of brake system
components depends on operating conditions. Inspect brakes in
4. If particles are still suspected to be in the muffler, back the accordance with the maintenance schedule and before each ride.
machine onto an incline so the rear of the machine is one • Keep fluid level in the master cylinder reservoir to the
foot higher than the front. Set the hand brake and block the indicated level inside reservoir (See Chapter 9)
wheels. Make sure the machine is in neutral and repeat
Steps 2 and 3. See WARNING in this section. • Use Polaris DOT-approved Brake Fluid.
5. If particles are still suspected to be in the muffler, drive the • Check brake system for fluid leaks, look for dust build
machine onto the incline so the front of the machine is one up on lines and connections that may indicate a fluid
leak
foot higher than the rear. Set the hand brake and block the
wheels. Make sure the machine is in neutral and repeat • Check brake for excessive travel or spongy feel
Steps 2 and 3. SEE WARNING in this section.
• Check friction pads for wear, damage or looseness (see
Chapter 9)
• Check surface condition of the disc (see Chapter 9)
1 ft. (30.5 cm)
2.27
MAINTENANCE
• Inspect thickness of brake pad friction material (see Brake Hose Inspection
Chapter 9)
Check brake system hoses and fittings for cracks, deterioration,
Sight Glass abrasion, and leaks. Tighten any loose fittings and replace any
worn or damaged parts.
Parking Lock Brake
Auxiliary (Rear) Brake Test

The auxiliary brake (A) should be checked for proper function.
Brake Pads
Pads should be changed when the friction material is worn
beyond the service limit.
Brake Pad
Measure Thickness
1. Support the rear wheels off the ground.

= In. / mm.
Brake Pad Service Limit:

.180" (4.6 mm)
2.28
MAINTENANCE
2. While turning the rear wheels by hand, apply the auxiliary Bleeding:
foot brake. This brake should not stop the wheels from
If free play is correct and brake pedal travel is still excessive, air
turning until the lever is half way between its rest position may be trapped somewhere in the system. Bleed the hydraulic
and bottoming on the footrest. auxiliary brake system in a conventional manner, following the
procedure outlined in Brake Chapter 9.
Auxiliary Foot Brake
Suspension: Spring Preload Adjustment
Pedal - Full Height
Operator weight and vehicle loading affect suspension spring
2
Full Engagement preload requirements. Adjust as necessary. Use Shock Spanner
Wrench (PN 2870872) to adjust the rear springs.
Front Suspension
• Compress and release front suspension. Dampening
should be smooth throughout the range of travel.
Floor Board Surface • Check all front suspension components for wear or
damage.
• Inspect front strut cartridges for leakage.
Auxiliary Brake Adjustment Rear Suspension
Use the following procedure to inspect the hydraulic auxiliary • Compress and release rear suspension. Dampening
(foot) brake system and adjust or bleed if necessary: should be smooth throughout the range of travel.
First, check foot brake effectiveness by applying 50 lb. (approx.) • Check all rear suspension components for wear or
downward force on the pedal. The top of the pedal should be at damage.
least 1 inch, (25.4mm) above the surface of the footrest.
• Inspect shock for leakage.
CV Shaft Boot Inspection

1/8 to 1/4 inch
Free Play Inspect the CV shaft boots in the front and rear of the ATV for
damage, tears, wear, or leaking grease. If the rubber boot
exhibits any of these symptoms, replace the boot. Refer to
1 inch or greater Chapter 7 for CV boot replacement, or have your Polaris dealer
replace the boot.
Floorboard
If less than one inch, two things must be examined:

Free Play:
= In. / mm. INSPECT BOOTS
Foot Brake Freeplay:

1/8 - 1/4 inch (3.2 - 6.35 mm)
If free play is excessive, inspect pedal, linkage, and master

cylinder for wear or damage and replace any parts as needed.
2.29
MAINTENANCE
ATV Controls 3. Elevate the side of the vehicle by placing a suitable stand
under the footrest frame.
Check controls for proper operation, positioning and
adjustment.
Brake control and switch must be positioned to allow brake
lever to travel throughout entire range without contacting switch
body.
4. Remove the wheel nuts and remove the wheel.
Wheel Installation
1. With the transmission in park and the parking brake
locked, place the wheel in the correct position on the wheel
hub. Be sure the valve stem is toward the outside and
rotation arrows on the tire point toward forward rotation.
2. Attach the wheel nuts and finger tighten them.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground.
Wheel Inspection 4. Securely tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque listed
Inspect all wheels for runout or damage. Check wheel nuts and in the table .
ensure they are tight. Do not over tighten the wheel nuts.
Steel Wheel Aluminum Wheel
Item Specification
Steel - Front and Rear 27 ft.lbs. (37 Nm)
Wheel Nuts
Aluminum - Front and Rear 90 ft.lbs. (122 Nm)
Wheel Nuts
Front Hub Retaining Nut 60 ft.lbs. (81 Nm)
Rear Hub Retaining Nut 80 ft.lbs. (108 Nm)
Wheel Removal: Front Or Rear
CAUTION
4Wheel Nuts
Improperly installed wheels could affect vehicle
handling and tire wear. On vehicles with tapered
rear wheel nuts, make sure tapered end of nut goes
into taper on wheel. Torque to proper specification.
Retaining Nut
1. Stop the engine, place the transmission in gear and lock the
parking brake.
2. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly.
2.30
MAINTENANCE
Tire Pressure Front / Rear Storage Compartments
The front and rear storage (Sportsman Only) compartments are
CAUTION easily accessible. To open the front compartment turn the latch
handle to the horizontal position on both sides. To close the
storage compartment turn the latch handles to the vertical
Maintain proper tire pressure. Refer to the warning position.
tire pressure decal applied to the vehicle. 2
Table 2-1:
TIRE PRESSURE INSPECTION (PSI - COLD)
Front Rear
5 5
Tire Inspection
• Improper tire inflation may affect ATV
maneuverability. Front Storage - Unlatched
• When replacing a tire always use original equipment
size and type.
• The use of non-standard size or type tires may affect
ATV handling.
Tire Tread Depth
Always replace tires when tread depth is worn to 1/8, (3 mm) or
less.
Tread Depth - 1/8” (3 mm)
Front Storage - Latched
WARNING
Operating an ATV with worn tires will increase the

possibility of the vehicle skidding and possible loss
of control.
Worn tires can cause an accident.
Always replace tires when the tread depth
measures 1/8inch (.3 cm) or less.
Sportsman Rear Storage -
Frame, Nuts, Bolts, Fasteners
Periodically inspect the torque of all fasteners in accordance
with the maintenance schedule. Check that all cotter pins are in
place. Refer to specific fastener torques listed in each chapter.
2.31
MAINTENANCE
Winch Operation (If Equipped) The mini-rocker (IN/OUT) control controls the direction of the
cable for the winch. IN pulls the cable into the winch and OUT
This information is for Sportsman models equipped with a feeds the cable out of the winch.
winch in the front.
Winch Control
The winch control located on the side of the winch gives the
operator easy access to switch between ENGAGED and
FREESPOOL.
When the winch is ENGAGED, the winch only allows the cable
to be pulled IN or released OUT via the mini-rocker switch on
the handlebar.
When the winch is FREESPOOL, the winch allows the cable to
be pulled out freely.
Winch Handlebar Controls
NOTE: The switch on the handlebar does not have to be in
The winch is located in the front bumper area. the OUT position.
LFREESPOOL
ENGAGE
2.32
MAINTENANCE
Winch Wire Locations Locate the Red wire (6 Ga.) with the yellow crimp cover is
located in the rear fender area. The red wire connects to the
The winch wires can be located under the front cab area. Locate battery.
the wires, remove the cap and hook up to winch the Blue and
Yellow (6 Ga.) wires to the winch. Refer to the installation
instructions for more details.
Winch Connector
Winch Connecting Wire
2
The Orange/White wires are located under the front cover

(under headlight pod). The Orange/White wires supply the
control power to the winch.
Splash Guard for
Contactor mount Winch Connecting
Harness
Right Side Front Fender
2.33
MAINTENANCE
Cleaning And Storage Of ATV Clean the Exterior
Cleaning the ATV Make necessary repairs and then clean the ATV thoroughly with
mild soap and warm water to remove all dirt and grime. Don't
Keeping your ATV clean will not only improve its appearance use harsh detergents or high pressure washers. Some detergents
but it can also extend the life of various components. With a few deteriorate rubber parts. Use dish soap type cleaners only. High
precautions, your ATV can be cleaned much like an automobile. pressure washers may force water past seals.
Washing the ATV Stabilize the Fuel
The best and safest way to clean your ATV is with a garden hose Fill the fuel tank. Add Polaris Carbon Clean Fuel Treatment or
and a pail of mild soap and water. Use a professional type Polaris Fuel Stabilizer. Follow the instructions on the container
washing mitten, cleaning the upper body first and the lower parts for the recommended amount. (Carbon clean will also reduce
last. Rinse with water frequently and dry with a chamois to the possibility of bacterial growth in the fuel system.) Allow 15-
prevent water spots. 20 minutes of operation for the stabilizer to disperse through the
fuel in the tank and the fuel system.
NOTE: If warning and safety labels are damaged, contact
Oil and Filter
your a Polaris dealer for free replacement.
Warm the engine and change the oil and filter. Follow the
Polaris does not recommend the use of a high pressure type car procedure in this chapter for proper oil change.
wash system for washing the ATV. If a high pressure system is
used, exercise extreme care to avoid water damage to the wheel Air Filter / Air Box
bearings, transmission seals, body panels, brakes and warning
labels. Inspect and clean or replace the pre-cleaner and air filter. Clean
the air box and drain the sediment tube.
NOTE: Grease all zerk fittings immediately after
washing, and allow the vehicle to run for a while to Breather Filter
evaporate any water that may have entered the
Inspect and clean or replace the breather filter.
engine or exhaust system.
Fluid Levels
Waxing the ATV
Inspect the following fluid levels and change if necessary: front
ATVs can be waxed with any non-abrasive automotive paste gearcase; transmission; brake fluid (change every two years or
wax. Avoid the use of harsh cleaners since they can scratch the as required if fluid looks dark or contaminated).
body finish. Spray-on furniture polish is an acceptable
alternative. Do not use old cloths or pads which may contain dirt Drain and Recoil Housing (If Applicable)
particles that can scratch the finish. Polaris offers a detailing kit
for ATVs. Remove the recoil housing drain plug and drain any moisture.
Fog the Engine
CAUTION
Use Polaris Fogging Oil, following the instructions as directed.
Certain products, including insect repellents and If you choose not to use Polaris Fogging Oil, perform the
chemicals, will damage plastic surfaces. following procedure.
Use caution when using these 1. Treat the fuel system with Polaris Carbon Clean. If Polaris
products near plastic surfaces. fuel system additive is not used, the fuel tank and fuel lines
should be completely drained of gasoline.
Storage Tips
2. To access the plug hole, use a section of clear 1/4" hose and
See the beginning of the chapter for Pure Polaris storage a small plastic squeeze bottle filled with the pre-measured
products. amount of oil.
3. Remove the spark plug(s). Rotate the piston to BDC and
pour approximately two ounces of Polaris oil into the
CAUTION cylinder.
NOTE: Do this carefully! If you miss the plug hole,
Starting the engine during the storage period
oil will drain from the spark plug cavity into the hole
will disturb the protective film created
at the front of the cylinder head and appear to be an
by fogging. Damage could occur.
oil leak.
Never start the engine during the storage period
4. Apply dielectric grease to the inside of the spark plug cap
and install the cap onto the plug.
5. Turn the engine over several times to ensure coverage of
piston rings, cylinder walls and crankshaft bearings.
2.34
MAINTENANCE
6. After storage procedures are complete, do not start the Transporting the ATV
engine until unit is ready to be removed from storage.
Starting the engine will remove the protective coating from Follow these procedures when transporting the vehicle:
the engine components. 1. Turn off the engine and remove the key to prevent loss
during transporting.
Lubrication 2. Always place the transmission in park and lock the parking
Inspect all cables and lubricate with Polaris Cable Lubricant.
Follow lubrication guidelines in the maintenance section of the 3.
brake.
Be sure the fuel cap, oil cap and seat are installed correctly.
2
service or owner's manual to completely grease and lubricate the
entire vehicle with Polaris Premium All Season Grease. 4. Always tie the frame of the ATV to the transporting unit
securely using suitable straps or rope.
Battery Storage
Remove the battery from the vehicle and ensure that it's fully
charged before placing it in storage. See Chapter 10 for
instructions.
Engine Anti-Freeze
Test engine coolant strength and change if necessary. Coolant
should be replaced every two years.
Storage Area / Covers
Set the tire pressure and safely support the ATV with the tires 1-
2" off the ground. Be sure the storage area is well ventilated, and
cover the machine with a genuine Polaris ATV cover.
NOTE: Do not use plastic or coated materials. They
do not allow enough ventilation to prevent
condensation, and may promote corrosion and
oxidation.
2.35
MAINTENANCE
800 EFI Dual Exhaust Canister Maintenance
(Sportsman Only)
The canisters on dual-exhaust Polaris Sportsman 800 EFIs (X2-Touring not applicable) are powder coated. To maintain the finish and
prevent corrosion, periodic maintenance is required.
CAUTION
DO NOT use caustic chemicals to clean, as they

may damage the finish.
1. Wash any accumulated mud or debris from the canisters with a soft brush and soapy water.
2. Use a non-caustic cleaner to clean away any remaining grime, salts or oils.
3. Polish canisters if desired usind
Repeat this procedure as often as desired to maintain the finish.
800 EFI Dual Exhaust System

(X2-Touring not applicable)
2.36
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Schedule
Service Date Hours / Miles Service Performed Serviced By:
2.37
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Schedule
Service Date Hours / Miles Service Performed Serviced By:
2.38
ENGINE
CHAPTER 3
ENGINE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
CRANKCASE EXPLODED VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
ENGINE FASTENER TORQUE PATTERNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
800 EFI ENGINE SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
GENERAL ENGINE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
ACCESSIBLE COMPONENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
PISTON IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
3
COOLING SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
COOLING SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
FOUR STROKE - COOLANT AIR BLEEDING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
ENGINE REMOVAL (TYPICAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
ENGINE INSTALLATION NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18
CYLINDER HONE SELECTION AND HONING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18
HONING TO DEGLAZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19
CLEANING THE CYLINDER AFTER HONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19
OIL FLOW CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
ENGINE LUBRICATION SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
OIL PRESSURE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
ENGINE DISASSEMBLY AND INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
CYLINDER HEAD ASSEMBLY EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
ROCKER ARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22
PUSH RODS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22
CYLINDER HEAD REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22
CYLINDER HEAD INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23
CYLINDER HEAD WARP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23
VALVE SEAL/SPRING SERVICE
(ON ENGINE)3.23
CYLINDER HEAD DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24
VALVE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25
COMBUSTION CHAMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26
VALVE SEAT RECONDITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26
CYLINDER HEAD REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28
VALVE SEALING TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29
CYLINDER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29
VALVE LIFTER REMOVAL/INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29
PISTON REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.30
CYLINDER INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.31
PISTON-TO-CYLINDER CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32
PISTON/ROD INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32
PISTON RING INSTALLED GAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33
STARTER DRIVE/BENDIX REMOVAL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33
FLYWHEEL / STATOR REMOVAL / INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
ENGINE CRANKCASE DISASSEMBLY / INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
CAMSHAFT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
ENGINE REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43
CRANKCASE REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43
FLYWHEEL / STATOR INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.54
CYLINDER HEAD REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.55
TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.57
ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.57
COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.58
800 EFI EXHAUST SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.59
DUAL EXHAUST LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.59
3.1
ENGINE
SPECIFICATIONS
Crankcase Exploded Views
A. JournalBearings
B. Camshaft
C. Thrust Plate
D. Balance Shaft
E. Woodruff Key
F. Flange Seal
G. Crankshaft B
H. Oil Pickup
I. Journal Bearings
J. Baffle
K. Oil Plug C
L. Washer A
M. O-ring
N. Crankcase
O. Crankcase Bolts
115 ± 12 in.l
D (13 ± 1.35 Nm)
F E
60 ± 6 in.l
(6.8 .68 Nm)
G
I
H
I J
60 ± 6 in.lbs. NOTE: If needed, heat
(6.8 ± .68 Nm) the oil baffle bolts with a
heat gun to remove.
M
192 ± 24 in.lbs
K (21.7 ± 2.7 Nm)
L
Apply Loctite™242 to
bolt threads.
O
Apply White Lithium
Grease
22 ± 2 ft.lbs. (30 ± 3 Nm) Apply Moly

Lube Grease.
3.2
ENGINE
Oil / Water Pump and Timing Cover Exploded View
A. Split Gear
B. Washer
C. Bolt
D. Oil Rotor
E. Oil Pump
F. Mag Gasket Cover
G. Impeller
A H. Washer
B I. Nut
C J. Counterbalance Gear
K. Washer
L. Bolt
D
E
M. Oil Pump Bolts
N. Gear/Stator cover
O. Wire Hold down
3
P. Stator Housing Bolts
F
J
K
L
22 ± 2 ft.lbs. (30 ± 3 Nm)
G
M
H
84 ± 8 in.lbs. (9.5 ± .90 Nm) I
No Grease on this
Portion of the Gasket!
N 108 ±12 in.lbs.
(6.8 ± .68 Nm)
O
Apply corrosion resistant
grease to stator grommet area. P
96 ± 3 in.lbs.
(10.85 ± 0.35 Nm)
Oil Pump Bolt Tighten Sequence
Mag Cover Bolt Tighten Sequence
Apply Polaris OW-40

oil to component
Apply White Lithium
Grease
3.3
ENGINE
Starter / Flywheel / Water Pump Exploded View
Apply Polaris
Starter Grease Water Pump Cover
Bolt Tighten Sequence
Apply Polaris 0W-40
oil to seal
Loctite™ Pipe Sealant
(PN 2871956)
J
A No Grease or Oil
K
84 ± 8 ft.lbs. (9.5 ± 0.9 Nm)
L
Tighten Top Bolt First B 96 ± 12 in.lbs.
(10.85 ± 1.35 Nm)
1
2
C
D
E 108 ± 12 ft.lbs.
(12 ± 1.35 Nm) O
F N M
65 ± 7 ft.lbs.
(88 ± 9.5 Nm)
I
A. Bolts
B. Starter
C. Washer
D. Nut H
E. Positive Cable
F. Negative Cable
G. Gasket
H. Clamp
I. Bolts 96 ± 12 in.lbs.
J. Gasket (10.85± 1.35 Nm) Stator Cover Bolt
K. Water Pump Cover Tighten Sequence
L. Bolts
M. Crank Nut/Washer
N. Flywheel 8
3
O. Bendix
5 10
2
1
7 6
4 9
3.4
ENGINE
Oil System / Level Assembly Exploded View
A. Clamp
B. Oil Fill Tube
C. Dipstick C
D. O-ring
E. Hex Plug 50 ± 5 in.lbs. (5.64 A B
F. Oil Filter Nipple ± 0.56 Nm)
G. Oil Filter
H. Dowel
I. Galley Plug 22 ± 2 ft.lbs.
J. Nut/washer (30 ± 3 Nm) D
K. Spring
I K 3
H
J
18 ± 2 ft.lbs.
(24.4 ± 2.71 Nm)
E
35 ± 4 ft.lbs.
F (47.5 ± 5.4 Nm)
G
50 ± 5 in. lbs.
(5.65 0.56 Nm)
3.5
ENGINE
Cylinder / Cylinder Head Exploded View
Initial: 35 ± 4 ft. lbs (47.5 ± 5.5
Lubricate threads & between Nm) in sequence. Finalize
washers and underside of bolt sequence by tightening an
heads with engine oil. Torque in 1 additional 90° (1/4 turn)
sequence provided. (Apply each
Bolt Threads)
Apply Moly Lube grease to valve
tips. A
Gasket free of oil. Verify tabs 22 ± 2 ft.lbs.
are visible. (30 ± 3 Nm)B
Apply thin film of 0W-40

to 25-55 mm of cylinder bore.
2C Head Bolt Tighten
Sequence
Apply 0W-40 to piston pin or
pin bore.
D3
Apply 0W-40 to lifters.
F
Do Not install expansion plug
more than 1.5 mm inward.
E
1.5 mm
G
4
Side View 4
A. Head Bolts
B. Rocker Arms H
C. Head Assembly
D. Gasket I
E.
F.
Pushrods
Bushing
5 J Circlip UP
for Install
G. Expansion Plug
H. Cylinder
I. Piston Assembly 3
J. Circlip K
K. Gasket
L. Hydraulic Lifter L
6
Apply Polaris 0W--40 Oil
Apply Moly Lube Grease
3.6
ENGINE
Engine Sensors & Misc. Exploded View
A
84 ± 4 in.lbs.
(9.5 ± 0.9 Nm) B
C
A. Screws
20 ± 5 in.lbs.
B.
C.
D.
Rocker Cover
Breather
O-ring Seal
(2.5 ± 0.55 Nm) E
D 3
E. Breather Bolts 18 ± 2 ft.lbs.
F. Spark Plugs (24.5 ± 2.7 Nm)
F
G. Carburetor Boot
H. Bolts (Apply Dielectric Grease
I. Boot Clamp to threads of Spark Plug)
J. Throttle Body
K. Crank Position Sensor
L. Thermistor 18 ± 2 ft.lbs.
G
M. O-ring (24.5 ± 2.7 Nm)
N. Thermostat Housing H
O. Bolts
P. Gasket
Q. Exhaust Manifold 20 ± 5 in.lbs.
R. Bolts (2.5 ± 0.55 Nm) I
S. Thermostat
J K
Apply Corrosion
Resistant Grease 84 ± 4 in.lbs.
(9.5 ± 0.9 Nm)
25 ± 3 ft.lbs.
P L (34 ± 0.14 Nm)
Q
M
N O
84 ± 4 in.lbs.
(9.5 ± 0.9 Nm)
18 ± 2 ft.lbs.
R (24.5 ± 2.7 Nm)
3.7
ENGINE
EFI Harness Exploded View
A. Fuel Injector
B. Fuel Rail
C. EFI Harness
A
B
18 ± 2 ft.lbs.
(24.5 ± 2.7 Nm)
NOTE: See Chapter 4 for more information on the EFI system.
3.8
ENGINE
Engine Fastener Torque Patterns
Crankcase Bolt Tighten Sequence
22 ± 2 ft.lbs. (30 ± 3 Nm)
Lubricate threads and between washer and underside of bolt with engine oil.
Torque in sequence to spec provided, allow the gasket to set for 1 minute, then
tighten in sequence 90° (1/4 turn).
35 ± 4 ft.lbs.
(47.5 ± 5.5 Nm) + 90° (1/4 turn)
3.9
ENGINE
Torque Specifications
Table 3-1: Engine Torque Specifications
FASTENER SIZE IN.LBS. (NM) FT.LBS. (NM)

Camshaft Gear 8 mm 22 ± 2 (30 ± 3)
Camshaft Thrust Plate 6 mm 115 ± 12 (13 ± 1.35) 9.5 ± 1 (13 ± 1.35)
Carburetor Adaptor Bolts 8 mm 216 ± 24 (24.5-± 2.7) 18 ± 2 (24.5 ± 2.7)
Counterbalance Gear 8 mm 22 ± 2 (30 ± 3)
Crankcase Bolts 8 mm * 22 ± 2 (30 ± 3)
Crankcase Breather 5 mm 20 ± 5 (2.5 ± 0.55) -
Cylinder Head Bolts 11 mm * 35 ± 4 (47.5 ± 5.5)
Exhaust Manifold 8 mm 216 ± 24 (24.5 ± 2.70) 18 ± 2 (24.5 ± 2.7)
Flywheel 14 mm 65 ± 7 (88 ± 9.50)
Injector Rail 8 mm 216 ± 24 (24.5 ± 2.70) 18 ± 2 (24.5 ± 2.7)
Magneto Cover 6 mm * 96 ± 3 (10.85 ± 0.35) -
Oil Baffle Weldment 5 mm 60 ± 6 (6.8 ± 0.68) -
Oil Drain Bolt (Crankcase) 12 mm 192 ± 24 (21.7 ± 2.7) 16 ± (21.7)
Oil Fill Tube Bolt 5 mm 50 ± 5 (5.64 ± 0.56) -
Oil Filter Pipe Fitting 20 mm 35 ± 4 (47.5 ± 5.4)
Oil Pick Up 5 mm 60 ± 6 (6.8 ± 0.68) -
Oil Pressure Relief Plug 10 mm 22 ± 2 (30 ± 3) -
Oil Pump Housing Screw 6 mm * 84 ± 8 (9.50 ± 0.90) -
Rocker Arm 8 mm * 22 ± 2 (30 ± 3)
Rocker Cover 6 mm * 84 ± 8 (9.5 ± 0.9) -
Spark Plug 14 mm 216 ± 24 (24.5 ± 2.7) 18 ± 2 (24.5 ± 2.7)
Starter Motor 6 mm * 84 ± 8 (9.5 ± 0.9) -
Stator Assembly 6 mm 96 ± 3 (10.85 ± 0.35) -
Stator Housing 6 mm * 96 ± 3 (10.85 ± 0.35) -
Temperature Switch 3/8 NPT 25 ± 3 (34 ± 4)
Thermostat Housing 6 mm 84 ± 8 (9.5 ± 0.9) -
Timing Plug 3/4-16 7-9 (10-12 Nm)
Trigger Coil/Stator Wire Holddown 5 mm * 96 ± 3 (10.85 ± 0.35) -
Water Pump Housing Cover 6 mm * 96 ± 3 (10.85 ± 0.35) -
Water Pump Impeller Nut 8 mm 108 ± 3 (12 ± 0.35) -
NOTE: * See exploded views for notes or torque sequences.
3.10
ENGINE
EFI Engine Service Specifications
Table 3-1: Engine Specifications
MAIN COMPONENT: CYLINDER HEAD EH076OLE
In \ Exh (Std) - 1.334" (33.867 mm) \ 1.334" (33.867 mm)

Camshaft Cam Lobe Height - Intake / Exhaust
In \ Exh (H.O.) - 1.357" (34.477 mm) \ 1.342" (34.096 mm)
Camshaft Journal Outer Diameter - Mag 1.654" ± 0.00039" (42 ± 0.010 mm)
1.634"± 0.00039" (41.50 ± 0.010 mm)
Camshaft Journal Outer Diameter - Center
Camshaft Journal Outer Diameter - PTO 1.614" ± 0.00039" (41 ± 0.010 mm)
3
Camshaft Journal Bore Inner Diameter - Mag 1.656" ± 0.00039" (42.07 ± 0.010 mm)
Camshaft Journal Bore Inner Diameter - Center 1.637" ± 0.00039" (41.58 ± 0.010 mm)
Camshaft Journal Bore Inner Diameter - PTO 1.617" ± 0.00039" (41.07 ± 0.010 mm)
Camshaft Oil Clearance 0.00276" ± 0.00079" (0.07 ± 0.02 mm)
Camshaft End Play 0.0167" ± 0.0098" (0.425 ± 0.25 mm)
Counter Counter Balance End Play 0.005" (0.127 mm)
Balance
Cylinder Head - Surface warp limit 0.00394" (0.1 mm)
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head - Standard height 3.478" (88.35 mm)
Valve Seat - Contacting Width - Intake 0.0472" ± 0.00787" - 0.0039"

(1.20 ± 0.20 - 0.10mm)
Valve Seat Valve Seat - Contacting Width - Exhaust 0.0591" ± 0.00787" - 0.0039"
(1.50 ± 0.20 - 0.10 mm)
Valve Seat Angle 45.5° ± 0.255°
Valve Guide Inner diameter 0.2367" ± 0.00029" (6.012 ± 0.007 mm)

Valve Guide
Valve Guide Protrusion Above Head 0.807" ± 0.0039" (20.50 ± 0.01 mm)
Valve Margin Thickness - Intake Standard: 0.79" (20.06 mm)

Max- 0.98" (24.89 mm) Min- 0.59" (14.98 mm)
Valve Margin Thickness - Exhaust Standard: 0.80" (20.32 mm)

Max- 1.0" (25.4 mm) Min- 0.60" (15.24 mm)
Valve Stem Diameter - Intake 0.2356" ± 0.00039" (5.985 ± 0.01 mm)
Valve Valve Stem Diameter - Exhaust 0.2351" ± 0.00039" (5.972 ± 0.01 mm)
Valve Stem Oil Clearance - Intake 0.00228" ± 0.00098" (0.058 ± 0.025 mm)
Valve Stem Oil Clearance - Exhaust 0.00275" ± 0.00098" (0.0870 ± 0.025mm)
Valve Stem Overall Length - Intake 4.51" ± 0.01476" (114.5550 ± 0.375 mm)
Valve Stem Overall Length - Exhaust 4.5453" ± .01496" (115.45 ± 0.38 mm)
Valve Spring Overall Length - Free Length 1.735" (46.069 mm)

Valve Spring
Valve Spring Overall Length - Installed Height Intake - 1.4638" (37.18 mm)
Exhaust - 1.4736" (37.43 mm)
3.11
ENGINE
MAIN COMPONENTS: CYLINDER/PISTON/ CONNECTING ROD EH076OLE
Cylinder - Surface warp limit
0.004" (0.10 mm)
(mating with cylinder head)
Cylinder Bore - Standard 3.1495" (80 mm)
Cylinder Cylinder Taper Limit 0.00031" (0.008 mm)
Cylinder Out of Round Limit 0.00030" (0.0075 mm)
.0015" ± .00059"
Cylinder to Piston Clearance
(.040 ± .015mm)
0.84245" ± 0.00025"
Lifter Outer Diameter Standard
(21.39 8 ± 0.00635 mm)
Lifter
0.8438" ± 0.00062"
Lifter Block Bore
(21.4322 ± 0.0157 mm)
3.14803" + .00028"
Piston - Standard
(79.960 + .007 mm)
Piston
Piston Standard Inner Diameter of Piston 0.70902" ± .00012"
Pin Bore (18.009 ± 0.003 mm)
0.70866" - 0.70846"
Piston Pin Outer Diameter
(18 - 17.995 mm)
Piston Pin - Standard Clearance - Piston Pin 0.00047" ± 0.00024"
Piston Pin
to Pin Bore (0.012 ± 0.006 mm)
Piston pin must be a push fit
Piston Pin - Degree of Fit
(by hand) at 68° F (20° C)
3.12
ENGINE
MAIN COMPONENTS: PISTON/ CONNECTING ROD EH076OLE
0.0059 ± 0.138"
Top Ring - Standard
(0.15 ± 0.35mm)
Top Ring - Limit > 15% Leakdown
0.0098 ± 0.197"
Installed Second Ring - Standard
(0.25 ± 0.50mm)
Gap
Second Ring - Limit > 15% Leakdown
Piston Ring
Oil Ring - Standard
0.0196± 0.00984"
(0.50 ± 0.25mm) 3
Oil Ring - Limit > 15% Leakdown
0.0024" ± 0.0008"
Top Ring - Standard
(0.060 ± 0.020 mm)
Ring to Groove Top Ring - Limit > 15% Leakdown
Clearance 0.0028" ± 0.0008"
Second Ring - Standard
(0.070 ± 0.020 mm)
Second Ring - Limit > 15% Leakdown
0.7096" − 0.70846"
Connecting Rod Small End I.D.
(18 − 17.995 mm)
Connecting Rod Small End 0.0098"± 0.00039"
Radial Clearance (0.025 ± 0.010mm)
Connecting Rod
Connecting Rod Big End 0.01181"± 0.00591"
Side Clearance (0.030 ± 0.015mm)
Connecting Rod Big End 0.0015"± 0.00006"
Radial Clearance (0.0038 ± 0.0015mm)
Crankshaft Crankshaft Runout Limit 0.00236" (0.060mm)
Special Tools
PART NUMBER TOOL DESCRIPTION

PV-43527 OIL FILTER WRENCH
2200634 VALVE SEAT RECONDITIONING KIT
PU-45257 VALVE SPRING COMPRESSOR
PU-45652 VALVE PRESSURE HOSE
2871043 FLYWHEEL PULLER
2870390 PISTON SUPPORT BLOCK
PU-45497-1 CAM GEAR SPRING INSTALLATION KIT
PU-45497-2 CAM GEAR TOOTH ALIGNMENT TOOL
PU-45498 CAM SPANNER WRENCH
PU-45838 GEAR HOLDER
PA-44995 WATER PUMP MECHANICAL SEAL INSTALLER
PU-45543 UNIVERSAL DRIVER HANDLE
PA-45483 MAIN SEAL INSTALLER
PU-45658 CRANKSHAFT MAIN SEAL SAVER
PA-45401 WATER PUMP SEAL SAVER
2870975 MITY VAC™ PRESSURE TEST TOOL
PU-45778 OIL SYSTEM PRIMING TOOL
3.13
ENGINE
GENERAL ENGINE SERVICE Cooling System Specifications
Accessible Components Table 3-2:

Following Components can be serviced or removed with the APPROX.
engine installed:
CONDITION READING (MIN.- TEMPERATURE
• Flywheel MAX)
• Alternator (Stator) Hot light ON 178Ω - 190Ω 215° F (108° C)
• Starter Motor/Drive Fan Off 296Ω - 316Ω 180° F (82° C)
• Cylinder Head
Fan On 236Ω - 251Ω 195° F (91° C)
• Cylinder
System
Refer To Chapter 1 Specifications
• Piston/Rings Capacity
• Camshaft Radiator Cap
13 PSI
Pressure Relief
• Rocker Arms
• Oil pump/Water Pump/Oil Pump Drive Gear Recommended Coolant
• Gear Train Components Use only high quality antifreeze/coolant mixed with distilled
water in a 50/50 or 60/40 ratio, depending on freeze protection
Following Components Require Engine Removal for service: required in your area. CAUTION: Using tap water in the
cooling system will lead to a buildup of deposits which may
• Counterbalance Shaft or Bearings restrict coolant flow and reduce heat dissipation, resulting in
possible engine damage. Polaris Premium 60/40 Antifreeze/
• Connecting Rod Coolant is recommended for use in all cooling systems and
comes pre-mixed, ready to use.
• Crankshaft
• Crankshaft Main Bearings
Radiator
• Crankcase
Piston Identification
Four stroke engine rings have a special profile. See “PISTON
RING INSTALLED GAP” for ring installation.
Thermostat Water Pump
Table 3-1:
ENGINE MODEL PISTON DIAMETER
EH076OLE STD - 80 mm Cylinder Head Cylinder
3.14
ENGINE
Cooling System Pressure Test Four Stroke - Coolant Air Bleeding
Procedure
Pump Hose By
WARNING Hand to Help
Purge System
Never remove radiator cap when engine is warm or

hot. The cooling system is under pressure and
serious burns may result. Allow the engine and
cooling system to cool before servicing. Squeeze Hose
Here to Help
Purge Air From
1. Remove front cover. System
2.
3.
Remove recovery bottle hose from coolant filler neck.
Connect a commerically available pressure tester to the
3
filler neck and pressurize system to 10 psi. The system must
retain 10 psi for five minutes or longer. If pressure loss is
evident within five minutes, check the radiator, hoses, Polaris Premium
clamps and water pump seals for leakage. Antifreeze
2871534 - Quart
Radiator Cap Pressure Test 2871323 - Gallon
1. Remove radiator cap and test cap using a commercially

available cap tester. Use this procedure when a unit overheats and no apparent leaks
2. The radiator cap relief pressure is 13 psi. Replace cap if it in the cooling system are found.
does not meet this specification. NOTE: If the coolant level is LOW in the radiator, or if there
are leaks in the system, the coolant system will not draw
Upper Engine Hose
coolant from the reservoir tank.
1. Park machine on a flat surface. Remove radiator cap and

top off coolant. Leave the cap off of the radiator. Start and
idle machine for 5-10 minutes until steam is visible in the
radiator cap area.
Surge Tank 2. Stop the engine and let cool for a few minutes or until an
air bubble is seen at the filler neck, or there is a dropping
Fan Assembly of the coolant level indicating that coolant has been pulled
into the system.
NOTE: Slowly squeezing the hose after the bend
Hose below the filler neck will aid in purging the system of
air. Pump the hose using your hand several times as
shown in the diagram. Elevating the rear of the ATV
with a floor jack (rear tires 4-6, off the ground) also
Lower Engine Hose Radiator aids the purging of air from the system.
3. Always add coolant to the radiator first, filling to the top of

the neck to replace air that has been purged from the system.
Fill the reservoir only after you have completely filled the
cooling system at the radiator filler neck.
4. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 four or five times or until no more
coolant is pulled into the system.
5. In some instances, Steps 1 and 2 may have to be performed
with the radiator cap on to prevent coolant loss.
6. To test, install the radiator cap and idle machine until fan
comes on. Make sure the fan comes on before the hot light.
3.15
ENGINE
Engine Removal (Typical) 9. Relieve the fuel pressure in the fuel rail (refer to Chapter 4,
FUEL INJECTION") for proper procedure. Carefully
remove the fuel rail (B) and injectors.
WARNING
B C
Always wear safety glasses and proper shop
clothing when performing the procedures in this
manual. Failing to do so may lead to possible injury
or death.
1. Clean work area.

2. Thoroughly clean ATV engine and chassis.
3. Disconnect battery (-) negative cable. A
4. Remove the following parts as required:
D
• Seat
• Left and right side covers (refer to Chapter 5)
10. Disconnect spark plug high tension leads.
• Fuel tank covers
11. Remove the crank position sensor (E) located on the mag
• Fuel tank (refer to Chapter 4) cover.
• Springs from exhaust pipe and remove pipe.
5. Drain coolant and engine oil.
6. Remove air pre-cleaner and duct.
7. Remove airbox.
8. Disconnect the throttle body sensor (C) and T-BAP sensor
(D). Remove throttle body (A). Insert a shop towel into
the engine intake to prevent dirt from entering the ports.
12. Remove the air breather line .

13. Disconnect the coolant hoses. Properly dispose of any
antifreeze from the engine or hoses.
3.16
ENGINE
14. Refer to PVT System Chapter 6 to remove outer clutch 19. Remove all engine mount nuts and / or engine mount plates.
cover, drive belt, drive clutch, driven clutch, and inner Remove the frame brace (G) from the front left side of the
cover (F). frame.
F G
15. When removing starter cables, note and mark ground cable
and positive (+) cable mounting angle and locations. 20. Remove the engine from the left side of the frame.
Remove cables.
16. Remove transmission linkage rod from gear selector and
secure out of the way.
17. Disconnect coolant temperature sensor wire located on the
cylinder.
18. Remove engine to chassis ground cable.
NOTE: Use caution when lifting the engine out of

frame. Use an engine lift or other means if the
engine is too heavy to be lifted manually.
21. For engine installation, reverse procedures.
3.17
ENGINE
Engine Installation Notes Engine Break-In Period
After the engine is installed in the frame, review this checklist The break-in period for a Polaris ATV engine is defined as the
and perform all steps that apply: first ten hours of operation, or the time it takes to use two full
tanks of gasoline. No single action on your part is as important
General Items as a proper break-in period. Careful treatment of a new engine
will result in more efficient performance and longer life for the
1. Install previously removed components using new gaskets, engine. Perform the following procedures carefully.
seals, and fasteners where applicable.
2. Perform regular checks on fluid levels, controls, and all
CAUTION
important areas on the vehicle as outlined in the daily pre-
ride inspection checklist (refer to Chapter 2 or the Owner's
Manual). Use only Polaris PS4 Plus 2W/50 synthetic oil or
equivalent.
PVT System Never substitute or mix oil brands. Serious engine
damage and voiding of warranty can result.
1. Adjust center distance of drive and driven clutch. (Chapter Do not operate at full throttle or high speeds for
6) extended periods during the first three hours of use.
2. Adjust clutch offset, alignment, and belt deflection. Excessive heat can build up and cause damage to
(Chapter 6) close fitted engine parts.
3. Clean clutch sheaves thoroughly and inspect inlet and
outlet ducts for proper routing and sealing. (Chapter 6) 1. Fill fuel tank with unleaded or leaded fuel which has a
minimum pump octane number of 87= (R+ M)/2.
Transmission 2. Check oil reservoir level indicated on dipstick. Add oil if
necessary (Refer to Chapter 2, “Engine Oil Level” ).
1. Inspect transmission operation and adjust linkage if
necessary. Refer to Chapter 2 and Chapter 8. 3. Drive slowly at first to gradually bring engine up to
operating temperature.
Exhaust 4. Vary throttle positions. Do not operate at sustained idle or
sustained high speed.
1. Replace exhaust gaskets. Seal connections with high temp
5. Perform regular checks on fluid levels, controls and all
silicone sealant.
important bolt torques. Pull only light loads during initial
2. Check to be sure all springs are in good condition.
break in.
Bleed Cooling System 6. Pull only light loads during initial break-in.
7. Change break in oil and filter at 20 hours or 200 miles.
NOTE: This cooling system contains vent lines to
help purge trapped air during filling. Bleeding
generally should not be necessary.
Cylinder Hone Selection And Honing
Procedure
1. Remove radiator cap and slowly add coolant to the bottom
of filler neck.
2. Fill coolant reservoir tank to full mark.
CAUTION
3. Install radiator cap and gently squeeze coolant hoses to
A hone which will straighten as well as remove
force any trapped air out of system.
material from the cylinder is very important. Using a
4. Again, remove radiator cap and slowly add coolant to the common spring loaded glaze breaker for honing is
bottom of fill neck if needed. not advised for nicasil cylinders.
5. Start engine and observe coolant level in the radiator. Polaris recommends using a rigid hone or arbor
Allow air to purge and top off as necessary. Reinstall honing machine. Cylinders may be wet or dry
radiator cap and bring engine to operating temperature. honed depending upon the hone manufacturer's
After engine is cool, check level in reservoir tank and add recommendations.
coolant if necessary. Wet honing removes more material faster and
NOTE: Should the reservoir tank become empty, it leaves a more distinct pattern in the bore.
will be necessary to refill at the radiator and repeat
the bleeding procedure. Cylinders may be wet or dry honed depending upon the hone
manufacturer’s recommendations. Wet honing removes more
material faster and leaves a more distinct pattern in the bore.
3.18
ENGINE
Honing To Deglaze
A finished cylinder should have a cross-hatch pattern to ensure
piston ring seating and to aid in the retention of the fuel/oil
mixture during initial break in. Hone cylinder according to hone
manufacturer's instructions, or these guidelines:
• Honing should be done with a diamond hone. Cylinder
could be damaged if the hone is not hard enough to
scratch the nicasil lining.
• Use a motor speed of approximately 300-500 RPM, run
the hone in and out of the cylinder rapidly until cutting
tension decreases. Remember to keep the hone drive
shaft centered (or cylinder centered on arbor) and to
bring the stones approximately 1/2, (1.3 cm) above and
3
below the bore at the end of each stroke.
• Release the hone at regular intervals and inspect the
bore to determine if it has been sufficiently de-glazed,
and to check for correct cross-hatch. NOTE: Do not
allow cylinder to heat up during honing.
• After honing has been completed, inspect cylinder for
thinning or peeling.
If cylinder wear or damage is excessive, it will be necessary to
replace the cylinder. The cylinders are lined with a nicasil
coating and are not repairable. Hone only enough to de-glaze
the outer layer of the cylinder bore.
Example of Cross Hatch Pattern
IMPORTANT: Clean the cylinder after honing

If cylinder wear or damage is excessive, it will be necessary to
replace the cylinder. The cylinders are lined with a nicasil
coating and are not repairable. Hone only enough to de-glaze
the outer layer of the cylinder bore.
Cleaning the Cylinder After Honing

It is very important that the cylinder be thoroughly cleaned after
honing to remove all grit material. Wash the cylinder in a
solvent, then in hot, soapy water. Pay close attention to areas
where the cylinder sleeve meets the aluminum casting (transfer
port area). Use electrical contact cleaner if necessary to clean
these areas. Rinse thoroughly, dry with compressed air, and oil
the bore immediately with Polaris Lubricant.
3.19
ENGINE
Oil Flow Chart
This chart describes the flow of oil through the 800 engine. Beginning in the crankcase sump, the oil is drawn through an oil galley
to the feed side of the oil pump. The oil is then pumped through the oil filter. If the oil filter is obstructed, a bypass valve contained
in the filter allows oil to bypass the filter element. At this point, the oil is supplied to the main oil galley through a crankcase passage.
Oil is then diverted three ways from the main oil galley, with the first path entering the camshaft bores, onto the rear balance shaft
journal and then draining back into the crankcase sump. The second oil path from the main oil galley feeds the lifter bores and then
drains back to the crankcase sump. The third oil path flows through a crankcase galley to the MAG side crankshaft journal and also
to the front balance shaft journal and onto the crankcase sump. The oil pressure switch is fed off the main oil galley.
Engine Lubrication Specifications OIL PRESSURE TEST

1. Remove blind plug/sender from left side of crankcase.
2. Insert a 1/8 NPT oil pressure gauge adaptor into the
= crankcase and attach the gauge.
3. Start engine and allow it to reach operating temperature,
Capacity - Approximately 2 U.S. Quarts (1.9 l) monitoring gauge indicator.
Oil Type - Polaris PS4 Plus 2W/50 Synthetic NOTE: Use only Polaris PS4 Plus 2W/50 Synthetic
Filter Wrench - PV-43527 or equivalent Engine Lubricant.
- Oil Pressure Specification -
35-39 PSI @ 5500 RPM, Polaris 2W/50 Synthetic ,
Engine at operating temperature. Oil Pressure at 5500 RPM (Engine Hot):
Standard: 39 PSI
Minimum: 35 PSI
3.20
ENGINE
ENGINE DISASSEMBLY AND INSPECTION
Cylinder Head Assembly Exploded View
Rocker Arms
Retainer Locks (keepers)
:Push Rods
Spring Retainers
3
Springs
Valve Seals
Cylinder Head
Hydraulic Lifters
Valves
3.21
ENGINE
Rocker Arms 5. If the push rod (A) is visibly bent, it should be replaced.
1. Mark or tag rocker arms in order of disassembly to keep

them in order for reassembly. A
Cylinder Head Removal

2. Inspect the wear pad at the valve end of the rocker arm for
1. Loosen the six cylinder head bolts evenly 1/8 turn each in
indications of scuffing or abnormal wear. If the pad is
a criss-cross pattern until loose.
grooved, replace the rocker arm.
2. Remove bolts (A) and tap cylinder head (B) lightly with a
NOTE: Do not attempt to true this surface by soft face hammer until loose. CAUTION: Tap only in
grinding. reinforced areas or on thick parts of cylinder head casting
to avoid damaging the head or cylinder.
3. Check the rocker arm pad and fulcrum seat for excessive
wear, cracks, nicks or burrs. 3. Remove cylinder head (B) and head gasket (C) from the
cylinder (D).
Push Rods
1. Clean push rods (A) in a suitable solvent. Blow dry push
rods with compressed air.
2. Use compressed air to confirm the oil passage is clear in the
center of the push rod.
WARNING
Always wear safety glasses when working with A

compressed air to prevent personal injury.
3. Check the ends of the push rods (A) for nicks, grooves, B
roughness or excessive wear.
4. The push rods (A) can be visually checked for straightness
while they are installed in the engine by rotating them with
C
the valve closed. Push rods can also be checked with a dial
indicator or rolled across a flat surface to check for
straightness.
D
3.22
ENGINE
Cylinder Head Inspection Valve Seal/Spring Service
(On Engine)
Thoroughly clean cylinder head surface to remove all traces of
gasket material and carbon. NOTE: The following procedure is only for servicing
the top end of the valve train when replacing valve
springs or replacing valve seals.
CAUTION
In some cases the valve train can be serviced while the cylinder
Use care not to damage sealing surface. head is still on the engine. Keep all parts in order with respect
to their location in the cylinder head.
Cylinder Head Warp
1. Lay a straight edge (A) across the surface of the cylinder
WARNING 3
head (B) at several different points and measure warp by
inserting a feeler gauge between the straight edge and the Wear eye protection or a face shield during cylinder
cylinder head surface. If warp exceeds the service limit, head disassembly and reassembly.
replace the cylinder head.
1. Having already removed the valve cover, rocker arms and
pushrods, align the cylinder to be worked on at top dead
A center (TDC). Install the Valve Pressure Hose (PU-
45652) into the spark plug hole. Hook the hose to an air
compressor and supply 50 to 100 psi to the hose. This will
seat the valves during valve spring removal. Do not
remove air from the hose at anytime until reassembly is
completed.
2. Using the Valve Spring Compressor (PU-45257),
compress the valve spring and remove the valve keepers.
B NOTE: A small parts magnet (A) can aid in the removal
of the retainers (B).
Measure at different
points on the surface.
B
= In. / mm.
A
Cylinder Head Warp Limit:
.004" (.1016 mm) max
PU-45257
NOTE: To prevent damage to the valve seals, do not

compress the valve spring more than is needed to
remove the valve keepers.
3. Remove spring retainer and spring.

4. The valve seals are now serviceable.
3.23
ENGINE
Cylinder Head Disassembly 3. Remove valve guide seals.
IMPORTANT: It is recommended to replace seals
1. Carefully remove the cylinder components. Place the whenever the cylinder head is disassembled.
hydraulic lifters (C), pushrods (D), and rocker arms (E) in Hardened, cracked or worn valve seals will cause
a safe, clean area. excessive oil consumption and carbon buildup.
4. Mark the valves with a white pen. Remove the valves from
D the cylinder head. This will ensure that the valves are
properly placed during engine reassembly.
C
Mark the Valves
2. Measure free length of spring with a Vernier caliper.

Compare to specifications. Replace spring if measurement
is out of specification.
Valve Spring
Free Length
= In. / mm.
Valve Spring Free Length:

Std: 1.735" (44.069 mm)
3.24
ENGINE
Valve Inspection measurements total). Compare to specifications.
1. Remove all carbon from valves with a soft wire wheel or

brush. Measure valve stem in several places.
2. Check valve face for runout, pitting, and burnt spots. To Rotate the valve 90 degrees and measure
for wear.
check for bent valve stems, mount valve in a drill or use “V”
blocks and a dial indicator.
3
= In. / mm.
Valve Stem Diameter:

Intake: 0.2356" + 0.00039"
(5.985 + 0.01 mm)
Exhaust: 0.2351" + 0.00039"
3. Check end of valve stem for flaring, pitting, wear or damage (5.972 + 0.01 mm)
(A).
6. Measure valve guide (C) inside diameter at the top middle
and end of the guide using a small hole gauge and a
micrometer. Measure in two directions.
A C
4. Inspect split keeper groove for wear or flaring of the keeper

seat area (B). NOTE: The valves can be re-faced or end
ground, if necessary. They must be replaced if extensively
worn, burnt, bent, or damaged.
5. Measure diameter of valve stem with a micrometer in three
places, then rotate 90 degrees and measure again (six
= In. / mm.
Valve Guide I.D.:

0.23672" + 0.000295"
(6.0617 + 0.0075 mm)
7. Subtract valve stem measurement from the valve guide

measurement to obtain stem to guide clearance. NOTE:
The valve guides cannot be replaced. Be sure to measure
each guide and valve combination individually.
3.25
ENGINE
Combustion Chamber NOTE: Valve seat width and point of contact on the
valve face is very important for proper sealing. The
1. Clean all accumulated carbon deposits from combustion valve must contact the valve seat over the entire
chamber and valve seat area with carbon cleaner and a soft circumference of the seat, and the seat must be the
plastic scraper. proper width all the way around. If the seat is
IMPORTANT: Do not use a wire brush, metal scraper, uneven, compression leakage will result. If the seat
or abrasive cleaners to clean the bottom of the
cylinder head. Extensive damage to the cylinder head is too wide, seat pressure is reduced, causing
may result. Wear safety glasses during cleaning. carbon accumulation and possible compression
loss. If the seat is too narrow, heat transfer from
Combustion Area valve to seat is reduced. The valve may overheat
and warp, resulting in burnt valves.
Valve Seat Reconditioning

1. Install pilot into valve guide.
NOTE: Polaris recommends that the work be done
by a local machine shop that specializes in this area.
NOTE: The cylinder head valve guides cannot be

replaced.
WARNING
Wear eye protection or a face shield during cylinder

head disassembly and reassembly.
Valve Seat Inspection

Inspect valve seat in cylinder head for pitting, burnt spots,
roughness, and uneven surface. If any of the above conditions
exist, the valve seat must be reconditioned. If the valve seat is
cracked the cylinder head must be replaced. 2. Apply cutting oil to valve seat and cutter.
Follow the manufacturers instructions provided with the valve 3. Place 46° cutter on the pilot and make a light cut.
seat cutters in the Cylinder Head Reconditioning Kit (PN
2200634). Abrasive stone seat reconditioning equipment can
also be used. Keep all valves in order with their respective seat.
3.26
ENGINE
4. Inspect the cut area of the seat: NOTE: When using an interference angle, the seat
contact point on the valve will be very narrow, and is
* If the contact area is less than 75% of the circumference of the a normal condition. Look for an even and
seat, rotate the pilot 180° and make another light cut. continuous contact point all the way around the
* If the cutter now contacts the uncut portion of the seat, check valve face. (B)
the pilot. Look for burrs, nicks, or runout. If the pilot is bent it
must be replaced.
* If the contact area of the cutter is in the same place, the valve
guide is distorted from improper installation B
* If the contact area of the initial cut is greater than 75%,
A
continue to cut the seat until all pits are removed and a new seat
surface is evident. NOTE: Remove only the amount of material
necessary to repair the seat surface.
3
Proper Seat Contact
5. To check the contact area of the seat on the valve face, apply On Valve Face
a thin coating of Prussian Blue™ paste to the valve seat. If
using an interference angle (46°) apply black permanent
marker to the entire valve face (A).
Seat 45° Top 30°
Bottom 60°
6. Insert valve into guide and tap valve lightly into place a few
times.
7. Remove valve and check where the Prussian Blue™
indicates seat contact on the valve face. The valve seat
should contact the middle of the valve face or slightly Seat Width
above, and must be the proper width.
* If the indicated seat contact is at the top edge of the valve face
and contacts the margin area (B) it is too high on the valve face.
Use the 30° cutter to lower the valve seat.
* If too low, use the 60° cutter to raise the seat. When contact
area is centered on the valve face, measure seat width.
* If the seat is too wide or uneven, use both top and bottom
cutters to narrow the seat.
= In. / mm.
* If the seat is too narrow, widen using the 45° cutter and re-
check contact point on the valve face and seat width after each
cut. Valve Seat Width:
Intake Std: .028" (.7 mm)
Limit: .055" (1.4 mm)
Exhaust Std: .039I (1.0 mm)
Limit: .071" (1.8 mm)
8. Clean all filings from the area with hot soapy water, rinse,
and dry with compressed air.
3.27
ENGINE
9. Lubricate the valve guides with clean engine oil, and apply 4. Valve seals should be installed after the valves are in the
oil or water based lapping compound to the face of the head to avoid valve seal damage. Install new valve seals
valve. on valve guides.
NOTE: Lapping is not required with an interference
angle valve job.
10. Insert the valve into its respective guide and lap using a
lapping tool or a section of fuel line connected to the valve
stem.
11. Rotate the valve rapidly back and forth until the cut sounds
smooth. Lift the valve slightly off of the seat, rotate 1/4
turn, and repeat the lapping process. Do this four to five
times until the valve is fully seated, and repeat process for
the other valve(s).
12. Thoroughly clean cylinder head and valves.
Cylinder Head Reassembly

NOTE: Assemble the valves one at a time to
5.Dip valve spring and retainer in clean engine oil and install.
maintain proper order.
6.Place retainer on spring and install Valve Spring
1. Apply engine oil to valve guides and seats. Compressor (PU-45257). Install split keepers with the gap
2. Coat valve stem with molybdenum disulfide grease or 0W- even on both sides.
40 Synthetic oil. NOTE: A small magnet can aid in installation of the keepers.
3. Install valve carefully with a rotating motion to avoid
damaging valve seal. PU-45257
3.28
ENGINE
7. Repeat procedure for remaining valves. When all valves Valve Lifter Removal/Inspection
are installed, tap lightly with soft faced hammer on the end
of the valves to seat the split keepers. 1. Remove the valve lifter's by reaching into the crankcase
and pushing the lifter up through the lifter bore by hand.
NOTE: To prevent damage to the valve seals, do not
2. Thoroughly clean the lifters in cleaning solvent and wipe
compress the valve spring more than necessary to
them with a clean lint-free cloth.
install the keepers.
3. Mark the lifters with a white pen if using the lifters for
Valve Sealing Test reassembly. This will ensure that the lifters are properly
placed during engine reassembly.
1. Clean and dry the combustion chamber area (A).
Mark Hydraulic Lifter
A 3
2. Pour a small amount of clean solvent onto the intake port 4. Check the lifters for wear or scores.
and check for leakage around each intake valve. The valve 5. Check the bottom end of lifter to make sure that it has a
seats should hold fluid with no seepage. slight convex.
3. Repeat for exhaust valves by pouring fluid into exhaust 6. If the bottom surface has worn flat, it may be used with the
port. original camshaft only.
Cylinder Removal Inspect Hydraulic Lifter

1. Follow engine disassembly procedures to remove rocker
cover and cylinder head.
2. Tap cylinder (A) lightly with a rubber mallet in the
reinforced areas only until loose.
3. Rock cylinder forward and backward while lifting it from
the crankcase, supporting pistons and connecting rods.
Support pistons with Piston Support Block (PN 2870390).
NOTE: Lifters that are scored, worn, or if the bottom

is not smooth should be replaced with new lifters
and cam as an assembly. If replacing the lifters, the
camshaft should also be replaced.
3.29
ENGINE
Piston Removal *By hand: Placing both thumbs as shown, spread the ring open
and push up on the opposite side. Do not scratch the ring lands.
1. Remove circlip (A). Mark the piston with a white pen to
ensure proper orientation (if reused) during assembly.
NOTE: If the pistons are to be reused, reassemble 4. Repeat procedure for second ring.
the pistons in the same cylinder and direction from 5. Remove the oil control ring.
which they were removed.
The oil control ring is a three piece design consisting of a top and
NOTE: New pistons are non-directional and can be bottom steel rail and a center expander section. The top rail has
a locating tab on the end which fits into a notch (B) in the upper
placed in either cylinder. oil ring land of the piston.
2. Remove piston circlip and push piston pin out of piston. If To Remove:
necessary, heat the crown of the piston slightly with a
propane torch. CAUTION: Do not apply heat to the piston A) Remove the top rail first followed by the bottom rail.
rings. The ring may lose radial tension. B) Remove the expander.
3. Remove top compression ring:
B
*Using a piston ring pliers: Carefully expand ring and lift it off Compression
the piston. CAUTION: Do not expand the ring more than the Rings
amount necessary to remove it from the piston, or the ring may
break.
Oil Ring
3.30
ENGINE
Cylinder Inspection 3. Inspect cylinder for wear, scratches, or damage.
1. Remove all gasket material from the cylinder sealing

surfaces.
2. Inspect the top of the cylinder (B) for warp using a straight
edge (A) and feeler gauge (C). Refer to Ill. 1 and Ill. 2.
B 4. Inspect cylinder for taper and out of round with a

telescoping gauge or a dial bore gauge. Measure in two
different directions, front to back and side to side, on three
Measure at different
points on surface. different levels (1/2, down from top, in the middle, and 1/
2, up from bottom). Record measurements. If cylinder is
tapered or out of round beyond .002", the cylinder must be
replaced.
B
1/2” Down From Top of Cylinder
A
= In. / mm.
1/2” Up From Bottom
Cylinder Warp: .004" (0.1 mm) Max.
= In. / mm.
Cylinder Taper Limit:

.002" (9.05mm) Max.
Cylinder Out of Round:

Limit: .002" (.0 mm) Max.
800 Standard Bore Size

(Both Cylinders): 3.1496" (80 mm)
3.31
ENGINE
Piston-To-Cylinder Clearance 2. Measure piston pin O.D. Replace piston and/or piston pin
if out of tolerance.
Measure piston outside diameter at a point 5 mm up from the
bottom of the piston at a right angle to the direction of the piston
pin.
Subtract this measurement from the maximum cylinder
measurement obtained in Step 5.
5 mm
Piston Piston Pin Measurement Locations
Piston Pin
Piston Pin O.D.:

See “800 EFI Engine Service Specifications”
Piston to Cylinder Clearance: on page 3.11
on page 3.11 3. Measure connecting rod small end ID.
Piston O.D.:
on page 3.11
Piston/rod Inspection
1. Measure piston pin bore.
Connecting Rod Small End I.D.:

on page 3.11
Piston Pin Bore:
on page 3.11
3.32
ENGINE
4. Measure piston ring to groove clearance by placing the ring thoroughly with hot soapy water, rinsed, and dried
in the ring land and measuring with a thickness gauge. completely. Wipe cylinder bore with oil immediately
Replace piston and rings if ring-to-groove clearance to remove residue and prevent rust.
exceeds service limits.
Starter Drive/Bendix Removal Inspection
See “800 EFI Engine Service Specifications” on page 3.11
1. Remove stator housing bolts and remove housing.
2. Remove the flywheel nut and washer. Install Flywheel
Piston
Puller (PN 2871043) and remove flywheel.
NOTE: Do not thread the puller bolts into the
Ring flywheel more than 1/4, or stator coils may be
damaged. 3
3. Remove starter bendix assembly (A). Note the thrust
washers located on both sides of the bendix.
Feeler Gauge
B
Piston Ring Installed Gap
1. Place each piston ring (A) inside cylinder (B) using piston
to push ring squarely into place as shown. (See next page)
C
B
25-50 mm
4. Inspect the thrust washer for wear or damage and replace

A if necessary.
5. After the bendix is removed, tap on the starter assembly
with a soft faced mallet to loosen the starter from the
crankcase.
Piston Ring Installed Gap B

on page 3.11
B
NOTE: Ring should be installed with the mark facing
upward.
2. Measure installed gap with a feeler gauge (C) at both the

top and bottom of the cylinder. REMINDER: A difference
in end gap indicates cylinder taper. The cylinder should be
measured for excessive taper and out of round.
3. If the bottom installed gap measurement exceeds the
service limit, replace the rings. If ring gap is smaller than
the specified limit, file ring ends until gap is within
specified range.
NOTE: Always check piston ring installed gap after
re-boring a cylinder or when installing new rings. A
re-bored cylinder should always be scrubbed
3.33
ENGINE
6. Inspect gear teeth on starter drive (B). Replace starter drive 3. Install Flywheel Puller (PN 2871043) and remove
if gear teeth are cracked, worn, or broken. flywheel (A). CAUTION: Do not thread the puller bolts
7. Inspect the bendix bushing (C) in the mag cover for wear. into the flywheel more than 1/4, or stator coils may be
Replace as needed. damaged.
2871043 A
4. Use caution when removing the wire holddown (B), trigger
coil (C), and the stator assembly (D). Do not tap or bump
Flywheel / Stator Removal / Inspection the gear /stator housing cover or the stator. This could
cause the seal around the gear/stator housing cover and the
1. Remove stator housing bolts and remove housing.
crankcase to break, causing a leak.
C
B
E D
Remove Stator
Cover
5. Remove the bendix (E) if necessary.
2. Remove flywheel nut and washer.
3.34
ENGINE
Engine Crankcase Disassembly / Inspection 4. Install Flywheel Puller (PN 2871043) and remove flywheel
(F). CAUTION: Do not thread the puller bolts into the
1. Remove the stator cover (A) and water pump cover (B). flywheel more than 1/4, or stator coils may be damaged.
F
A 5. Remove the starter bendix (G), wire holddown plate (H),
and the woodruff key (I) from the crankshaft. The stator
2. Remove the nylok nut (C), washer (D), and water pump does not have to be removed at this point.
impeller (E). Remove part of the water pump seal behind
the impeller.
I
H
D
C 6. Remove the gear/stator housing bolts and remove the gear/
stator housing cover (J) and gasket from the crankcase. Be
sure to catch the excess oil from the crankcase.
3. Remove flywheel nut and washer.
3.35
ENGINE
7. Note the positions of the gears in the photo. 10. Inspect the cam gear teeth and check to make sure there is
spring tension offsetting the teeth between the two gears.
If there is no tension, check the springs inside of the cam
Camshaft Gear gear assembly.
3 Loaded Springs
Crank Gear Counterbalance Gear
8. Use a white pen to accent the timing marks on the following

gears: camshaft gear (K), crankshaft gear (M), or
counterbalance gear (N) This will ensure proper gear 11. The cam gear assembly contains three loaded springs. To
alignment and timing during reassembly of the gears. open the cam gear assembly:
* Place the cam gear on a flat surface with the timing mark side
K Water Pump Gear facing up.
Timing Marks * While holding both gears together, lightly work a small
flathead screwdriver between the two gears.
* Remove the top gear. The springs should stay in place.
CAUTION
Wear safety glasses at all times. Use caution when

N working with the top gear. The springs could cause
M injury or become lost should they pop out.
NOTE: If replacing one of the gears, it is 12. Remove all three springs using one of the tapered pins from
recommended that all of the gears be replaced. A the Tapered Pins (PU-45497-1).
gear kit is available in the parts book.
9. Use the Cam Gear Tooth Alignment Tool (PU-45497-2)

(O) to align the cam split gear assembly. With the split gear
aligned, remove the bolt and cam gear assembly.
NOTE: Install the Cam Gear Tooth Alignment Tool
(PU-45497-2) into the assembly hole counter
clockwise from the timing mark as shown.
3.36
ENGINE
13. With a white marking pen, accent the timing mark on the 16. Insert the pointed dowels from the Tapered Pins (PU-
gear that contains the springs. 45497-1) into the cam gear.
Accent Timing Marks PU-45497-1
To Assemble:
14. Inspect the gear teeth and the three tabs on the gears for
wear. * Hold the spring with one finger.
* Start the pointed end of the tapered pin into the cam gear hole
Inspect Teeth & Tabs and slowly push the dowel through the hole until the end of the
dowel is almost flush with the spring.
* Perform this procedure with all three tapered pins.
* Do not push the pins too far through or the springs will pop
out.
NOTE: Do not remove the tapered pins at this time.
17. Note in the photograph that the Tapered Pins (PU-45497-

1) are below flush with end of the springs. This helps to
align the three gear tabs during the next step.
Replace 3 Springs
15. Install the new springs into the grooves of the cam gear.
Install Springs
PU-45497-1
Cam Gear Spring Installation Tool Kit:

(PU-45497)
Tapered Pins: (PU-45497-1)
Cam Gear Tooth Align Tool: (PU-45497-2)
3.37
ENGINE
18. Line up the two gears using the timing marks and the three NOTE: Install the Cam Gear Alignment Tool (PU-
gear tabs that were referenced earlier. Push the gears back 45497-2) into one assembly hole counter clockwise
together, using both hands and hold securely. from the timing mark.
Align Timing Marks
PU--45497-2
19. Once the gears are pressed together, firmly hold the gears
together with one hand. Carefully remove the Tapered Pins
(PU-45497-1) by pulling them out one at a time with the
other hand. NOTE: For ease of installing the Cam Gear
Alignment Tool (PU-45497-2) (R), use a twisting
motion when pushing down on the tool.
21. To remove the balance shaft gear, the flat side of the
camshaft (P) must face the balance shaft gear. To rotate the
camshaft, use the Cam Spanner Wrench (PU-45498) to
rotate the camshaft so the flat side of the camshaft faces the
balance shaft gear.
PU-45498
20. After the tapered pins are removed, be sure the cam gear
assembly is held together tightly. Place the cam gear
assembly on a flat surface. Use the Cam Gear Tooth
Alignment Tool (PU-45497-2) to align the teeth of the cam P
gears, as shown in the picture.
NOTE: This Cam Spanner Wrench (PU-45498) is

only needed to rotate the camshaft when the entire
valve train is assembled. If the rocker arms are
removed, the cam-shaft can be turned by hand.
3.38
ENGINE
22. Remove the bolt and nut from the balance shaft gear. Try 25. Install the Flywheel Puller (PN 2871043) and remove the
to remove the balance shaft gear. If the gear does not come crankshaft gear, if needed.
off manually, use the Flywheel Puller (PN 2871043) to
remove the balance shaft gear. 2871043
2871043
26. Rotate the water/oil pump gear (S), so that all four bolts are
23. Inspect the crankshaft gear (Q) for broken or worn teeth. If visible though the gear. Remove the four bolts with a hex
the crankshaft gear does not need to be replaced, it does not wrench. Pull out the pump.
need to be removed. If the crankshaft gear is damaged,
remove the crankshaft gear with the Flywheel Puller (PN
2871043).
S
27. Inspect the oil pump rotors for wear. Mark the rotors with
a white pen to ensure upon reassembly that the correct sides
of the rotors are installed and mesh with the same edges as
24. Install the two puller bolts (R). Tighten the puller bolts up previously installed.
so that the bolts are at equal length.
NOTE: If replacing the old rotors, new replacement

rotors will fit into the old oil/water pump housing.
3.39
ENGINE
28. Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance between the NOTE: Be sure to place the tapered end of the valve
two rotors. Measure the gap between the two rotor tips as (dowel) in first. If the valve is installed incorrectly,
shown below. The clearance should not exceed 0.006" oil pressure and oil priming problems will occur.
(0.15 mm).
31. Carefully press the gear off the assembly while supporting
the housing assembly.
Press Off Gear

0.006” (0.15 mm)
Max Tip Clearance
29. Remove the oil pressure relief. The oil pressure relief
consists of a bolt, washer, spring, and valve (dowel).
Inspect the valve (dowel) for signs of possible obstructions.
CAUTION
Use compressed air to blow out any debris.
Wear appropriate safety gear during this procedure.
Protective gloves, clothing and eyewear are
required.
32. Remove the snap ring from the assembly. Place the housing
in a support and press out the bearing/shaft assembly.
Press Out shaft

and bearing
assembly.
30. Reinstall the valve (dowel chamfered end first). Install the Bearing
spring, washer, and bolt. Torque to specification .
22 22 ± 2 ft. lbs. Retaining Ring

(30 ± 3 Nm).
Chamfer
End First
=T
22 ± 2 ft. lbs. (30 ± 3 Nm)
3.40
ENGINE
33. Place the shaft in a press to remove the bearing. 36. Press gear onto shaft while supporting the housing.
Bearing
34. Press shaft into the new bearing..

37. Remove thrust plate (U).
New Bearing
35. Press the bearing/shaft assembly using the bearing's outer

race. Do not use the shaft to press the assembly into the
housing, as bearing damage may result. Install retaining
ring. 38. Remove PTO end engine mount Remove crankcase bolts.
Tap on the reinforced areas on the cases using soft hammer.
Press Bearing/Shaft Carefully separate the two crankcase halves.
Assembly using
outer race only
Separate
Crankcase Halves
3.41
ENGINE
NOTE: Only remove the oil baffle if the baffle is 41. Remove and inspect crankshaft main journal bearings for
damaged. When removing the oil baffle bolts, use a abnormal wear. It is recommended to replace the
heat gun to heat the bolts and loosen the Loctite™. bearings anytime the engine is disassembled.
This will prevent any possible damage to the bolts or
to the crankcase casting.
39. Remove and clean oil pick up (V) and oil baffle weldment
(W).
V
NOTE: Plain bearing clearances may be checked
using a commercially available plasti-gauge
material.
Camshaft Inspection
40. Remove balance shaft and crankshaft. 1. Thoroughly clean the cam shaft.
2. Visually inspect each cam lobe for wear, chafing or
damage.
3. Measure height of each cam lobe using a micrometer.
Compare to specification.
Cam Lobe Height
= In. / mm.
Cam Lobe Height
Intake (std):
800 EFI: 1.334" (33.867 mm)
800 H.O. EFI: 1.357" (34.477 mm)
Exhaust (std):
800 EFI: 1.334" (33.867 mm)
800 H.O. EFI: 1.342" (34.096 mm)
3.42
ENGINE
4. Measure camshaft journal outside diameters (O.D.). ENGINE REASSEMBLY
CRANKCASE REASSEMBLY
CAUTION
After any reassembly or rebuild, the engine must be

primed using the Oil Priming Adapter (PU-45778)
and a 3/4-full oil filter before initial start-up. Follow
C Steps 45-46 of this section to prime the engine and
B
to help aid proper break-in. 3
NOTE: Before assembly, clean the bolts and bolt
A
holes with Primer N (PN 2870585) to remove any
debris. This will ensure proper sealing when
installing bolts.
1. Install oil pick up (A), if removed. Torque to specification.

= In. / mm.
Camshaft Journal O.D. :

A. (Mag): 1.654" ± .00039" (42 ± .010 mm) B
B. (Ctr.): 1.634" ± .00039" (41.50 ± .010 mm)
C. (PTO): 1.614" ± .00039" (41 ± .010 mm)
A
5. Measure ID of camshaft journal bores.
= In. / mm.
Camshaft Journal Bore I.D.:

(Mag): 1.656" ± 0.00039" (42.07± 0.010 mm)
(Ctr.) 1.637" ± 0.00039" (41.58 ± 0.010 mm)
(PTO) 1.617" ± 0.00039" (41.07 ± 0.010 mm) 2. Install oil baffle weldment (B). Torque bolts to
specification.
6. Calculate oil clearance by subtracting journal O.D.'s from
journal bore I.D.'s. Compare to specification.
=T
= In. / mm. Oil Baffle Weldment &

Oil Pick Up Bolt Torque:
60 ± 6 in. lbs. (6.8 ± 0.68 Nm)
Calculated Camshaft Oil Clearance:
Std: 0.0027" (.070mm) 3. Install the balance shaft. Inspect balance shaft clearance
Limit: .0039" (.10 mm) (C) in both gearcase halves. Rotate balance shaft to ensure
that there is clearance between it and oil baffle weldment.
NOTE: Replace camshaft if damaged or if any part is
worn past the service limit.
NOTE: Replace engine block if camshaft journal

bores are damaged or worn excessively.
3.43
ENGINE
NOTE: Always install new balance shaft bearings. 6.Apply Crankcase Sealant (PN 2871557) to the top gearcase
halve.
NOTE: Do not apply sealant to cam relief hole (E).
C
4. Apply assembly lube to cam journals and balance shaft

bearing surfaces of the MAG case halve. Install cam and
7. Assemble the crankcase halves. Apply LocTite™ 242 (PN
balance shafts.
2871949) to the threads and pipe sealant to the bolt flanges.
Torque bolts to specification following torque pattern at
beginning of this chapter.
=T
Crankcase Bolt Torque:
22 + 2 ft. lbs. (30 + 3 Nm)
Torque in sequence
8. Lubricate cam lobes and valve lifters with Moly Lube

Grease.
Apply Moly Lube Cam Lobes
5. Install crankshaft assembly and apply engine oil to crank

pins and rods (D). Apply assembly lube to the main
journals and bearings.
Lifters
3.44
ENGINE
9. Lubricate lifters with engine oil and install in the original 12. Orientate the piston rings on the piston before installation
order as removed in disassembly. Apply Lubriplate or into the cylinders. Set the gaps of the rings evenly 120°
Moly Lube to the ends of the lifters. apart. (see illustration)
NOTE: Always replace the camshaft and lifters as a
set. 1
Piston Ring
Orientation 2
3
1. Top Ring 2. Second Ring

3
3. Oil Ring
13. Install piston assemblies into cylinder aligning the piston

pin holes, to ensure proper alignment of the pistons to the
connecting rods upon assembly. Partially install the piston
10. Lubricate connecting rods with 0W-40 engine oil. pins into the pistons.
11. Install new cylinder gasket on crankcase. Align gasket on NOTE: To help align the pistons, slide a rod that is
the dowel pins for proper gasket alignment. close to the same diameter as the wrist pin holes to
properly align them in the cylinder.
3.45
ENGINE
14. Position cylinder and piston assemblies onto the connecting 16. Install camshaft thrust plate (G) with new bolts. Torque
rods and push the piston pins through the piston and bolts to specification.
connecting rods.
Push In Piston Pins

NOTE: New bolts have patch lock on the threads
15. Install the piston pin circlips (F). The circlip ends should
and do not require Loctite™.
be installed at the 12 O'clock position.
=T
Thrust Plate Screw Torque:
115 ± 12 in.lbs. (13 ± 1.35 Nm)
17. Assemble rotors as marked when disassembled. Use a

cleaner to remove the marks previously made on the rotors.
Piston Pin Cirlcip (F) in
12 O’clock position
Line Up Marks
NOTE: While installing in piston pins, cover all
engine passages. The clip could fall into the engine
during installation.
18. Apply assembly lube or oil to the rotors on the oil pump
shaft.
3.46
ENGINE
NOTE: The application of lubrication aids in priming NOTE: Occasionally spin the oil pump when
the oil pump during initial engine start up. installing bolts to check for binding of the rotors.
Lubricate Rotors
19. Align the bolt holes and install oil pump assembly into
crankcase. Rotate the rotors in the housing during
=T
installation, as this checks for binding if new rotors are
used. Oil Pump Bolt Torque:
84 ± 8 in.lbs. (9.50 ± 0.90 Nm)
NOTE: For assembly of the gears, the cam gear and
* Torque in Sequence
the crankshaft gear are stamped with “This Side
Out." This indicates the side of the gear that faces
outward or away from the case. 21. Apply Loctite™ 242 (PN 2871949) to the crankshaft.

installing bolts and new Loctite™.
20. Install oil pump housing bolts (H). The new bolts contain
patch lock, so Loctite™ is not needed on the new bolts.
Torque bolts to specification and follow the torque
sequence at beginning of the chapter.
3.47
ENGINE
22. Before installing the crankshaft gear (I), heat the crankshaft 25. Install counter balance shaft gear (J) with new key, aligning
gear to 250° F (121°C) on a hot plate (J). timing marks with crankshaft gear (I). Install washer and
bolt. Use the Gear Holder (PU-45838). Torque to
specification.
I J
CAUTION
The crankshaft gear is extremely hot! Severe burns =T

or injury can occur if the gear is not handled with
extreme care and caution. Follow the procedure Balance Shaft Gear Bolt Torque:
below to help ensure safety. 22 ± 2 ft. lbs. (30 ± 3 Nm)
23. Use extreme caution when removing the crankshaft gear
26. Use the Cam Gear Alignment Tool (PU-45497-2) to align
from the hot plate. Use a pair of pliers and leather gloves
the teeth of the cam gear (M). Install the cam gear (M) (with
when handling the crankshaft gear.
the Cam Gear Alignment Tool still in place) onto the
24. Install the crankshaft gear (I) onto the crankshaft. camshaft. The timing marks on the camshaft gear should
NOTE: For assembly of the gears, the cam gear and align with the keyway on the balance shaft gear.
the crankshaft gear are stamped with This Side Out."
This indicates the side of the gear that faces outward
or away from the case.
PU-45497-2
NOTE: If the timing mark on the camshaft gear does

not align properly, remove the camshaft gear and
I tool. Use the Cam Spanner Wrench (PU-45498) to
rotate the cam to the proper position.
3.48
ENGINE
NOTE: Cam Spanner Wrench (PU-45498) is only Before installing the gear/stator housing, replace the seals in the
needed to rotate the camshaft when the entire valve
train is assembled.
Timing Marks
PU-45498
=T 3
Counterbalance Gear and Camshaft
Gear Bolt Torque:
22 ± 2 ft. lbs. (30 ± 3 Nm)
cover. Install a new water pump seal (N) into the gear/stator
housing (O). Use the Water Pump Mechanical Seal Installer
(PA-44995) to properly install the seal to the correct depth in the
27. Reinstall the camshaft gear; so the timing marks are cover.
properly aligned. Install the washer and bolt. Torque to Due to seal design and construction, seals MUST be
specification.
NOTE: Be sure all of the timing marks are properly
aligned. PA-44995
Water Pump Gear O
K
PA
Timing Marks
-4 4
99
N
5
N
M
installed DRY (no lubricant) during assembly. Use of
lubricants (oil, soapy water, etc.) will not allow the seal
to wear-in and seal properly. Do not touch seal
surface or allow seal surface to come in contact with
contaminates during installation. Thoroughly clean
parts, tools and hands before installation.
NOTE: To remove the water pump seal, the gear/
stator housing must be removed. The water pump
seal cannot be removed or installed with the gear/
stator housing attached to the engine. Shaft damage
will occur.
NOTE: Install the water pump seal (N) with the seal
lip facing out (towards the crankcase). Use of a
hydraulic press is recommended for this procedure.
3.49
ENGINE
28. Install a new crankshaft seal (P) into the gear/stator housing 30. Carefully install the tapered end of the Crankshaft Seal
cover (O). Use the Universal Driver Handle (PU-45543) Protection Tool (PA-45658) through the paper side of the
and the Main Seal Installer (PA-45483) to seat the crankshaft seal. (Back to Front) Leave the seal protector
crankshaft seal into place. installed in the crankshaft seal. Check the crankshaft seal
lips to verify they have not been rolled or damaged.
PU-45543
PA-45483
NOTE: Install the crankshaft seal (P) with the seal lip 31. Before installing the gear/stator housing cover, install the
facing out (towards the crankcase). Water Pump Seal Saver (PA-45401) onto the water pump
shaft.
P
PA-45401
Seal lip goes towards the crankcase.
29. Once the crankshaft seal is installed into the gear/stator

housing cover, set the direction of the paper lip by sliding
the Main Crankshaft Seal Saver (PA-45658) into the
crankshaft seal from the rubber lipped side to the paper lip
side.(Back to Front) Remove the tool. 32. Install a NEW gasket to the gear/stator housing cover and
crankcase. With the tools installed, carefully place the
IMPORTANT: Set the direction gear/stator housing cover over the protection tools.
of the paper lip seal.
PA-54658
3.50
ENGINE
33. Apply Crankcase Sealant (PN 2871557) to the outside 35. Secure the gear/stator housing cover (O) to the crankcase
edges of the crankcase halves (See arrows), where the with the cover bolts. Torque bolts in proper sequence to
crankcases mate. (See photos below.) This helps to prevent specification. Remove seal protectors from the shaft ends
coolant leakage. once secure.
PA-45401
3
O
PA-45658
=T
Gear/Stator Housing Bolt Torque:
96 ± 3 in. lbs. (10.85 ± 0.35 Nm)
*Torque in proper sequence

installing bolts.
36. Install shaft seal with ceramic surface facing inward.

34. Install the gear/stator housing gasket onto he crankcase.
Gear/Stator Housing Gasket
3.51
ENGINE
37. Install water pump impeller (P). Secure the impeller with 39. Sparingly apply Starter Drive Grease (PN 2871423) to the
the washer and a new nylok nut (Q). Torque the nut to starter drive. Install the starter bendix.
specification. NOTE: There are thrust washers on both sides of
starter drive.
=T
40. Install stator assembly (S) and bolts. Torque bolts to
specification.
Water Pump Impeller Nut Torque:
108 ± 6 in. lbs. (6.8 ± 0.68 Nm) 41. Install the wire hold down bracket (T). Install two new wire
hold down bolts. New bolts contain patch-lock. Torque
38. Install water pump cover (R) with new O-ring seal. Torque bolts to specification, following the proper bolt torque
bolts to specification in proper sequence (See front of this sequence. Coat the stator wire grommet (U) with Nyogel
chapter). ™ Grease (PN 2871329).
NOTE: Verify stator wires are routed properly under
the wire hold down bracket.
Install the O-ring dry, no lubricants
Replace 2 bolts with new bolts.
96 ± 3 in. lbs.
(10.85 ± 1.35 Nm) T
S
U
=T
Water Pump Housing Bolt Torque: =T
96 ± 3 in. lbs. (10.85 ± 0.35 Nm)
*Torque in proper sequence Stator Assembly Bolt Torque:
96 ± 3 in.lbs. (10.85 ± 0.35 Nm)
3.52
ENGINE
42. Install the flywheel, washer, nut, and key. Torque flywheel minutes. Install the filter onto the engine.
nut to specification.
65 ± 7 ft.lbs. (88 ± 9.50 Nm)
45. Remove primer plug from the engine. Install Oil System
Priming Adapter (PU-45778) into the oil plug hole. Push
=T 3-5 oz. (approx.) of Polaris 0W-40 into the adapter or until
resistance is felt. Remove the adapter. Apply sealant to the
Flywheel Nut Torque plug threads. Install the plug and torque to specification.
65 ± 7 ft.lbs. (88 ± 9.50 Nm)
PU-45778
43. Install stator housing with new o-rings. Torque the bolts to
specification and follow proper bolt torque sequence at the
beginning of this chapter.
96 ± 3 in.lbs.
(10.85 ± 0.35 Nm)
=T
Primer Plug Torque
=T 18 ± 2 ft.lbs. (24.4 ± 2.71 Nm)
Stator Housing Bolt Torque:

CAUTION
96 ± 3 in. lbs. (10.85 ± 0.35 Nm)
44. After the engine is completely assembled and ready for After any reassembly or rebuild, the engine must be
installation, the engine must be properly primed with primed using the Oil Priming Adapter (PU-45778)
Polaris 0W-40 Synthetic Oil (PN 2871281). Fill the oil and a 3/4-full oil filter before initial start-up. Follow
filter three-quarters full with Polaris 0W-40 Synthetic Oil the steps in this section to properly prime the engine
(PN 2871281). Let the oil soak into the filter for 8-10 and aid proper engine break in. Failure to perform
this procedure may cause internal engine damage
on initial start-up.
3.53
ENGINE
Flywheel / Stator Installation 5. Inspect the mating surface around the gear/stator housing
cover and the crankcase for oil seepage. If there is seepage
NOTE: Before assembly, clean the bolts and bolt between the mating surfaces, then the gear/stator housing
holes with Primer N (PN 2870585) to remove any cover must be resealed. Clean the gearcase surfaces and
debris. This will ensure proper sealing when reseal with a new gasket. Refer to the Lower Engine
installing bolts. Disassembly section and the Lower Engine Assembly
section for details. lnspect the areas pointed out in the
1. Carefully install the stator and trigger coil to the gear/stator
illustration for possible oil seepage.
housing cover. Do not tap on the stator or the gear
stator housing cover. This may cause a leak in between
the gear/stator housing cover and the crankcase.
2. Properly place the stator wires under the wire holddown
and install the bolts. Inspect the bolts, if new bolts are
needed, replace them with new bolts. New bolts contain
patch lock, so Loctite™ is not needed. Torque bolts to
specification.
6. Install stator housing with new O-rings. Torque the bolts

to specification. Follow bolt torque sequence on found at
the beginning of this chapter.
96 ± 3 in.lbs.
(1.85 ± 0.35 Nm)
3. Install the starter bendix if removed.

4. Install woodruff key. Install the flywheel. Install the
flywheel washer and nut. Torque the flywheel nut to
specification.
=T
Flywheel Nut Torque:
65 ± 7 ft.lbs. (88 ± 9.5 Nm)
=T
Stator Housing Bolt Torque:
96 ± 3 in.lbs. (1.85 ± 0.35 Nm)
*Torque in Sequence
3.54
ENGINE
Cylinder Head Reassembly 4. Lubricate push rods (D) and install into lifters.
NOTE: Before reassembly, clean the bolts and bolt

installing bolts.
D
1. Install the head gasket (A) on the cylinder (B).
A
3
5. Lubricate rockers (E) with engine oil.
B E
2. Install cylinder head on cylinder.

3. Lubricate threads and top of washers underside of bolt head
with engine oil. Install head bolts (C) and torque to
specification.
C
6. Verify pushrods are engaged in lifters.
7. Install rockers. Be sure that tab of fulcrum (F) is seated in
head stand-off. Torque bolts to specification.
=T
Cylinder Head Bolt Torque:
Initial setting: 35± 4 ft. lbs. (47.5 ± 5.5 Nm)
Allow to set for 1 minute, then turn
additional 90° (1/4 turn)
*Torque Bolts In Sequence
=T
Rocker Arm Bolt Torque
22 + 2 ft. lbs. (30 ± 3 Nm)
3.55
ENGINE
8. Install breather reed (G) into rocker cover (H). Lightly 11. Install thermostat (J), new O-ring, and thermostat housing.
apply black RTV sealant to the outer edges of the breather Torque to specification.
reed. The reed has a tab and will assemble one-way only.
Torque the breather bolts to specification.
=T 84 ± 8 in.lbs.
(9.5 ± 0.9 Nm)
Breather Bolt Toque:
20 ± 5 in. lbs. (2.5± 0.55 Nm)
NOTE: When applying RTV, do not get any RTV 25 ± 3 ft.lbs. (34 ± 4 Nm)
inside the reed assembly.
9. Place a new seal (I) into the bottom of the cover. Be sure
the seal is seated into the cover properly.
IMPORTANT: Before assembly, clean the bolts and
bolt holes with Primer N (PN 2870585) to remove any
installing bolts. =T
20 ± 5 in.lbs. Thermostat Housing Bolt Torque:
(2.5 ± .55 Nm)
84 ± 8 in. lbs. (9.5± 0.9 Nm)
12. Install temperature sender (K) and torque to specification.

H
G I
10. Install rocker cover. Torque bolts to specification.
=T
=T Temperature Sender Torque:

25 ± 3 ft.lbs. (34 ± 4 Nm)
Rocker Cover Bolt Torque:
84 ± 8 in.lbs. (9.5 ± 0.9 Nm)
Torque in Sequence
3.56
ENGINE
TROUBLESHOOTING Engine Idles But Will Not Accelerate
• Spark plug fouled/weak spark
Engine
• Broken throttle cable
Spark Plug Fouling
• Obstruction in air intake
• Spark plug cap loose or faulty
• Air box removed (reinstall all intake components)
• Incorrect spark plug heat range or gap
• Incorrect or restricted carburetor jetting
• PVT system calibrated incorrectly/ components worn or
mis-adjusted • ETC switch limiting speed
• Fuel quality poor (old) or octane too high • Reverse speed limiter limiting speed
3
• Low compression • Incorrect ignition timing
• Restricted exhaust • Restricted exhaust system
• Weak ignition (loose coil ground, faulty coil, stator, or • Cam worn excessively
ETC switch)
Engine Has Low Power
• ETC switch mis-adjusted
• Spark plug fouled
• Restricted air filter (main or pre-cleaner) or breather
system • Cylinder, piston, ring, or valve wear or damage (check
compression)
• Improperly assembled air intake system
• PVT not operating properly
• Restricted engine breather system
• Restricted exhaust muffler
• Oil contaminated with fuel
• Cam worn excessively
Engine Turns Over But Fails To Start
Piston Failure - Scoring
• No fuel
• Lack of lubrication
• Dirt in fuel line or filter
• Dirt entering engine through cracks in air filter or ducts
• Fuel will not pass through fuel valve
• Engine oil dirty or contaminated
• Fuel pump inoperative/restricted
• Tank vent plugged or pinched Excessive Smoke and Carbon Buildup
• Engine flooded • Excessive piston-to-cylinder clearance
• Low compression (high cylinder leakage) • Wet sumping (Oil Level Too Full)
• No spark (Spark plug fouled) ignition component • Worn rings, piston, or cylinder
failure
• Worn valve guides or seals
Engine Does Not Turn Over • Restricted breather
• Dead battery • Air filter dirty or contaminated
• Starter motor does not turn
Piston Failure - Scoring
• Engine seized, rusted, or mechanical failure
• Lack of lubrication
Engine Runs But Will Not Idle • Dirt entering engine through cracks in air filter or ducts
• Restricted carburetor pilot system • Engine oil dirty or contaminated
• Low compression
• Crankcase breather restricted
3.57
ENGINE
Excessive Smoke and Carbon Buildup Cooling System
• Excessive piston-to-cylinder clearance Overheating
• Wet sumping due to over-full crankcase • Low coolant level
• Worn rings, piston, or cylinder • Air in cooling system
• Worn valve guides or seals • Wrong type/mix of coolant
• Restricted breather • Faulty pressure cap or system leaks
• Air filter dirty or contaminated • Restricted system (mud or debris in radiator fins
causing restriction to air flow, passages blocked in
Low Compression radiator, lines, pump, or water jacket, accident damage)
• Cylinder head gasket leak • Lean mixture (restricted jets, vents, fuel pump or fuel
valve)
• No valve clearance ( cam wear )
• Fuel pump output weak
• Cylinder or piston worn
• Electrical malfunction
• Piston rings worn, leaking, broken, or sticking
• Water pump failure/ Loose impeller
• Bent valve or stuck valve
• Thermistor failure
• Valve spring broken or weak
• Cooling fan inoperative or turning too slowly (perform
• Valve not seating properly (bent or carbon accumulated current draw test)
on sealing surface)
• Ignition timing mis-adjusted
• Rocker arm sticking
• Low oil level
Backfiring
• Spark plug incorrect heat range
• ETC or speed limiter system malfunction • Faulty hot light circuit
• Fouled spark plug or incorrect plug or plug gap • Thermostat stuck closed or not opening completely
• Exhaust system air leaks • Possible diverter plate loose or missing inside radiator
• Exhaust system air leaks
Temperature Too Low
• Ignition system faulty: Spark plug cap cracked/broken,
Ignition coil faulty, Ignition or kill switch circuit faulty, • Thermostat stuck open
Ignition poor connections in ignition system
Leak at Water Pump Weep Hole
• n timing incorrect, Sheared flywheel key
• Faulty water pump mechanical seal (coolant leak)
• Valve sticking
• Faulty pump shaft oil seal (oil leak)
3.58
ENGINE
800 EFI EXHAUST SYSTEM 2. Use a non-caustic cleaner to clean away any remaining
grime, salts or oils.
Dual Exhaust Layout 3. Polish if desired using a soft cloth.
4. Repeat this procedure as often as desired to maintain the
The dual exhaust canisters on select Polaris 800 EFIs are powder
coated. To maintain the finish and prevent corrosion, periodic canister's finish.
maintenance is required. DO NOT use caustic chemicals to NOTE: Silencer removal requires replacement of the
clean, as they may damage the finish.
silencer grommets, item G, as they become
1. Wash any accumulated mud or debris from the canisters damaged during removal.
with a soft brush and soapy water.
A. Mounting Hardware
3
B. Clean Out Plug
C. Exhaust Seal/Clamp
D. Dual Exhaust Pipe
E. Exhaust Gasket
F. Exhaust Silencers
G. Silencer Grommets A.
F
C
B
D
3.59
ENGINE
NOTES
3.60
FUEL INJECTION
CHAPTER 4
FUEL INJECTION
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
SERVICE NOTES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
EFI SYSTEM EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
EFI SYSTEM COMPONENT LOCATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
FUEL TANK ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
FUEL LINES - QUICK CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
PRINCIPAL COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
EFI OPERATION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
INITIAL PRIMING / STARTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (ECU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
OPERATION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
ECU SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
ECU REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
4
FUEL PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
OPERATION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
FUEL PUMP TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
FUEL PUMP / TANK ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
FUEL FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
FUEL FILTER SERVICE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
FUEL INJECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
FUEL INJECTOR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
FUEL INJECTOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CPS) REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14
TEMPERATURE / BAROMETRIC AIR PRESSURE SENSOR (T-BAP). . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
TEMPERATURE AND BAROMETRIC AIR PRESSURE SENSOR TEST . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
TEMPERATURE AND BAROMETRIC AIR PRESSURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT . . 4.15
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (TPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INITIALIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16
ENGINE TEMPERATURE SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18
ENGINE TEMPERATURE SENSOR TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18
ENGINE TEMPERATURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18
DIAGNOSTICS USING “BLINK CODES” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.19
EFI TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.20
EFI CIRCUIT - POWER ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21
EFI CIRCUIT - CRANK POSITION SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21
EFI CIRCUIT - FUEL PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.22
EFI CIRCUIT - THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.22
EFI CIRCUIT - TEMPERATURE - BAROMETRIC AIR PRESSURE SENSOR . . . . . . . 4.23
EFI CIRCUIT - ENGINE TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.23
EFI CIRCUIT - MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.24
4.1
FUEL INJECTION
IMPORTANT: The EFI fuel system remains under high
pressure, even when the engine is not running.
GENERAL INFORMATION Before attempting to service any part of the fuel
system, the pressure must be relieved.
The X2, Touring and Sportsman H.O. utilize different-

style quick-connect fuel line dampers where Special
WARNING Tool PU-48838 is to be connected and used with
Tester PU-43506.
* Gasoline is extremely flammable and explosive
under certain conditions.
* EFI components are under high pressure. Verify
system pressure has been relieved before
disassembly.
* Never drain the fuel system when the engine is hot.
Severe burns may result.
* Do not overfill the tank. The tank is at full capacity
when the fuel reaches the bottom of the filler neck.
Leave room for expansion of fuel.
* Never start the engine or let it run in an enclosed
area. Gasoline powered engine exhaust fumes are
poisonous and can cause loss of consciousness and Fuel Pressure Tester -
death in a short time. PU-43506
* Do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks in or
near the area where refueling is performed or where
gasoline is stored.
* If you get gasoline in your eyes or if you swallow
gasoline, seek medical attention immediately.
* If you spill gasoline on your skin or clothing,
immediately wash with soap and water and change X2 fuel rail stopper
clothing.
* Always stop the engine and refuel outdoors or in a
well ventilated area. Test Valve
X2 / Touring
Special Tools
Table 4-1:
Polaris EFI Diagnostic

PU-47063
Software
Fuel Pressure
PU-43506 Sportsman and Touring Fuel Rail Damper
Test Kit
Fuel Pressure
PU-48838
Test Valve Kit
Test Valve
Throttle Position Sensor
PU-47082 800 H.O.
Tester Harness
Throttle Body Adjustment
PU-47315
Screwdriver
Digital Wrench
PU-47471
SmartLink Kit
4.2
FUEL INJECTION
Fuel Pressure Test Valve - PU-48838
Test Valve
Polaris EFI Diagnostic Software (Digital Wrench) - PU-47063

4
This dealer-only software installs on laptop computers equipped with a CD drive and serial port connection, and is designed to replace
multiple shop tools often used to test EFI components. It also includes step-by-step diagnostic procedures to aid technician repair
and troubleshooting.
Throttle Position Sensor Tester Harness - PU-47082
This harness allows the use of a digital multi-meter to test TPS function as well perform initialization procedures.
Throttle Body Adjustment Screwdriver - PU-47315
This tool has a special ‘D’ shaped end for adjusting the throttle stop screw during a TPS initialization procedure.
Digital Wrench™ SmartLink Unit Kit - PU-47471
Available to Polaris dealers through our tool supplier, SPX (1-800-328-6657) This kit contains the necessary cables and hardware
to communicate between the vehicle ECU and the Digital Wrench diagnostic software. Polaris dealers can also order separately:
SmartLink Module PU-47468, Vehicle Interface Cable PU-47469 and PC Interface Cable PU-47470. For useon all 15-pin connector-
based Polaris EFI systems.
PU-47469
PU-47468
PU-47470
4.3
FUEL INJECTION
Service Notes
• For more convenient and accurate testing of EFI components, it is recommended dealers utilize the Polaris Diagnostic
Software (dealer only), or testing may be done manually using the procedures provided.
• 80% of all EFI problems are caused by wiring harness connections.
• For the purpose of troubleshooting difficult running issues, a known-good ECU from another Polaris ATV EFI of the same
model may be used without damaging system or engine components.
• Never attempt to service any fuel system component while engine is running or ignition switch is "on."
• Cleanliness is essential and must be maintained at all times when servicing or working on the EFI system. Dirt, even in
small quantities, can cause significant problems.
• Do not use compressed air if the system is open. Cover any parts removed and wrap any open joints with plastic if they will
remain open for any length of time. New parts should be removed from their protective packaging just prior to installation.
• Clean any connector before opening to prevent dirt from entering the system.
• Although every precaution has been taken to prevent water intrusion failure, avoid direct water or spray contact with
system components.
• Do not disconnect or reconnect the wiring harness connector to the control unit or any individual components with the
ignition "on." This can send a damaging voltage spike through the ECU.
• Do not allow the battery cables to touch opposing terminals. When connecting battery cables attach the positive (+) cable to
positive (+) battery terminal first, followed by negative (-) cable to negative (-) battery terminal.
• Never start the engine when the cables are loose or poorly connected to the battery terminals.
• Never disconnect battery while engine is running.
• Never use a battery boost-pack to start the engine.
• Do not charge battery with key switch "on."
• Always disconnect negative (-) battery cable lead before charging battery.
• Always unplug ECU from the wire harness before performing any welding on the ATV.
4.4
FUEL INJECTION
EFI System Exploded View
1. Electronic Control Unit (ECU)
2. Intake Air Temperature/Barometric
Air Pressure Sensor (T-BAP)
3. Crankshaft Position Sensor (CPS)
4. Fuel Injectors
5. Fuel Filter (if equipped - not shown)
6. Fuel Pump/Tank Assy.
7 Fuel Rail
8. Engine Coolant Sensor (ECT)
9. Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)
10.Throttle Body
11. Fuel Rail Damper Location 1
4
8
4
7
2
11 10
4.5
FUEL INJECTION
EFI System Component Locations 11. Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECT)
1. Engine Control Unit (ECU)
11
10
2. Intake Air Temperature an d Baro metric Ai r Pressure

Sensor (T-BAP)
3. Crankshaft Position Sensor (CPS)
4. Fuel Injectors
5. 2 Fuel Filters (1 located in tank, 1 under front cab cover not
pictured)
6. Fuel Pump / Regulator / Gauge Sender Assembly (located
In tank as an assembly
7. Fuel Rail / Damper Location
8. Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)
9. Throttle Body
10. Wire Harness Assembly
2 4&7
8&9
4.6
FUEL INJECTION
Fuel Tank Assembly Fuel Lines - Quick Connect
1 2 Sportsman 800 EFI models use quick connect fuel lines. Refer
to the steps below for fuel line removal.
1. Place a shop towel around th e fuel line to catch any

dripping fuel. Squeeze the co nnector tabs together and
push the locking slide back.
2. Pull on the fuel line for removal.
3. To install the line, verify the connector and fuel tank nipple
3 are clean and free of debris.
4. Snap the fuel line back over the nipple and slide the locking
mechanism back into place. Verify the connector tabs snap
4 back into place.
5
1. Cap 2. Tank Vent 3. Tank Mount

4. Fuel Pump/Tank Assembly 5. Fuel Lines
Fuel Flow
Squeeze Connector Tabs
Fuel Tank
* Fuel Pump / * Fuel Filter

Pressure Regulator (30 micron)
Unit
Fuel Supply Rail Injectors
* component located in fuel tank and is non-serviceable
4.7
FUEL INJECTION
ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION When the intake valve opens, the fuel/air mixture is drawn into
the combustion chamber, ignited. and burned.
Principal Components The ECU controls the amount of fuel being injected and the
The Electronic Fuel Injection(EFI) system is a complete engine ignition timing by monitoring the primary sensor signals for air
fuel and ignition management design. This system includes the temperature, barometric air pressure, engine temperature, speed
following principal components: (RPM), and throttle position (load). These primary signals are
compared to the programming in the ECU computer chip, and
• Fuel Pump the ECU adjusts the fuel delivery and ignition timing to match
the values.
ail
• Fuel R
During o peration the ECU has t he abil ity to re-adj ust
• Fuel Line(s) temporarily, provi ding co mpensation for changes in overall
engine condition and operating environment, so it will be able
• Fuel Filter(s) to maintain the ideal air/fuel ratio.
• Fuel Injectors During certain operating periods such as cold starts, warm up,
acceleration, etc., a richer ai r/fuel ratio is automatically
• Pressure Regulator
calculated by the ECU.
• Throttle Body / lntake Manifold
Initial Priming / Starting Procedure
• Engine Control Unit (ECU)
NOTE: The Injection system must be purged of all
• Ignition Coils air prior to the initial start up, and/or any time the
• Coolant Temperature Sensor system has been disassembled.
• Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) If the EFI system is complete ly em pty of fuel or has been
disassembled and repaired:
• Crankshaft Position Sensor (CPS)
1. Cycle the key switch from “OFF” to “ON” 6 times ,
• Intake Air Temperature and Barometric Air Pressure waiting for approximately 3 seconds at each “ON” cycle to
Sensor (T-BAP) allow the fuel pump to cycle and shut down.
• Wire Harness Assembly 2. Once step 1 is completed, turn the key switch to “START”
until the engine starts or 5 seconds has passed.
• Check Engine Light (MIL) 3. If the engine failed to start, repeat step 1 for 2 more cycles
and attempt to start the engine.
EFI Operation Overview
If the engine fails to start, a problem may still exist, and should
The EFI system is designed to provide peak engine performance be diagnosed.
with optimum fuel efficiency and lowest poss ible emissions.
The igni tion and in jection fu nctions are electroni cally NOTE: Accurate testing of EFI components is
controlled, monitored and co ntinually corrected during recommended utilizing the Polaris Diagnostic
operation to maintain peak performance. Software (dealer only).
The central component of the system is th e B osch Engine
Control M anagement Unit (ECU) w hich m anages system
operation, determining the best combination of fuel mixture and
ignition timing for the current operating conditions.
An in-tank electric fuel pumpis used to move fuel from the tank
through the fuel l ine. Th e in-tank fuel pressu re reg ulator
maintains a system operating pressure of 39 psi and returns any
excess fuel to the tank. At the negine, fuel is fed through the fuel
rail and into the injectors, which inject into the intake ports. The
ECU controls the amount of fuel by varying the length of time
that the inje ctors a re "on". This can ran ge fr om 1. 5-8.0
milliseconds depending on fuel requirements. Th e controlled
injection of the fuel occurs each crankshaft revolution, or twice
for each 4-stroke cycle. One-halfthe total amount of fuel needed
for one firing of a cylinder is injected during each injection.
4.8
FUEL INJECTION
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (ECU) Sportsman 800 EFI RPM Limit:
Hard Limit - Injector suppression occurs

Operation Overview
The ECU is the brain or central processing com puter of the • High: 6500 (6600 - H.O engine - L/N/R/P)
entire EFI fuel/ignition management system. During operation, • Low: 6500
sensors continuously gather data which is relayed through the
• Neutral: 6500
wiring harness to input circuits within the ECU. Signals to the
ECU include: ignition (on/off), crankshaft position and speed • Reverse: 6500
(RPM), th rottle posi tion, eng ine coolant temperature, air • Park: 6500
temperature, intake manifold air pressure and battery voltage.
The ECU compares the input signals to the programmed maps Soft Limit - Timing suppression occurs
in its m emory and determines the appropriate fuel and sp ark
requirements for the immediate operating conditions. The ECU • High: None
then sends output signals to set the injector duration and ignition • Low: 6300 (6400 - H.O engine - L/N/R/P)
timing.
• Neutral: 6300
• Reverse: 6300 4
• Park: 6300
ECU Service
Never attempt to disassemble the ECU. It is sealed to prevent
damage to internal components. Warranty is void if the case is
opened or tampered with in any way.
All operating and control functions within the ECU are pre-set.
No internal servicing or read justment may be performed. If a
problem is encounte red, and you determine the ECU to be
faulty, contact the Polaris Se rvice Department for specific
handling instructions. Do not replace the ECU without factory
authorization.
The rel ationship between th e ECU and th e throttle p osition

During operation, the ECU continually performs a diagnostic sensor (TPS) is very critical to proper system operation. If the
check of itself, each of the sensors, and system performance. If TPS is faulty, or the mounting position of the TPS to the throttle
a fault is detected, the ECU turns on the Malfunction Indicator body is altered, the TPS must be re-initialized.
Light (MIL) (Check Engi ne Lig ht) on the speedometer and
stores th e fault code in its fau lt mem ory. Dep ending on th e For the p urpose of tro ubleshooting, a kn own-good ECU fro m
significance or severi ty of the faul t, normal operatio n may another Pol aris A TV EFI of the same m odel m ay b e used
continue, or "Fail-Sa fe" operation (slowe d speed, richer without system or engine component damage.
running) may be initiated. A technician can access the stored
fault code using a “blink code” diagnosis flashed out through the ECU Replacement
Instrument cluster. The ECU requires a minimum of 7.0 volts to
operate. The memory in the ECU is operational the moment the 1. Remove the retaining screws (2) holding the ECU.
battery cables are connected. 2. With the Igni tion turned off, disconnect the wire harness
from the ECU.
To prevent engine over -speed and possible failure, a rev- 3. To install, reverse the procedures, reapply a small amount
limiting feature is programmed into the ECU. If the maximum of dielectric grease to the co nnector if desired. Tigh ten
RPM limit (6500) is exceeded, the ECU suppresses the injection
screws to specification.
signals, cutting off the fuel flow. This process repeats it self in
rapid succession, limiting operation to the preset maximum.
=T
ECU Retaining Screws
10 in. lbs. (1.1 Nm)
4.9
FUEL INJECTION
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump Test
NOTE: FUEL GAUGE SENDER TEST - To test fuel
Operation Overview
gauge sender function, refer to Chapter 10.
NOTE: All EFI units utilize quick connect lines. Fuel
Tank / Pump Assembly is a non-serviceable item and The fuel pump/tank ass embly is non-serviceable and must be
must be replaced if determined to be at fault. replaced if determined to be faulty. If a fuel delivery problem is
suspected, make certain the filter is not plugged, that the pump
An electric fuel pump assembly is used to transfer fuel to the EFI is being activated through the ECU, all electrical connections
system from inside the fuel tank.This assembly includes the fuel are properly secured, the fuses are good, and a minimum of 7.0
pump, regulator and fuel gauge sender. The pump is rated for a volts i s bei ng supp lied. If dur ing starting th e b attery vol tage
minimum output of 25 liters per hour at 39 psi and has a non- drops below 7.0 volts, the ECU will fail to operate the system.
serviceable internal 30-micron filter.
Example Shown. WARNING
Fuel pump not replaceable.
For reference only.
Check the fuel test valve for any possible fuel
seepage after performing any tests or procedures.
Fuel is extremely flammable and may cause severe
Regulator burns, injury, or death. Do not use any device that
produces a flame or electrical devices that may
spark around fuel or fuel vapors.
1. Remove the fuel rail end cap (damper).

Fuel Pump
2. Connect the fuel rail end cap (damper) onto adapter PU-
47476 and install on the fuel rail.
Internal 30 Mi cron 3. Attach Polaris pressure tester PU-43506. Route the tester
Strainer (Bottom) clear hose i nto a portable gasol ine container or t he
Fuel Gauge Sender equipment fuel tank.
When the key switch is turned to "ON", the ECU activates the
fuel pump, which pressurizes the system for start-up.
The ECU switches of f the pum p preventing the continued

delivery of fuel in these instances:
• If the key switch is not promptly turned to the "start" Normal Fuel Pressure: 39 psi. ± 3
position.
• If the engine fails to start, or 4. Turn on the key switch to activate the pump and check the
system pressure on the gauge. If system pressure of 39 psi
• If the engine is stopped with the key switch "on" (as in  3 is observed, the ignition switch, ECU, fuel pump, and
the case of an accident) pressure regulator are work ing p roperly. Turn th e key
In these situations, the “check engine” light will go on, but will switch o ff an d dep ress the val ve but ton on th e tester t o
turn off after 4 cranking revolutions if system function is OK. relieve the system pressure.
Once the engine is running, the fuel pump remains on. NOTE: If the pressure is too high or too low, replace
the fuel tank assembly.
4.10
FUEL INJECTION
5. If the pump did not activate (Step 2), disconnect the plug 3. Remove the clamps on the PVT intake duct and remove the
from th e fu el p ump. Connect a DC voltmeter across PVT duct.
terminals “A” and “C” in the plug, turn on the key switch
and observe if a minimum of 7 volts is present. If voltage
is between 7 and 14, turn ke y switch off and connect an
ohmmeter between the terminals “A” and “C”' on the pump
to check for continuity.
NOTE: If there was no continuity between the pump
terminals, replace the fuel tank assembly.
NOTE: If the voltage was below 7Vdc, test the

battery, ignition switch, wiring harness and ECU.
6. If voltage at the plug was good, and there was continuity

across the pump terminals, reconnect the plug to the pump,
making sure you have good, clean connections. Turn on the
key switch and listen for the pump to activate. 4. Remove the gas tank cover vent hose. Be sure to properly
route the vent hose upon reassembly.
4
NOTE: If the pump starts, repeat steps 1 and 2 to
verify correct pressure.
NOTE: If the pump still does not operate, check for

correct ECU operation by plugging in a known-good
ECU of the same model.
NOTE: If the pump still does not operate, replace the

pump/tank assembly.
Fuel Pump / Tank Assembly Replacement

NOTE: All EFIs utilize quick connect fuel lines.
WARNING
5. With all the body panels removed from the front of the ATV
Always wear safety equipment when working with and the g as tan k expo sed, di sconnect the pum p wi ring
high pressure or flammable fluids. Failure to do so harness.
could result in serious injury or complications.
WARNING
NOTE: The fuel pump cannot be replaced as an
individual part, the entire fuel pump and fuel tank is Wear safety equipment while performing this
replaced as an assembly. Refer to your parts book procedure, failure to do so could result in serious
for the proper part number. injuries.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 6. Relieve the fuel pressure at the fuel test valve.
2. Remove the side panels and front cab assembly. Refer to 7. Loosen the fuel tank hose and pull the fuel line from
“COVER PANEL REMOVAL" in Chapter 5 for details. the tank. NOTE: A small amount of fuel may come
out of the fuel line or tank. Plug the fuel line and tank
inlet or use a shop towel during removal.
4.11
FUEL INJECTION
NOTE: A small amount of fuel may come out of the FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
fuel line or tank. Plug the fuel line and tank inlet or
use a shop towel during removal. Operation Overview
The fuel pressure regulator maintains th e required operatin g
WARNING system pressure of 39 psi + 3psi. A rubber -fiber diaphragm
divides t he regul ator in to two separate sections-, the fuel
Check the fuel rail for any possible fuel seepage chamber and the pres sure regu lating chamber . The press ure
regulating spring presses against the valve holder (part of the
after performing any tests or procedures. Fuel is
diaphragm), pressing the valve against the valve seat. The
extremely flammable and may cause severe burns, combination of atmospheric p ressure and regul ating spring
injury, or death. Do not use any device that tension equals the desired operating pressure. Any time the fuel
produces a flame or electrical devices that may pressure against the bottom of the diaphragm exceeds the
spark around fuel or fuel vapors. desired (top) press ure, the valve opens , relieving the exc ess
pressure, returning the excess fuel back to the tank.
8. Remove t he air bo x co ver and remo ve t he tw o g as tank
mounting bolts at the rear of the gas tank. Fuel Pressure Regulator Test
Refer to the “FUEL PUMP TEST” procedure.
See “Fuel Pump Test” on page 4.10.
Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement

The regulator is a sealed, non -serviceable assembly . If it is
faulty, the pump assembly must be replaced. Refer to the Fuel
Pump/Tank Assembly Replacement procedure.
FUEL FILTER
General Information
All EFI Engines us e a non-ser viceable, high-volume, high-
pressure, 3 0-micron i nternal fuel pump filt er. The fi lter is
9. Carefully pull the fuel tank out of the frame. Keep the fuel located inside the tank as part of the fuel pump assembly.
tank horizontal during removal, this will keep the fuel in the
tank from spilling out the top inlet. Fuel Filter Service
FUEL PUMP TANK INSTALLATION The in-tank filter is non-serviceable. Tank flushing to remove
sediments may tem porarily resto re fuel flow, but is not a
1. Reinstall the pump/tank assembly. recommended service procedure.
2. Reconnect the sender wiring harness and route the harness
properly. Install th e fuel line and s ecure the fuel line Fuel Filter Replacement
clamps.
The in-tank filter is non-replaceable.
3. Reinstall the two fuel tank mounting bolts at back of tank.
Tighten sufficiently. NOTE: Tank replacement is required.
4. Reinstall the PVT intake duct, gas tank vent line, front cab
assembly, and side panels.
NOTE: Properly route the gas tank vent line, use
tape to secure the vent line in place. (See Pg. 4.10).
5. Reconnect the negative batte ry cable. Test the sender for

proper operation.
4.12
FUEL INJECTION
FUEL INJECTORS • Disconnect the electrical connector from an injector and
listen for a change in idle performance (only running on
one cylinder) or a change in injector noise or vibration.
Operation Overview
NOTE: Do not apply voltage directly to the fuel
NOTE: All EFI units utilize quick connect fuel lines. injector(s). Excessive voltage will burn out the
injector(s). Do not ground the injector(s) with the
The fuel injectors mount into the intake manifold, and the fuel ignition "on". lnjector(s) will open/turn on if relay is
rail attaches to them atthe top end. O-Rings on both ends of the energized.
injector prevent external fuel leaks and also insulate it from heat
and vibration. If an injector is notoperating, it can indicateeither a bad injector,
or a wiring/electrical connection problem. Check as follows:
Injector leakage is very unlikely, but in rare instances it can be

internal (past the tip of the valve needle), or external (weeping
around the injector body). The loss of system pressure from the
leakage can cause hot re start problems and l onger cranki ng
times.
Injector
Injector problems due to dirt or clogging are unlikely due to the
4
design of the injectors, the high fuel pressure, the use of filters
and the detergent additives in the gasoline. Symptoms that could
be cau sed by d irty/clogged i njectors i nclude roug h idle,
hesitation/stumble during accelerati on, or triggering of fault
codes related to fuel delivery. Injector clogging is usually caused
by a buildup of deposits on the director plate, restricting the flow
of fuel, resulting in a p oor spray p attern. Some contributing
When the key switch is on, the fuel rail is pressurized, and factors to injector clogging include; dirty air filters, higher than
voltage is present at the injector. At the proper instant, the ECU normal operating te mperatures, s hort operating interva ls and
completes the ground circuit, energizing the injector. The valve dirty, incorrect, or poo r quality fuel . Cleani ng of clog ged
needle in the injector is ope ned electromagnetically, and the injectors is not recommended; they should be replaced.
pressure in the fuel rail forcesfuel down through the inside. The Additives and higher grades of fuel can be used asa preventative
“director plate” at the tip of the injector (see inse t) contains a measure if clogging has been a problem.
series of calibrate d openings which di rects the fuel into th e
intake port in a cone-shaped spray pattern. Fuel Injector Replacement
The injector is opened and closed once for each cranks haft 1. Engine mu st be cool . Depressurize fuel system through
revolution, ho wever only on e-half the tot al amo unt of fuel test valve in fuel rail.
needed for one firing is injected during each opening. The 2. Remove the front fender assembly and fuel tank.
amount of fuelinjected is controlled by the ECU and determined 3. Thoroughly clean the area around and including the throttle
by the length of time the valve needle is held open, also referred
body/manifold and the injectors.
to as the “injection duration” or “pulse width”. It may vary in
length from 1.5-8 milliseconds depending on the speed and load 4. Disconnect the fuel injector harness(s) at the ECU.
requirements of the engine. 5. Remove the fuel rail mounting screw and carefully loosen
/ pull the rail away from the injectors.
Fuel Injector Service 6. Reverse the procedures to install the new injector(s) and
reassemble. Lub ricate O-rin gs lig htly wit h oi l to aid
Injector probl ems ty pically fall into three general categories-
electrical, dirty/clogge d, or leakage. An electrical problem installation. Torq ue t he fuel rail mo unting screw to
usually causes one or both of the injectors to stop functioning. specification.
Several methods may be us ed to check if the injectors are
operating. =T
• With the engine running at idle, feel for operational
vibration, indicating that they are opening and closing. Fuel Rail Mount Screws
16-20 ft. lbs. (22.6-27 Nm)
• When temperatures prohibit touching, listen for a
buzzing or clicking sound with a screwdriver or
mechanic's stethoscope.
4.13
FUEL INJECTION
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR 3. Disconnect s peed s ensor conn ector from wi ring harness.
(CPS) (the connector with one h eavy black lead) Viewing the
connector wi th d ual ali gning rails on t op, test resi stance
Operation Overview between the terminals. A reading of 560   10% should
again be obtained.
The engine speed sensor is essent ial to engi ne operation , NOTE: If the resistance is incorrect, remove the
constantly monitoring the rotational speed (RPM) and position screw securing the sensor to the mounting bracket
of the crankshaft.
and replace the sensor. If the resistance in step 2
was incorrect, but the resistance of the sensor alone
Crank Sensor was correct, test the main harness circuit between
the sensor connector terminals and the
corresponding pin terminals in the main connector.
Correct any observed problem, reconnect the
sensor, and perform step 2 again.
Crankshaft Position Sensor (CPS)

Replacement
1. Disconnect sensor harness connector.
A ferromagnetic 60-tooth ring gear with two consecutive teeth

missing is mounted on the flywheel. The inductive speed sensor
is mounted 1.0  0.26 mm (0.059  0.010 in.) away from the
ring gear. Du ring ro tation, an AC pulse is created within the
sensor for each passing tooth.The ECU calculates engine speed
from the time interval between the consecutive pulses. The two-
tooth gap creates an “interrupt” input signal, corresponding to
specific crankshaft position for PTO cylinder. This signal serves
as a reference for the control of ign ition timing by the ECU .
Synchronization of the CPS and crankshaft position takes place
during the first two revolutions each time the engine is started.
This sensor must be properly connected at all times. If the sensor 2. Using a 6 m m hex wrench, rem ove the retaining bolt and
fails or becomes disconnected for any reason, the engine will
replace the sensor, using a light coating of oil on the o-ring
quit running.
to aid installation.
Crankshaft Position Sensor Test 3. Torque the retaining bolt to specification.
The crankshaft position sensor is a sealed, non-serviceable

assembly. If fault code diagnosis indicates a problem within this
=T
area, test and correct as follows:
CPS Retaining Bolt Torque:
1. Disconnect main harness connector from ECU. 25 in. lbs. (2.8 Nm)
2. Connect an ohmmeter betw een the pin terminals . A
resistance value of 560  10% at room temperature (20
C, 68 F) should be obtained. If resistance is correct, check
the mounting, air gap, toothed ring gear (damage, runout,
etc.), and flywheel key.
Crankshaft Position Sensor:

560  10% (20 C, 68 F)
4.14
FUEL INJECTION
TEMPERATURE / BAROMETRIC AIR THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (TPS)
PRESSURE SENSOR (T-BAP)
Operation Overview
Operation Overview
The throttle position sensor (TPS) is used to indicate throttle
Mounted o n the th rottle b ody i ntake, th e temperature and plate angle to the ECU.
barometric air pressure sensor (T-BAP) performs two functions
in one unit. Stop Screw
(Factory Set)
DO NOT ADJUST
Throttle Body
TPS
Air passing through the intake is measured by the T-BAP and
relayed to the ECU. These signal s, comprised of separat e air
temperature and barometric air pressure readings, are processed Mounted on the throttle body and operated directly off the end
by the ECU and compared to it's programming for determining of the throttle shaft, the TPS works like a rheostat, varying the
the fuel and ignition requirements during operation. voltage signal to the ECU in directcorrelation to the angle of the
throttle plate. This signal is processed by the ECU and compared
Temperature and Barometric Air Pressure to the internal pre-programmed maps to determine the required
Sensor Test fuel and ignition settings for the amount of engine load.
The temperature and barometric air pressure sensor (T-BAP) is IMPORTANT: The correct position of the throttle body
a non-serviceable item. If it is fa ulty, it must be replaced. This stop screw is established and set at the factory. It is
sensor requires a 5 Vdc input to operate, therefore the T-BAP calibrated for idle air flow. Do not loosen the throttle
sensor shou ld onl y be tested using the Polaris Diag nostic body stop screw or alter it’s position in any manner.
Software (dealer only). Refer to the EFI Diagnostic Software If the stop screw is repositioned / adjusted, the throttle
Manual for more information. body assembly must be replaced.
Temperature and Barometric Air Pressure

Sensor Replacement
1. Disconnect sensor from engine harness.
2. Using a 10mm w rench, remove th e retain ing bo lt and
replace the sensor, using a light coating of oil on the o-ring
to aid installation.
3. Torque the retaining bolt to specification.
=T
T-BAP Retaining Bolt Torque:
29 in. lbs. (3.3 Nm)
4.15
FUEL INJECTION
Throttle Position Sensor Test VERIFY CORRECT REFERENCE VOLTAGE
The throttle position sensor (TPS) readin g can be checked by 2. A 5 volt reference voltage from the harness is required for
using TPS Tester Adapter Harness (PU-47082) and TPS Tester the TPS tes t to be accurate. Refer to the instructions
Regulator (401264). The throttle position sensor (TPS) is a non- provided with the TPS Test Adapter Harness (PU-47082).
serviceable item. If it is faulty, it must be replaced. Follow the steps to check reference voltage.
1. Set up the TPS Test Adapter Harness (PU-47082), 3. To check tester reference voltage: Insert black voltmeter
according to the instructions. Make sure that the 9 volt probe into the “Bk” test port.
battery is new. Figure 2. 4. Connect the red meter probe into the “R” port and verify
the voltage is 4.99-5.01 Vdc. If this reading is low, verify
TPS Tester the 9 volt battery is good or try a new 9 volt battery.
PU-47082 Reference Voltage Test
Use a NEW
9Vdc Battery
TPS Tester
Regulator
4010264 5. To check TPS voltage: With the test leads connected in the
“Y” and “BK” ports and themeter set to Vdc, slowly open
and close the throttle while eading
r the display. The voltage
NOTE: If your dealership sells Polaris snowmobiles, should increase smoothly wi th no “jumps” or decreases
you may already have regulator 4010264 from TPS when the throttle is applied.
Tester Kit 2201519. If you do not have this regulator,
you must order one from SPX at 1-800-328-6657.
PU-47082 Harness No “Jumps” in read out
Typical Tester
Set-up
Test Ports
9 Volt Battery
Regulator
Cable Ties
Install Regulator 6. If the sensor doe s not function correctly, replace it. See
Connections Here “Throttle Position Sensor Replacement”.
R = RED 7. Proceed to “Throttle Position Sensor Adjustment”.
P = PINK
Bk = BLACK
Y = YELLOW
4.16
FUEL INJECTION
Throttle Position Sensor Replacement Throttle Position Sensor Adjustment
The correct po sition of the TPS is establ ished an d set at th e IMPORTANT: The correct position of the thottle body
factory. If the TPS is repositioned, replaced or loosened it must valve angle is established and set at the factory. If the
be re-calibrated. TPS was repositioned, replaced or loosened, it must
be recalibrated. Do not adjust the throttle body stop
screw. If the throttle body stop screw is adjusted, the
entire assembly must be replaced.
1. Very the throttle body is closed. Loosen the throttle cable

if required.
C
2. Verify TP S Tester PU -47082 and test leads are still
connected the TPS.
3. Loosen the m ounting screw (B) holding the TPS to the
B
throttle body.
4. Rotate the TPS until the meter reads .710±.010 Vdc.
TPS T ester Adapter

Should Read: .710 Vdc
4
Harness- PU-47082
A
.710
1. Remove the side panel assembly and air box.
2. Disconnect sensor (A) from the harness.
3. Loosen the boot clamp (C) and rotate the throttle body to
gain access to the retaining screw (B).
4. Remove the retaining screw and replace the sensor.
5. Refer to “Throttle Position Sensor Adjustment” for setting
the TPS voltage and sufficiently tighten the retaining screw
once completed.
TPS Output Reading

.710 ± .010 Vdc
5. Tighten the TPS mounting screw and verify the voltage did
not change.
6. Open and close throttle a few times to ensure full throttle
closing. Do not snap closed, as this could cause
unnecessary thrott le plat e-to-throttle body int erference
and/or damag e. V erify the vol tage did not change. If
changed, repeat steps 3, 4, 5 and 6 or inspect throttle body
for possible wear or damage.
7. Reconnect the TPS harness lead.
8. Reinstall throttle body. Adjust cable freeplay if required.
4.17
FUEL INJECTION
ENGINE TEMPERATURE SENSOR Engine Temperature Sensor Test
Operation Overview
Mounted on the cyl inder, the en gine t emperature sensor
measures coolant temperature. The engine temperature sensor
is a Negative Temperature Coefficient (NTC) type sensor, as the
temperature increases the resistance decreases.
Engine Temperature Sensor
To quickly rule out other components and wiring related to the

ETS, disconnect the harness from the ETS. The fan should turn
on and ‘HO T’ should indicate on the instrument cluster. This
indicates all other components are working properly.
Refer to Chapter 10 for ETS testing. Polaris dealerscan also test

the sensor by usingthe Polaris Digital Wrench‘ Software (dealer
only). Refer to the Digital Wrench‘ Software Manual for more
information.
Table 4-1: ETS Resistance Readings
TEMPERATURE F
RESISTANCE
Refer to Chapter 10 for testing. S tandard resistance readings (C)
according to temperature:
68 F (20 C) 2.5 k  6%
Coolant passes through the cylinder and by th e sensor probe,
varying a resistance reading which is relayed to the ECU. This 212 F (100 C) 0.186 k 2%
signal is processed by the ECU and compared to it's
programming for determining th e fuel and ig nition Engine Temperature Sensor Replacement
requirements during operation. The ECU alsouses this signal to
determine when to activate the fan during operation. If for any 1. Drain coolant to level below sensor
reason the engine temperature sensor circuit is interrupted, the 2. Disconnect sensor from engine harness.
fan will default to “ON”. 3. Using a wrench, remove and replace the sensor, applying
a light coating of thread sealant to aid installation.
4. Torque the sensor to specification.
=T
Engine Temperature Sensor Torque:
18 ft. lbs. (25 Nm)
4.18
FUEL INJECTION
TROUBLESHOOTING NOTE: To clear codes manually, disconnect the
positive battery lead for 20 seconds.
Diagnostics Using “Blink Codes”
To enable the blink codes, turn the ignition from “OFF” to “ON”
ON
3 times, leaving it 'on' the 3rd time, within 5 seconds.
Any “blink codes” stored in the ECU will display a numerical

“blink code”, one at a time, innumerical order, on the instrument
cluster LCD. The word ‘END’ will display after all codes have
been transmitted.
Table 4-1: DIAGNOSTIC “BLINK CODES” CHART

SAE BLINK NAME MIL
4
CODE CODE LIGHT
P0335 21 Loss of Synchronization Yes
P0122 22 TPS Circuit: Open and Short To Ground Yes
P0123 22 TPS Circuit: Short To Battery Yes
P0601 23 RAM Error: Defective ECU Yes
P0914 25 Transmission Input - Invalid Gear Yes
P0500 26 Vehicle Speed Sensor - Implausible Yes
P0113 41 Air Temp Sensor: Open or Short Circuit to Sensor Voltage (ECU) Yes
P0112 41 Air Temp Sensor: Short Circuit to Ground Yes
P0117 42 Engine Temperature Sensor Circuit: Short To Ground Yes
P0118 42 Engine Temperature Sensor Circuit: Open or Short to Battery Yes
P0107 45 Barometric Pressure Sensor: Circuit Low Input Yes
P0108 46 Barometric Pressure Sensor: Circuit High Input Yes
P1260 51 Injector 1: Open Load Yes
P0261 51 Injector 1: Short Circuit to Ground Yes
P0262 51 Injector 1: Short Circuit to Battery Yes
P1263 52 Injector 2: Open Load Yes
P0264 52 Injector 2: Short Circuit to Ground Yes
P0265 52 Injector 2: Short Circuit to Battery Yes
P0655 54 Engine Temperature Lamp: Open Load Yes
P1657 54 Engine Temperature Lamp: Short Circuit to Ground Yes
P1658 54 Engine Temperature Lamp: Short Circuit to Battery Yes
P1651 55 Diagnostic Lamp: Open Load Yes
P1652 55 Diagnostic Lamp: Short Circuit to Ground Yes
P1653 55 Diagnostic Lamp: Short Circuit To Battery Yes
P1231 56 Pump Relay Open Load Yes
P1232 56 Pump Relay Short Circuit to Ground Yes
P1233 56 Pump Relay Short Circuit to Battery Yes
P1480 58 Cooling Fan: Open Load Yes
P1481 58 Cooling Fan: Short Circuit to Ground Yes
P1482 58 Cooling Fan: Short Circuit to Battery Yes
-- 61 End of Diagnostic Check --
4.19
FUEL INJECTION
EFI Troubleshooting Poor Idle
Fuel Starvation / Lean Mixture Symptom: Idle Too Hi gh (If g reater than 1300 RPM wh en
engine is warm)
Symptoms: H ard start or no start, bo g, backfire, p opping
through in take / exhau st, h esitation, det onation, lo w po wer, • Throttle stop screw tampering
spark plug erosion, eng ine runs hot , sur ging, h igh i dle, idle
speed erratic. • Throttle cable sticking, improperly adjusted, routed
incorrectly
• No fuel in tank
Symptom: Idle Too Low (if less than 900 RPM when engine is
• Restricted tank vent, or routed improperly warm)
• Fuel lines or fuel injectors restricted • Plugged air filter
• Fuel filter plugged • Leaking injector (rich condition)
• Fuel pump inoperative • Belt dragging
• Air leak in system • Throttle stop screw tampering
• Intake air leak (throttle shaft, intake ducts, airbox or air Symptom: Erratic Idle
cleaner cover)
• Throttle cable incorrectly adjusted
• Incorrect throttle stop screw adjustment
• Air Leaks, dirty injector
Rich Mixture
• TPS damaged or adjusted
Symptoms: Fou ls spark pl ugs, black , so oty exhaust smo ke,
rough idle, poor fuel economy, engine runs rough/ misses, poor • Tight valves
performance, bog, engine loads up, backfire.
• Ignition timing incorrect
• Air intake restricted (inspect intake duct)
• Belt dragging
• Air filter dirty/plugged
• Dirty air cleaner
• Poor fuel quality (old fuel)
• Engine w
orn
• Fouled spark plug
• Spark Plug fouled
• TPS setting incorrect
• Throttle stop screw set incorrectly (out of sync with
• Injector failure ECU)
4.20
FUEL INJECTION
EFI CIRCUIT - Power On
EFI CIRCUIT - Crank Position Sensor
4.21
FUEL INJECTION
EFI CIRCUIT - Fuel Pump
EFI CIRCUIT - Throttle Position Sensor
4.22
FUEL INJECTION
EFI CIRCUIT - Temperature - Barometric Air Pressure Sensor
EFI CIRCUIT - Engine Temperature
4.23
FUEL INJECTION
EFI CIRCUIT - Malfunction Indicator Light
4.24
BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
CHAPTER 5
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
DECAL REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
PLASTIC INSERT REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
BODY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
SIDE PANEL REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
FRONT COVER REMOVAL / INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
FOOT WELL REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
X2-TOURING FOOT WELL REMOVAL / INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
FRONT STORAGE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
FRONT STORAGE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
SPORTSMAN REAR RACK REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
FRONT CAB/FENDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
SPORTSMAN REAR CAB / FENDER REMOVAL / INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
5
X2 REAR QUARTER PANEL REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
SPORTSMAN REAR STORAGE REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
RADIATOR SCREEN REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
SPORTSMAN BODY ASSEMBLY EXPLODED VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12
X2- TOURING BODY ASSEMBLY EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13
TOURING BODY/RACK ASSEMBLY EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14
BODY / RACK EXPLODED VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15
TOURING BODY/SEAT ASSEMBLY EXPLODED VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.16
HEADLIGHT POD EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17
STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18
HANDLEBAR BLOCK INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18
STEERING / A-ARM EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.19
A-ARM REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.20
BALL JOINT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.21
STEERING POST REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22
STEERING POST ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22
SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22
FRONT STRUT CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22
STRUT ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.23
SPORTSMAN REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.24
X2- TOURING REAR SUSPENSION EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25
X2 TORSION BAR EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.26
X2 CARGO BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27
EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27
REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.28
X2 SEAT ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.30
EXPLODED VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.30
X2 SEAT OPERATION - CONFIGURING CARGO BOX FOR PASSENGER RIDING . 5.31
X2 DRIVER SEAT BACKREST REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.32
X2 PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.32
5.1
GENERAL INFORMATION Special Tools
Torque Specifications Table 5-2:
Table 5-1: PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
FT.LBS.
2870871 Ball Joint Replacement Tool
COMPONENT NM
(IN.LBS.) 2870872 Shock Spanner Wrench
Front Hub Nut 60 81 Shock Absorber Spring Compression
2870623
Front A-Arm Attaching Bolt 37 50 Tool
Front A-Arm Ball Joint Stud Nut 30 41 2871572 Strut Rod Wrench
Handlebar Adjuster Block 14 19 2871573 LH Strut Spring Compressor

Master Cylinder Clamp Bolt (45-55) 5.2-6.3 2871574 RH Strut Spring Compressor
Rear Wheel Hub Nut 80 108
Decal Replacement
Upper Stabilizer Support Nuts 17 27
Flame Treating Decal Area
Upper Control Arm Mounting Bolt 37 50
Plastic polyethylene material must be “flame treated" prior to
Lower Wheel Bearing Carrier Bolt 37 50 installing a decal to ensure good adhesion. The flame treating
procedure can often be used to reduce or eliminate the whitish
Strut Rod Retaining Nut (Top) 17 23 stress marks that are sometimes left after a fender or cab is bent,
flexed, or damaged.
Strut Casting Pinch Bolt 17 23
Tie Rod End Jam Nut 12 17
WARNING
Tie Rod End Castle Nut 43 58
Tie Rod End Attaching Bolt 24 33 The following procedure involves the use of an
open flame. Wear the appropriate safety equipment
Upper Rear Shock Bolt 37 50 at all times. Perform this procedure in a well
Lower Rear Shock Bolt 37 50 ventilated area, away from gasoline or other
flammable materials. Verify the area to be flame
NOTE: Refer to exploded views throughout this treated is clean and free of gasoline or flammable
chapter for identification and location of residue.
components.
1. Pass the flame of a propane torch back and forth quickly
over the area where the decal is to be applied until the
surface appears slightly glossy. This should occur after
just a few seconds of flame treating. Do not hold the torch
too close to the surface. Keep the torch moving to prevent
damage.
2. Apply the decal.
5.2
Plastic Insert Removal / Installation 3. To install the inserts, press outside insert (B) into the hole.
Press inside insert (A) until it snaps into place.
Some Polaris ATVs use a two piece plastic insert in place of a
metal screw. The plastic inserts are simple to remove and install. NOTE: The outside insert (B) should be flush
surface after installation.
1. Use a pair of diagonal side cutters to lift the plastic insert
(A) until you feel some slight pressure or lift the insert
approximately 1/4" (6.35 mm). Apply just enough
pressure on the side cutters to lift up on the insert. DO
NOT apply too much pressure on the side cutters, or
damage to the insert will occur.
The inside insert (A) should be flush with the top of the outside
insert (B). 5
A
2. Next, use the diagonal side cutters under outside insert (B)
to completely remove the assembly. NOTE: The inside B
insert (A) will still be installed in the outside insert (B).
NOTE: The inside insert (A) will still be installed in

the outside insert (B).
5.3
BODY 3. Reinstall the side panel by reversing the removal procedure.
Step 3
Side Panel Removal
Side panel removal is quick and easy, use the following
instructions for removal and installation.
1. Remove seat by releasing the latch (if equipped) and lifting
up on the seat. (X2 seats do not have a latch system.)
Step 1
Front Cover Removal / Installation

1. Open the front storage compartment
2. Pull up and outward on the front cover to remove the cover.
2. Grasp the rear of the side panel near the rear cab. With a
firm motion, pull the panel outward to disengage the side
panel from the grommet. Pull the panel downward and
rearward to remove it from the ATV.
Step 2
3. To install the front cover, insert the tabs of the front cover
into the inserts of the cab. Make sure the tabs are aligned
with the slots. Then press the rear tabs into the slots.
5.4
Foot Well Removal / Installation X2-Touring Foot Well Removal / Installation
1. Remove the four plastic inserts (A) that secure the wheel 1. Remove the four plastic inserts (A) that secure the wheel
well to the front and rear cabs. (See “PLASTIC INSERT well to the front and rear cabs. (See “PLASTIC INSERT
REMOVAL / INSTALLATION” for help). REMOVAL / INSTALLATION” for help).
2. Remove the four screws (B) from the bottom of the foot 2. Remove the six screws (B) from the bottom of the foot well.
well. Remove the footwell. Remove the footwell.
5
18 in.lbs. (
A A
A A
B
B
3. Reverse the removal procedures to install the foot well. Be 3. Reverse the removal procedures to install the foot well. Be
sure to properly align the cab ends into the foot wells upon sure to properly align the cab ends into the foot wells upon
reassembly. reassembly.
5.5
Front Storage Removal 2. Remove the four bolts that secure the storage rack to the
frame.
Front Storage
Remove Bolts
3. Remove the two (T25) screws that secure the storage box
to the front fender well areas (each side).
Remove Bolts
T-25 Screws
1. Remove the front radiator cap cover (A) by lifting upward

on the cover.
A
4. Remove the two (T25) screws that secure the outside of the
storage box to the front fenders (each side).
T-25 Screws
5.6
Winch Installation Area 6. Remove the front headlights (C) or simply disconnect the
electric connector (D) before removing the front plastic
5. Remove the front cover piece by lifting up on sides of the bumper.
two locking tabs as shown. Pull the tabs out of the notches
and lift up on the cover piece.
D
C
Pull Out to Remove

7. Remove the remaining bolts and screws that secure the
front bumper section to the frame.
5
To install the front cover place top lip of the cover into and lift
up to remove.
1. Place Lip In Groove

Groove
Lip
2. Press in Tabs
5.7
Front Storage Installation 8. Install the front radiator cap cover (E).
A Front Storage
B E
C inserts Sportsman Rear Rack Removal / Installation
C
B A B
A
A C
D
T-25 Screw A
A. 14 ft.lbs. (19 Nm) C. 10 in.lbs. (1.13 Nm) B
B. 10 in.lbs. (1.13 Nm) D. 24 in.lbs (2.7 Nm)
1. Place the front storage rack onto the frame.

2. Install the four bolts (A) into the inside of the compartment
hand tight.
3. Install the four screws and washers (B) (T-25) under the C
fender area (2 each side).
4. Install the four screws (C) (T-25) into the front fender area T-27 Screw
of the storage box (2 each side).
A. 36 in.lbs. (4 Nm) B. 18 in.lbs. ( 2 Nm)
5. Install the two screws (D) into the rear area of the cab (if
removed).
6. Install the two plastic inserts (E) into the front cab (if
removed). 1. Remove the six (A) T27 screws and two bolts (B) that
7. Torque all bolts and screws according to the illustration. secure the rear rack to the rear cab and frame.
2. Lift the rear rack from the ATV. Remove the two rack
spacers (C).
5.8
3. Place spacers on frame. 3. Remove the two screws (B) that secure the front cab to the
frame in the fuel tank mount area.
4. Install rear rack onto rear frame and cab.

5. Install the two bolts (B) and six (A) T-27 screws. Torque 4. Remove the side panels (D), refer to the “SIDE PANEL
the bolts (A) to 18 in.lbs. (2 Nm) and six T-27 screws to 36 REMOVAL” section.
in.lbs. (4 Nm). Refer to the illustration for torque values. 5. Remove the plastic inserts (E) that secure the front of the
Front Cab/Fender Removal/Installation

foot wells to the front cab.
5
1. Follow the “FRONT RACK / BUMPER REMOVAL”
section to begin removal of the front cab, rack, and D
bumper.
2. Remove the plastic inserts (A) that secure the front cab to
the upper strut support.
6. Remove the fuel cap and place a clean lint free shop towel
into the tank neck to keep any debris from falling into the
tank.
A 7. The front cab should now slide back over the fuel tank and
fuel tank neck.
NOTE: When removing the front cab use caution so
the plastic cab does not scratch or get caught on
other components.
8. Reverse the removal steps for installation. Torque two

front cab to frame screws to specification.
=T
Cab to Frame Screws
24 in.lbs. (2.7 Nm)
5.9
Sportsman Rear Cab / Fender Removal / X2 Rear Quarter Panel Removal / Installation
Installation
1. Remove the seat.
1. Follow the “REAR RACK REMOVAL” procedure to 2. Remove the plastic inserts (circled) that secure the quarter
remove the rear rack. panel to the rear footwell. (See “PLASTIC INSERT
2. Remove the plastic inserts that secure the rear cab to the REMOVAL / INSTALLATION” for information).
frame and plastic.
3. Reverse the removal procedures to install the quarter

panels. Verify panels are properly aligned to the footwell
end upon reassembly.
Remove plastic dart inserts.
3. Disconnect the rear lights by pulling the locks on each side

and removing the connectors. Lift the rear cab from the
frame.
Remove Connectors
Lock
4. Reverse the removal steps for installation.
5.10
Sportsman Rear Storage Removal / Radiator Screen Removal
Installation
1. Pull out slightly on the top of the radiator screen.
1. Follow the “REAR RACK REMOVAL” and “REAR 2. With the top free, pull out on the bottom of the screen to
CAB REMOVAL” procedure to remove the rear storage remove the screen.
compartment. After the rear cab is removed the storage 3. To install the screen, simply press the tabs on the screen
compartment comes out. back into the mounting grommets. Be sure the screen is
2. Remove the two plastic inserts that hold the rear storage securely in place.
compartment in place.
3. For installation, reverse the removal steps.
5.11
Sportsman Body Assembly Exploded View
Rear Cab Assembly Pull UP on rear of seat and
back to disengage tabs at front
of seat.
Seat Latch
Rear Cab Wheelwell
Storage
Frame
Front Cab Assembly

Side Cover
Frame
Front Cover
Front Brush Guard
Support
Front Cab
Splash Shields
5.12
X2- Touring Body Assembly Exploded View
Rear Cab Assembly
Footwell
RH Rear Cab
Footwell Support Frame 5
Front Cab Assembly

Side Cover
Frame
Front Cover
Front Brush Guard
Support
Front Cab
Splash Shields
5.13
Touring Body/Rack Assembly Exploded View
Hand Rails
Rear Rack
Rear Rack Support
Footwell and Auxiliary

Foot Rests
5.14
Body / Rack Exploded Views
Rack Rails
Sportsman Only
Rear Rack
Rear Rack Support
Rack Rails
Frame
5
Box Assembly
Cover
Front Brush Guard
Panel
Radiator Shield Grill

Radiator Screen
Front Bumper
5.15
Touring Body/Seat Assembly Exploded View
Upper Seat
Upper Support Lower Seat
Rear Seat Support
Latch Assembly
Base and Pin Latch
5.16
Headlight Pod Exploded View
Worklight Switch
A
Instrument
Cluster F
A
ETC
Brake
Clean knurling when

repositioning handlebars
G
5
D
C
E
Wheel Speed Sensor - Sportsman
C (X2 Speed Sensor Located on Transmission)
Disassembly Assembly
• Remove two side Phillips screws (A) • Install bottom of pod onto handlebar and secure to
brackets
• Remove one rear Phillips screw (B)
• Install key switch, choke cable, and headlight
• Lift top half of pod
• Connect 12Vdc power outlet (where applicable)
• Disconnect instrument cluster wire connectors
• Connect headlight
• Disconnect work light switch connector
• Connect instrument cluster connectors to instrument
• Disconnect 12Vdc power plug (G) cluster
• Disconnect headlight harness • Install top of pod onto bottom half, making sure
interlocking tabs mate properly
• Remove ignition switch (C) and choke cable (D)
• Install two side Phillips screws
• Remove headlight (F) with adjuster
• Install one rear Phillips screw
• Remove two screws securing bottom half of pod (E)
• To adjust headlight, refer to procedure outlined in
Chapter 2
5.17
STEERING
Handlebar Block Installation Procedure
Clean knurling when

repositioning handlebars
B
1. The pin (A) on the bottom side of the top handlebar block faces down and to the front of the ATV.
2. The bottom handle bar block has a side with 3 holes, the side with 3 holes faces up and to the front of the ATV.
3. Align the pin (A) in the top block with the middle hole (B) in the bottom block for proper installation. The pin (A) and middle
hole (B) should face the front of the ATV.
4. Install the pin side bolts first and evenly tighten the bolts down. Evenly torque the 2 front bolts to specification.
=T
Handle Bar Bolt Torque
14 ft.lbs.(19 Nm)
5. Install the rear bolts and tighten evenly. Evenly torque the 2 rear bolts to specification.
NOTE: There will be a slight gap on the backside of the blocks after the procedure is performed.
5.18
Steering / A-arm Exploded View
1 37 ft.lbs. (50 Nm)
Steering Post
24 ft.lbs.
(33 Nm)
1 37 ft.lbs. (50 Nm)
3 Steering Post Arm
8 ft.lbs. (11 Nm)

B 5
A
30 ft.lbs. (41 Nm)
43 ft.lbs. (58 Nm) 12-14 ft.lbs. (17-19 Nm)
1 Always use new bolts

upon reassembly.
2 Always use new cotter pins upon
reassembly. Install with open end 3 Apply Loctite™ 242 to bolt threads.
toward rear of machine.
NOTE: To avoid damage to tie rods and other steering components, be sure to install tie rod end bolts in the
proper direction. The steering post arm bolt (B) points up; the rod end bolts (A) point down. Verify inner rod
ends are placed between the steering post arms.
5.19
A-Arm Replacement
Vehicle Frame Bolt - 37 ft.lbs. (50 Nm)

Apply Loctite™ 242
to the bolt threads.
Bushing Ball Joint Stud
A-Arm Tube 8 ft.lbs. (11 Nm)

37 ft.lbs. (50 Nm)
A-arm Shaft
30 ft.lbs. (41 Nm)

Cotter Pin - (Install New)
1. Elevate and safely support vehicle with weight removed from front wheel(s).
2. Remove cotter pin from ball joint stud at wheel end of A-arm and loosen nut until it is flush with end of stud.
3. Using a soft face hammer, tap nut to loosen A-arm from bolt. Remove nut and A-arm from hub strut assembly.
4. Loosen two bolts on A-arm tube by alternating each about 1/3 of the way until A-arm can be removed.
5. Examine A-arm shaft. Replace if worn. Discard hardware.
6. Insert A-arm shaft into new A-arm.
7. Install CV joint shields.
8. Install new A-arm assembly onto vehicle frame. Torque new bolts to specification.
=T
A-Arm to Frame Bolt Torque: 37 ft. lbs. (50 Nm)
WARNING
The locking features on the existing bolts were

destroyed during removal. DO NOT reuse old
bolts. Serious injury or death could result if
fasteners come loose during operation.
9. Attach A-arm to hub strut assembly. Tighten ball joint nut to specification. If cotter pin holes are not aligned, tighten nut
slightly to align. Install a new cotter pin with open ends toward rear of machine. Bend both ends in opposite directions around nut
=T
A-Arm to Strut Bolt Torque: 30 ft. lbs. (41 Nm)
WARNING
Upon A-arm installation completion, test vehicle at

low speeds before putting into regular service.
5.20
Ball Joint Replacement 8. Install puller guide (G) with extension cap (H).
9. Apply grease to extension cap and threads of puller bolt to
NOTE: Refer to the illustration on the previous page
ease removal.
for this procedure.
10. Thread bolt (J) with nut (I) onto ball joint stud as shown.
1. Loosen front wheel nuts slightly. 11. Apply heat to ease removal.
2. Elevate and safely support machine under footrest/frame 12. Hold bolt (J) and turn nut (I) clockwise until ball joint is
area. removed from strut housing.
CAUTION
K
Serious injury may result if machine tips or falls. Be
sure machine is secure before beginning this
service procedure.
3. Remove wheel nuts and wheels.
F 5
L
E 13. To install a new ball joint, Remove extension cap and
B attach puller guide using short bolts provided in the kit.
14. Remove extension cap and attach puller guide using short
A bolts provided in the kit.
D 15. Insert new ball joint (K) into driver (L).
4. Remove cotter pin (A) from ball joint castle nut (B). 16. Slide ball joint/driver assembly into guide.
5. Remove castle nut (B) and separate A-arm (C) from ball 17. Apply heat to ease installation.
joint stud. 18. Drive new joint into strut housing until fully seated.
6. Remove screws (D) and ball joint retaining plate (E). 19. Apply Loctite™ 242 (PN 2871949) to threads of retaining
7. Use the Ball Joint Replacement Tool (PN 2870871), plate screws or install new screws with pre-applied locking
remove ball joint (F) from strut housing. Refer to photos. agent. Torque screws to specification.
=T
G
H Retaining Screw Torque: 8 ft. lbs. (11 Nm)
20. Install A-arm on ball joint and torque castle nut to

I
specification.
J
=T
Castle Nut Torque: 30 ft. lbs. (41 Nm)
21. Reinstall cotter pin with open ends toward rear of machine.
5.21
Steering Post Removal SUSPENSION
1. Remove the front cab.
Front Strut Cartridge Replacement
2. Remove the handle bar pod.
3. Remove the handle bar. NOTE: Refer to illustration on following page.
4. Remove the fuel tank bracket assembly.
1. Hold strut rod and remove top nut.
5. Remove the steering tie rod ends from the steering bracket.
2. Remove upper strut pivot assembly.
Note the orientation of the fasteners and bracket on the
steering assembly.
6. Remove the steering post nut (A) at the mount plate.
Strut Rod Wrench:
(PN 2871572)
7. Remove the top steering bracket. Strut Spring Compressor Tools:
8. Remove the steering post. (PN 2871573) and (PN 2871574)
Steering Post Assembly 3. Compress spring using any commercially available spring
compressor tool and remove the spacer nut.
4. Remove coil spring and collapse strut cartridge.
5. Remove two pinch bolts from strut casting.
6. Remove strut cartridge.
7. Install cartridge until bottomed in strut casting.
8. Install pinch bolts with wire clamp(s). Torque pinch bolts
to specification.
17 ft.lbs. (23 Nm)
=T
Pinch Bolt Torque:
17 ft. lbs. (23 Nm)
9. Reassemble spring and top pivot assembly. Be sure all

parts are installed properly and seated fully.
10. Torque strut rod nut to specification. Do not over torque
the nut.
NOTE: Steering post bearing is shown in exploded =T

view form. This bearing is attached to the post using
a radial riveting method and is a non-serviceable item.
Steering post replacement is required in the event of a Strut Rod Nut Torque:
bearing failure.
15 ft. lbs. (21 Nm)
1. Hand tighten steering post slotted nut (A).

2. Align the cotter pin hole on the steering post slotted nut (A).
3. Install the cotter pin (B). Bend both ends of the cotter pin
around the slotted nut (A) in opposite directions.
4. Check the steering, the handle bars must move freely and
easily from full left to full right without binding.
5.22
Strut Assembly
Nut - 15 ft.lbs. (21 Nm)
Strut Bumper
Spacer Rubber
Washer
Strut
Upper Pivot Ball
Spacer Nut
Clamp
Lower Pivot Ball Washer
17 ft.lbs. (23 Nm)
5
Spring Retainer
17 ft.lbs. (23 Nm)
Bolts
Spring
Brake Caliper
Hubstrut Bearing
Retaining Ring
5.23
Sportsman Rear Suspension Assembly
17 ft.lbs. (24 Nm)
Stabilizer Bar
1
37 ft.lbs. (50 Nm)
37 ft.lbs.
(50 Nm)
37 ft.lbs. (50 Nm)
37 ft.lbs. (50 Nm)
Upper Control Arm Bushings
37 ft.lbs.
(50 Nm) Rear Shock
Lower Control Arm
37 ft.lbs. (50 Nm)
Orientate Bushings Rear Front

1 Correctly
Bushing Orientation
5.24
X2- Touring Rear Suspension Exploded View
Rear Compression Spring
Preload Adjustment Cam
Rear Shock
Bushings
5
Control Arm Pivot Bracket
Upper Control Arm
Boot Shield (if equipped)

A-Arm Shaft
Lower Control Arm

Wheel Bearing Carrier
Grease Zerk
5.25
X2 Torsion Bar Exploded View
Linkage Bushing Stabilizer Bar
Stabilizer Bushing
Bushing
Torsion Mount
Linkage Assy.
5.26
X2 CARGO BOX
Exploded View
5.27
Removal / Installation 3. Disconnect the two wire harnesses connected to each of
the taillights.
IMPORTANT: Before attempting to remove the cargo
box, be sure that the cargo box is not set up for 2-UP
riding. The passenger backrest should be face down
in the cargo box and the driver seat backrest should
be locked into position.
1. Open the tailgate and remove the 2 torx head screws (A)
securing the rear taillights on each side of the cargo box as
illustrated below.
CAUTION
Use caution when disconnecting the smaller light

bulb. Follow the procedure below to keep from
damaging the connector. Damaging a connector
may require wire harness replacement.
2. Remove the taillight assembly from the cargo box. 4. Carefully pull out the red locking tab on the connector.
5. Once the red tab is pulled out, press in on the black tab and
pull out to disconnect harness.
Black Tab
Red Tab
5.28
6. Lift up firmly in the cargo box release lever on either side 9. Carefully remove the cargo box from the ATV.
of the ATV.
10. Reverse the removal steps to reinstall the cargo box. Refer
to the standard fastener torque values in Chapter 1 during
7. Remove the four bolts attaching the rear of the cargo box assembly.
to the frame. There are two on each side.
See “Standard Torque Specifications” on page 1.10.

8. Support the cargo box and remove the clip and pin holding
the gas shock to the cargo box.
Clip Pin
5.29
X2 SEAT ASSEMBLY
Exploded Views
5.30
X2 Seat Operation - Configuring Cargo Box 4. Fold the driver seat backrest down into place to serve as the
For Passenger Riding passenger seat bottom.
Passenger Backrest
1. Unlatch the driver seat backrest by turning the engagement
knobs on each side in the directions shown below.
A
B
Driver Seat Backrest / Passenger Seat Bottom

5. Lift the latch on the passenger backrest to set the proper
2. While pulling the backrest towards the front of the ATV, backrest height desired by the passenger.
lift up on the passenger backrest loop that is face down in
the cargo box.
5
Driver Seat Backrest
Passenger Backrest
3. Lift the passenger backrest up and into place, then lay the
driver seat backrest down into place
A
B
5.31
X2 Driver Seat Backrest Removal / X2 Passenger Seat Backrest Removal /
Installation Installation
1. Configure the seating for 2-UP riding. With the passenger 1. Configure the seating for 2-UP riding. Lift up on the latch
seat bottom in place, remove the two screws retaining the for the passenger backrest and lift the backrest to the full
seat bottom. up position.
2. Lift up on the latch for the passenger seat bottom and lock
it in the upright position as shown below.
2. Remove the two pivot pins holding the seat bottom to the
frame and then lift up on the seat bottom to remove.
5.32
3. Remove the two screws retaining the passenger backrest.
4. Remove the two pivot pins holding the backrest to the

frame.
5. Lift up on the backrest latch and tilt the backrest in towards

the cargo box and lift up to remove it.
5.33
NOTES
5.34
CLUTCH SYSTEM
CHAPTER 6
CLUTCH SYSTEM
SPECIAL TOOLS AND SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
COMPONENT FASTENER TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
PVT EXPLODED VIEWS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
PVT SEALING AND DUCTING COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
DRIVE CLUTCH EXPLODED VIEWS (EBS VS. NON-EBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
DRIVEN CLUTCH EXPLODED VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
ENGINE BRAKING SYSTEM (EBS) EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
PVT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6
PVT OPERATION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6
DRIVE CLUTCH OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6
DRIVEN CLUTCH OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6
EBS CLUTCH OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7
PVT MAINTENANCE / INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7
DRIVE CLUTCH SPRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8
OPTIONAL SHIFT WEIGHTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9
PVT DRYING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10
PVT DISASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10
PVT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11
DRIVE BELT REMOVAL / INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12
DRIVE BELT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13
CLUTCH ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14
CLUTCH OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14
EBS DRIVE CLUTCH SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15
6
DRIVE CLUTCH DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15
SPIDER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15
BUTTON TO TOWER CLEARANCE INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17
SHIFT WEIGHT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17
DRIVE CLUTCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17
MOVEABLE SHEAVE BUSHING INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18
DRIVE CLUTCH BUSHING SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18
ONE-WAY CLUTCH INSPECTION (DRIVE CLUTCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20
DRIVE CLUTCH REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20
EBS DRIVEN CLUTCH SERVICE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22
DRIVEN CLUTCH DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22
DRIVEN CLUTCH BUSHING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.24
EBS DRIVEN CLUTCH REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.25
PVT TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.29
OVERHEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.29
PROBLEM, CAUSE AND REMEDY CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.30
6.1
CLUTCH SYSTEM
SPECIAL TOOLS AND Component Fastener Torques
SPECIFICATIONS
FT.LBS.
Special Tools COMPONENT NM
(IN.LBS.)
Drive Clutch Retaining Bolt 40 54

TOOL DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER
Driven Clutch Retaining
17 23
Clutch Puller 2870506 Bolt
Clutch Holding Wrench 9314177 PVT Inner Cover Bolts 12 16
Clutch Holding Fixture 2871358 Drive Clutch Spider EBS

200 271
Clutch
Drive Clutch Spider Removal
2870341 Drive Clutch Cover Plate (90) 10
& Install Tool
Driven Clutch Puller 2870913
Roller Pin Tool 2870910
Clutch Bushing Replacement

2871226
Tool Kit
Piston Pin Puller 2870386
EBS Clutch Alignment Tool 2872292
EBS Bushing Replacement Kit 2201379
Clutch Compression Tool 8700220
Clutch Bushing Replacement

2871025
Tool Kit
Clutch Compression Tool

PS-45909
Extensions
6.2
CLUTCH SYSTEM
PVT EXPLODED VIEWS
PVT Sealing And Ducting Components
Clutch Inlet Duct
Transmission Cover Seal

Inner Clutch Cover
Clamps
Boot Duct
Clutch Cover Seal
Inner Seal Cover
Seal Retainer Bracket

Clutch Cover
6
Drive Clutch Exploded Views (EBS vs. Non-EBS)
EBS
One Way Clutch
NON-EBS
6.3
CLUTCH SYSTEM
Driven Clutch Exploded Views
1. Torx Screw
2. Cam Assembly
3. Retaining Ring
4. E-clip
5. Washer
6. Roller
7. Outer Spider
8. Spring
9. Shaft
10. Thrust Washer 11. Moveable Sheave
12. Roller Pin
13. Spring Pin
14. Stationary Sheave
15. Bearing
16. Retaining Ring
17. Retaining Ring
18. Inner Spider Plate
19. Spider Dampener
20. Clutch Roller
6.4
CLUTCH SYSTEM
Engine Braking System (EBS) Exploded View
One Way Clutch Drive

Washer
Washer Drive Belt
Shift Weights Cam Assembly

Roller/Bushing Retaining Ring
Assembly - Torque
200 ft.lbs.
Spacer
Clutch Rollers
Spider Assembly
Spider Lock Nut
Compression Spring
Bushing Cover
6
Clutch Shaft
Coil Spring
Spacer Washer
Bearing
Sheaves
Retaining Rings
6.5
CLUTCH SYSTEM
PVT SYSTEM Driven Clutch Operation
Driven clutches primarily sense torque, opening and closing
PVT Operation Overview according to the forces applied to it from the drive belt and the
transmission input shaft. If the torque resistance at the
transmission input shaft is greater than the load from the drive
WARNING belt, the drive belt is kept at the outer diameter of the driven
clutch sheaves.
All PVT maintenance or repairs should be
performed only by a certified Polaris Master Service As engine RPM and horsepower increase, the load from the
Dealer (MSD) technician who has received the drive belt increases, resulting in the belt rotating up toward the
proper training and understands the procedures outer diameter of the drive clutch sheaves and downward into
outlined in this manual. Because of the critical the sheaves of the driven clutch. This action, which increases
the driven clutch speed, is called upshifting.
nature and precision balance incorporated into the
PVT components, it is absolutely essential that no Should the throttle setting remain the same and the vehicle is
disassembly or repair be made without factory subjected to a heavier load, the drive belt rotates back up toward
authorized special tools and service procedures. the outer diameter of the driven clutch and downward into the
sheaves of the drive clutch. This action, which decreases the
The Polaris Variable Transmission (PVT) consists of three driven clutch speed, is called backshifting.
major assemblies: 1) The Drive Clutch; 2) The Driven Clutch;
and 3) The Drive Belt. The internal components of the drive In situations where loads vary (such as uphill and downhill) and
clutch and driven clutch control engagement (initial vehicle throttle settings are constant, the drive and driven clutches are
movement), clutch upshift and backshift. During the continually shifting to maintain optimum engine RPM. At full
development of a Polaris ATV, the PVT system is matched first throttle a perfectly matched PVT system should hold engine
to the engine power curve; then to average riding conditions and RPM at the peak of the power curve. This RPM should be
the vehicle's intended usage. Therefore, modifications or maintained during clutch upshift and backshift. In this respect,
variations of components at random are never recommended. the PVT system is similar to a power governor. Rather than vary
Proper clutch setup and careful inspection of existing throttle position, as a conventional governor does, the PVT
components must be the primary objective when system changes engine load requirements by either upshifting or
troubleshooting and tuning. backshifting.
Drive Clutch Operation

Drive clutches primarily sense engine RPM. The two major
components which control its shifting function are the shift
weights and the coil spring. Whenever engine RPM is
increased, centrifugal force is created, causing the shift weights
to push against rollers on the moveable sheave, which is held
open by coil spring preload. When this force becomes higher
than the preload in the spring, the outer sheave moves inward
and contacts the drive belt. This motion pinches the drive belt
between the spinning sheaves and causes it to rotate, which in
turn rotates the driven clutch.
At lower RPM, the drive belt rotates low in the drive clutch
sheaves. As engine RPM increases, centrifugal force causes the
drive belt to be forced upward on drive clutch sheaves.
6.6
CLUTCH SYSTEM
EBS Clutch Operation PVT Maintenance / Inspection
This EBS driven clutch provides the same engine braking Under normal operation the PVT system will provide years of
abilities as the EBS drive clutch. trouble free operation. Periodic inspection and maintenance is
required to keep the system operating at peak performance. The
following list of items should be inspected and maintained to
One-Way Clutch ensure maximum performance and service life of PVT
components. Refer to the troubleshooting checklist at the end of
this chapter for more information.
1. Drive to Driven Clutch Offset, Belt Width.
See “Clutch Alignment” on page 6.14.

Drive Clutch
Assembly 2. Drive and Driven Clutch Rollers and Bushings, Drive
Clutch Shift Weights and Pins, Drive Clutch Spider Rollers
and Roller Pins, Drive and Driven Clutch Springs.
Driven
See “Drive Clutch Inspection” on page 6.17.
Downhill Belt
Rotation 3. Sheave Faces. Clean and inspect for wear.
4. PVT System Sealing. Refer to appropriate illustrations and
photos. The PVT system is air cooled by fins on the drive
clutch stationary sheave. The fins create a low pressure
area in the crankcase casting, drawing air into the system
through an intake duct. The opening for this intake duct is
located at a high point on the vehicle (location varies by
model). The intake duct draws fresh air through a vented
Drive cover. All connecting air ducts, as well as the inner and
outer covers, must be properly sealed to ensure clean air is
being used for cooling the PVT system. This also will
6
prevent water and other contaminants from entering the
When the ATV is moving the drivetrain turns in the direction of PVT area. A sealed PVT is especially critical on units
engine rotation as the clutches, belt, and one-way clutches at the subjected to frequent water forging.
same speed. When the drivetrain rotational speed exceeds the
one-way clutch rotation (see exploded view of drive clutch) , the
one-way clutch locks to the clutch shaft and engine braking
occurs. Essentially, the driven clutch has become the driving
clutch. The spider assembly with the two rollers, fixed to the
transmission shaft, rotates in the pockets of the sheave, allowing
the stationary sheave to rotate with the moveable sheave as the
rollers move to the other side of the ramp, providing instant
EBS. Engine braking (EBS) continues until the drive clutch
speed exceeds the one-way clutch speed, or until the throttle is
applied and the engine reaches clutch engagement speed.
CAUTION
Driven clutches must be disassembled from the

helix end to reduce spring pressure. Review all
information below before proceeding.
6.7
CLUTCH SYSTEM
Drive Clutch Spring Measuring Spring Length: With the spring resting on a flat
surface, measure its free length from the outer coil surfaces as
shown. Refer to the spring specification chart for specific free
length measurements and tolerances. Also check to see that
spring coils are parallel to one another. Distortion of the spring
indicates stress fatigue, requiring replacement.
Table 6-1: Primary Clutch Springs

COLOR FREE LENGTH
PART # WIRE DIA.
CODE ± .125”
7041021 Plain .157” 4.38”

The drive clutch spring has two primary functions:
7041022 Black .140” 4.25”
1. Controls clutch engagement RPM. The springs which
7041063 Purple .168” 4.37”
have a higher rate when the clutch is in neutral will
increase clutch engagement RPM. 7041132 White .177” 2.92”
2. Controls the rate at which the drive belt moves upward
7041168 Green .177” 3.05”
in the drive clutch sheaves. This is referred to as drive
clutch upshift. 7041157 Blue/Green .177” 2.53”
The drive clutch spring is one of the most critical components

of the PVT system. It is also one of the easiest to service. Due Table 6-2: Secondary Clutch Springs
to the severe stress the coil spring is subject to during operation,
it should always be inspected for tolerance limits during any PART # DESCRIPTION
clutch diagnosis or repair.
3234199 White
There are other components which control upshift, but the
spring is one of the primary components in insuring optimum
performance. It is very important that the spring is of correct
design and is in good condition.
CAUTION
Never shim a drive clutch spring to increase its

compression rate. This may result in complete stacking
of the coils and subsequent clutch component failure.
6.8
CLUTCH SYSTEM
Optional Shift Weights
Shown below are optional shift weights which can be used in a PVT system. These shift weights have many different factors designed
into them for controlling engagement RPM and shifting patterns. Shift weights should not be changed or altered without first having
a thorough understanding the effects they have on belt to sheave clearance, clutch balance, engagement and shifting characteristics.
- NLA - - NLA -
698
6.9
CLUTCH SYSTEM
PVT Drying PVT Disassembly
IMPORTANT: If operating the ATV through water, be NOTE: Some fasteners and procedures will vary.
sure to check the PVT cover and other ATV Refer to the appropriate parts manual for proper
components for water ingestion. The ATV should be
checked immediately. Refer to Owner's Manual for fasteners and fastener placement.
Safe Riding Tips.
1. Remove seat.
2. Remove or loosen cab and footwell fasteners as necessary
PVT Drain Plug to gain access to PVT outer cover.
3. Remove PVT air outlet duct hose.
4. Remove outer PVT cover screws.
5. Mark the drive belt direction of rotation and remove drive
belt. See the “DRIVE BELT REMOVAL” procedure later
in this chapter.
6. Remove drive clutch retaining bolt and remove drive clutch
using puller.
To drain any water that may be trapped inside the PVT cover,
simply remove the PVT drain plug and O-ring located on the
bottom of the PVT cover and let the water drain out. The PVT
drain plug is shown below.
To further expel water in the PVT cover and to dry out the PVT
system, shift the transmission to neutral and rev engine slightly
to expel the moisture. This will also air-dry the belt and clutches.
Allow engine RPM to settle to idle speed, shift transmission to
lowest available range and test for belt slippage. Repeat as
needed. Operate ATV in lowest available range for a short Drive Clutch Puller: (PN 2870506)
period of time until PVT system is dry.
Clutch Holding Wrench: (PN 9314177)
7. Remove driven clutch retaining bolt and driven clutch. Use

puller if necessary.
PVT Drain Plug & O-Ring
Driven Clutch Puller: (PN 2870913)
6.10
CLUTCH SYSTEM
8. Remove driven clutch offset spacers from the transmission PVT Installation
input shaft. NOTE: Remember to keep spacers in order for
proper clutch offset on reassembly. 1. Inspect PVT inner cover-to-engine seal. Replace if
cracked or damaged. Align the alignment mark on the
cover with the mark on the engine seal.
Offset Spacer
Seal This Edge To Cover On Engine
9. Remove cover screws and retainer plate.

2. Place a new seal on transmission input shaft.
Inner Cover 3. Apply RTV silicone sealant to outside edge of inner cover-
to-engine seal, to ensure a water tight fit between the seal
Retainer Seal and the cover on engine side. Surfaces must be clean to
ensure adhesion of silicone sealant.
4. Reinstall cover and tighten rear cover bolts just enough to
hold it in place. 6
5. Fit lip of inner cover seal (A) to engine. Install seal retainer
plate and tighten screws securely.
6. Torque rear inner cover bolts (B) to specification.
Foam Seal
B
10. Remove inner cover retaining bolts at rear of cover. C
11. Remove cover along with foam seal on back of cover or
shaft. A
Seal Outer Edge To Cover

w/ RTV silicone sealant
=T
Inner Cover Bolt Torque (B):
12 ft. lbs. (16.6 Nm)
6.11
CLUTCH SYSTEM
7. Install clutch offset spacer(s) on transmission input shaft. Drive Belt Removal / Inspection
1. Remove outer PVT cover as described in PVT
Offset Spacer Disassembly.
2. Mark drive belt direction of rotation so that it can be
installed in the same direction. The belt is normally
positioned so part numbers are easily read.
3. To remove drive belt, place transmission in gear, apply
brake, pull upward on belt while turning the back
(moveable) driven sheave clockwise to open driven clutch
sheaves and pull the belt down into the driven. Pull out and
down on belt to slip over the drive clutch outer sheave.
8. Clean splines inside driven clutch and on the transmission

input shaft.
9. Apply a light film of grease to the splines on the shaft.
10. Install the driven clutch, washer, lock washer, and retaining
bolt. Torque to specification.
=T
Driven Clutch Retaining Bolt Torque:
17 ft. lbs. (23.5 Nm) 4. Measure belt width and replace if worn. Generally, belts
should be replaced if clutches can no longer be adjusted to
11. Clean end of taper on crankshaft and the taper bore inside provide proper belt deflection.
drive clutch.
NOTE: If the top edges are trimmed on some drive
12. Install drive clutch and torque retaining bolt to belts, it will be necessary to project the side profiles
specification. in order to measure from corner-to-corner.
=T 5. Place a straight edge on each side of the drive belt. Place

another straight edge on top of belt.
Drive Clutch Retaining Bolt Torque: 6. Measure the distance where the side straight edges intersect
40 ft. lbs. (55 Nm) the top, as shown in the illustration.
13. Reinstall drive belt noting direction of rotation. If a new

belt is installed, install so numbers can be easily read. Projected Belt Width
14. Only replace PVT outer cover rubber gasket if it is
damaged. Place the gasket with the narrow side out (C).
Towards Outside Cover
PVT Cover Gasket

Belt Width:
15. Reinstall PVT outer cover and secure with screws. Torque
Wear Limit 1.125" (2.86 cm)
to specification.
16. Reinstall cab/footwell assembly, panel and seat.
6.12
CLUTCH SYSTEM
7. Inspect belt for loose cords, missing cogs, cracks, DRIVE BELT INSTALLATION
abrasions, thin spots, or excessive wear. Replace if
necessary. NOTE: Be sure to position belt so part number is easily
read. Verify new belt is seated properly in the clutches
8. Inspect belt for hour glassing (extreme circular wear in at
before operating the ATV.
least one spot and on both sides of the belt). Hour glassing
occurs when the drive train does not move and the drive 1. Place transmission in gear and lock the parking brake.
clutch engages the belt continuously in one spot. Loop belt over drive clutch and over top of driven sheaves.
9. Measure belt length with a tape measure around the outer 2. While pushing down on top of belt, turn the back or
circumference of the belt. Belts which measure longer than moveable driven sheave clockwise to open the sheaves.
nominal length may require driven shimming or engine
adjustment for a longer center distance to obtain proper belt
deflection. Belts which measure shorter than nominal
length may require driven shimming or a shorter center
distance. Remember, proper belt deflection is the desired
goal - not a specific center distance.
10. Replace belt if worn past the service limit. Belts with thin
spots, burn marks, etc., should be replaced to eliminate
noise, vibration, or erratic PVT operation. See
Troubleshooting Chart at the end of this chapter for
possible causes.
3. The belt then should be able to be pushed down into and 6

between the sheaves. Continue until belt is looped
completely around both clutches.
Center 4. Install clutch cover temporarily. Verify engine is in PARK.
Distance
Start engine and raise engine RPM enough to engage the
clutch, rotating the belt and seating it in the clutches.
Clutch Center Distance: Remove clutch cover and verify belt is seated properly
10.05 ± .05" (254 ± 2.51mm) before final cover installation.
6.13
CLUTCH SYSTEM
Clutch Alignment 7. Measure belt deflection and measure offset both above and
below shaft centerlines. Adjust if necessary.
1. Remove belt and install the Clutch Offset Alignment Tool
as shown. Center Line
B
Offset Alignment
Tool
Measure Above and Below Centerline

A 1/8” + 0 / -1/16
(3.2mm + 0 / - 1.6)
NOTE: On some models, minor adjustments can be
made by adding shims between the frame and front
lower left engine mount to increase the distance at
point “A”. If a shim is present, it can be removed to
decrease the distance at point “A”.
Shim Kit (PN 2200126)
Clutch Offset
2. With tool touching rear of driven clutch inner sheave, the
IMPORTANT: Inspect clutch alignment and center
distance at point “A” should be 1/8”. distance before adjusting offset.
NOTE: If the distance is greater than 1/8, or less
than 1/16,, clutch alignment must be adjusted as Offset is correct when rear of tool contacts rear of inner sheave
with driven clutch pushed completely inward, spacers installed
follows: (if required) on shaft and bolt torqued to specification.
3. Remove drive and driven clutch. See “PVT
DIASSEMBLY” at the beginning of the chapter. Spacer Washer (PN 7556401)
4. Remove PVT inner cover.
5. Loosen all engine mounts. Move front of engine to the right 1. Install alignment tool as shown. Remember to measure
or left slightly until alignment is correct. above and below the shaft centerlines.
6. Tighten engine mounts and verify alignment is correct. 2. Adjust offset by adding or removing spacer washers
between back of driven clutch and spacer.
6.14
CLUTCH SYSTEM
EBS DRIVE CLUTCH SERVICE 5. Remove and inspect spring. See “Drive Clutch Spring
Specifications” for spring inspection.
Drive Clutch Disassembly
Inspect Shaft
1. Using a permanent marker, mark the cover, spider, and
moveable and stationary sheaves for reference, as the cast-
in X's may not have been in alignment before disassembly.
6. Remove the limiter spacer before spider removal.
Spider Removal
1. Install clutch in holding fixture and loosen the spider
(counterclockwise) using Clutch Spider Install Tool (PN
2. Remove cover bolts evenly in a cross pattern and remove 2870341).
cover plate.
3. Inspect cover bushing (A). The outer cover bushing is
manufactured with a Teflon™ coating. Wear is determined
6
by the amount of Teflon™ remaining on the bushing.
Clutch Holding Fixture: (PN 2871358)
Cover Bushing Inspection:

Replace the cover bushing if more
brass than Teflon™ is visible on
the bushing. Refer to bushing
replacement in this chapter.
4. Inspect area on shaft where bushing rides for wear, galling,

nicks, or scratches. Replace clutch assembly if worn or
damaged.
6.15
CLUTCH SYSTEM
NOTE: It is important that the same number and 3. Inspect all rollers, bushings and roller pins by pulling a flat
thickness of washers are reinstalled beneath the metal rod across the roller. Turn roller with your finger. If
spider during assembly. Be sure to note the number you notice resistance, galling, or flat spots, replace rollers,
and thickness of these washers. pins and thrust washers in sets of three. Also inspect to see
if roller and bushing are separating. Bushing must fit
To maintain proper clutch balance and belt-to-sheave
clearance, be sure to reinstall original quantity and tightly in roller. Use the Roller Pin Tool (PN 2870910) to
thickness washers replace rollers and pins. Take care not to damage roller
bushing or bearing surface of the new pin during
installation.
2. Inspect the Teflon™ coating on the moveable sheave

bushing.
4. Rubber-backed buttons can and should be used in all ATV

clutches if the hollow roller pin is changed to a solid roller
pin.
NOTE: Rubber side of the button is positioned
toward the solid roller pin. It is recommended to
switch all buttons to the rubber version during
service (if needed).
Moveable Sheave Bushing Inspection:

Replace the cover bushing if more
brass than Teflon™ is visible
on the bushing. Refer to bushing
replacement in this chapter.
6.16
CLUTCH SYSTEM
Button To Tower Clearance Inspection 2. Inspect the weight pivot bore and pivot bolts for wear or
galling. If weights or bolts are worn or broken, replace in
1. Inspect for any clearance between spider button to tower. sets of three with new bolts.
If clearance exists, replace all buttons and inspect surface
NOTE: A damaged shift weight is usually caused by
of towers. See “Spider Removal” procedure.
a damaged or stuck roller in the spider assembly.
See roller inspection, see “Roller, Pin, and Thrust
Washer Inspection”.
WARNING
The clutch assembly is a precisely balanced unit.

Never replace parts with used parts from another
clutch assembly!
All PVT maintenance or repairs should be
performed only by a certified Polaris Master Service
Dealer (MSD) technician who has received the
proper training and understands the procedures
Button to Tower Clearance: .000-.001 outlined in this manual.
Because of the critical nature and precision
2. Inspect sheave surfaces. Replace the entire clutch as an balance incorporated into the PVT system, it is
assembly if worn, damaged or cracked. absolutely essential that no attempt at
disassembly or repair be made without factory
authorized special tools and service
Shift Weight Inspection
procedures.
1. If clutch is not disassembled, inspect as shown, using a
clutch holding tool to compress the moveable sheave. The
6
Drive Clutch Inspection
contact surface of the weight should be smooth and free of
dents or gall marks. Remove shift weight bolts and NOTE: Remove cover, spring, and spider following
weights. instructions for drive clutch removal, then proceed
as follows:
1. Remove moveable sheave spacer sleeve (1) and the thrust

washer (2). Visually inspect the washer for damage.
Measure the thickness and compare to specification.
Replace if worn or damaged.
Thrust Washer Thickness

Standard: .030, (.76mm)
Service Limit: .025, (.64mm)
6.17
CLUTCH SYSTEM
2. Lift one-way clutch (3) and thrustwasher (4) off shaft. Moveable Sheave Bushing Inspection
Replace as an assembly if worn, damaged, or if problems
were noted. Inspect the Teflon™ coating (arrow) on the moveable sheave
bushing. Inspect BOTH sheaves for signs of wear, grooving or
cracking. De-glaze surfaces with a 3M™ pad if needed.
3. Inspect surface of shaft for pitting, grooves, or damage.

Measure the outside diameter and compare to
specifications. Replace the drive clutch assembly if shaft
is worn or damaged.
Moveable Sheave Bushing Inspection:
Replace the cover bushing if more brass than
Teflon™ is visible on the bushing. Refer to
bushing replacement in this chapter.
Drive Clutch Bushing Service

NOTE: Special Tool Required: EBS CLUTCH
BUSHING REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Table 6-1: Special Tools

ITEM QTY PART DESCRIPTION PART #
A, B 1 EBS Puller Tool 5132027

C 1 EBS Puller Nut 5132501
= In. / mm. D 1 EBS Main Adapter 5132029
E 1 EBS Bushing Removal 5132028
Shaft Diameter:
Standard: 1.3745 - 1.375 ( -- 1 Bushing Replacement Kit 2871226
Service Limit: 1.3730” -- 1 Piston Pin Puller 2870386
4. Visually inspect PTFE thrustwasher for damage. Measure -- 1 Instructions 9915111
the thickness and compare to specification. Replace if
worn or damaged
= In. / mm.
PTFE Washer Thickness

Standard: .030” (.76mm)
Service Limit: .025” (.64mm)
6.18
CLUTCH SYSTEM
NOTE: Bushings are installed at the factory using Drive Clutch Bushing Installation
Loctite™ 609. In order to remove bushings it will be
1. Place main adapter (Item 8) on puller.
necessary to apply heat evenly to the area around
each bushing. Clean all residual Loctite™ from Puller Tool (A,B) Side Nut (C)
“A” toward sheave
bushing bore prior to installing new bushing.
CAUTION
Clutch components will be hot! In order to avoid

serious burns, wear insulated gloves during the
removal process.
Bushing Piston Pin Puller
Drive Clutch Bushing Removal
1. Remove clutch as outlined previously in this chapter.
2. Install handle end of Piston Pin Puller (PN 2870386) Main Adapter (8)
securely into bench vise and lightly grease puller threads.
3. Remove nut from puller rod and set aside.
4. Install puller adapter (Item 10 from kit PN 2871226). 2. Apply Loctite™ 609 evenly to bushing bore inside
moveable sheave.
5. Install main adapter (Item D) onto puller.
3. Set bushing in place on sheave.
Puller Tool (A,B) Nut (C) 4. Insert installation puller tool (Item A/B) with “A” side
Side “A” toward down, into center of bushing. NOTE: 800 EFI Clutch -
sheave
Use Bushing Tool PA-47336.
5. With towers pointing upward, slide sheave, bushing and 6
tool onto puller rod.
6. Install nut on puller rod and hand tighten. Turn barrel to
apply additional tension if needed.
7. Turn sheave counterclockwise, making sure bushing is
drawn straight into bore. Continue until bushing is seated.
Puller 8. Remove nut from puller rod and set aside.
Adapter (10)
9. Remove sheave from puller.
Main 10. Remove installation tool.
Adapter (D) Piston Pin
Puller
6. With towers pointing toward the vise, slide sheave onto

puller rod.
7. Install removal tool (Item A/B) into center of sheave with
A side" toward sheave. NOTE: Smooth One-way Clutch
- Use Bushing Tool PA-47336.
8. Install nut (C) onto end of puller rod and hand tighten. Turn
puller barrel to increase tension on sheave if needed. Using
a hand held propane torch, apply heat around outside of
bushing until tiny smoke tailings appear.
9. Turn sheave counterclockwise on puller rod until it comes
free. Lift sheave off puller.
11. Pull bushing removal tool and adapter from puller rod.
Remove bushing from tool and discard.
6.19
CLUTCH SYSTEM
Cover Bushing Removal One-Way Clutch Inspection (Drive Clutch)
1. Install main adapter (Item 8) on puller. 1. Rotate one-way clutch clockwise (as viewed from the
cover plate side). The clutch should rotate on the shaft
Removal Tool (3) with only slight amount of drag. Verify there is no binding
Nut (C) or rough spots. When rotated counterclockwise, the clutch
should lock to the shaft without slipping. If problems are
noted in either direction, continue with disassembly.
Adapter Reducer (9)
Piston Pin Pulle

Main Adapter (8)
2. Install adapter reducer (Item 9).

3. From outside of clutch cover, insert removal tool (Item 3)
into cover bushing.
4. With inside of cover toward vise, slide cover onto puller.
5. Install nut onto puller rod and hand tighten. Turn puller
barrel to increase tension as needed.
6. Turn clutch cover counterclockwise on puller rod until
bushing is removed and cover comes free. Drive Clutch Reassembly
NOTE: It is important that the same number and
8. Remove bushing and bushing removal tool from puller.
thickness of washers are reinstalled beneath the
Discard bushing.
spider during assembly. The Teflon bushings are
Cover Bushing Installation self-lubricating.
1. Apply Loctite™ 609 evenly to bushing bore in cover.

2. Working from inside of cover, insert new bushing and CAUTION
bushing installation tool into center of clutch cover.
3. With main adapter on puller, insert cover onto puller rod, Do not apply oil or grease to the bushings.
placing outside of cover toward vise.
4. Install nut on rod and hand tighten. Turn puller barrel to 1. Reassemble drive clutch in the following sequence. Be
apply more tension if needed. sure the “X”, or the marks that were made earlier, are
5. Turn clutch cover counterclockwise on puller rod until aligned during each phase of assembly.
bushing is seated.
A) “X”, or the marks that were made earlier on cover
6. Remove nut from puller rod. Take installation tool and
clutch cover off rod. B) “X” on spider, making sure spacer washers are installed
underneath spider and positioned properly in recess
6.20
CLUTCH SYSTEM
C) “X”, or the marks that were made earlier under weight 6. Install limiter spacer on top of spider.
7. Reinstall shift weights using new lock nuts on the bolts.
=T
Shift Weight Lock Nuts: Hand Tighten
8. Reinstall clutch spring.
Engine
Rotation
2. Install moveable sheave onto fixed sheave.

3. Install spider spacers. Use same quantity and thickness as
were removed.
4. Compress spider buttons for each tower and install spider,
making sure that “X”, or the marks that were made earlier,
on spider aligns with “X”, or the marks that were made
Nut on trailing side
5.
earlier on the moveable sheave.
Torque spider to specification using the holding fixture and 9. Reinstall cover, aligning bosses on the tower and cover. 6
spider tool. Torque with smooth motion to avoid damage Torque cover bolts evenly to specification.
to the stationary sheave.
Spacer Washers
CAUTION
Verify spider spacer washers are fully

seated in the recessed area of the spider.
Any misalignment will alter clutch balance.
Inverting the clutch while initially tightening the
spider will help position the washers.
=T =T
Spider Torque: Cover Screw Torque:
200 ft. lbs. (271 Nm) 90 in. lbs. (10.4 Nm)
6.21
CLUTCH SYSTEM
EBS DRIVEN CLUTCH SERVICE 4. Place the clutch into Clutch Compression Tool PN
8700220. Using Compression Extensions PN PS-45909,
Driven Clutch Disassembly Press down on top of the spider assembly, compressing the
spider onto the shaft. Remove snap ring (A) and slowly
1. Remove driven clutch from the transmission input shaft. release the assembly.
Do not attempt disassembly of the driven clutch from the Press down on spider
outside snap ring. The driven clutch must be disassembled
from the helix side.
5. Remove the spider assembly, spring (B), and spacer washer

Do not disassemble from this side
(C). NOTE: Spring is compression only and has no
2. It is important to mark the position of the shaft, cam cover, torsional wind
and sheave before disassembly or use the “X’s” on the
components for reference. This will aid in reassembly and
helps to maintain clutch balance after reassembly. B
3. Remove the four torx screws that secure the cam assembly
(helix) using a T25 torx.
6.22
CLUTCH SYSTEM
6. Remove the inside spider plate (D) and spider dampener 10. Pull out the clutch roller pins (L) and rollers (M).
(E). Inspect the spider dampener (E) for wear and replaced
if needed.
D K
E
M L
7. Remove the E-clip (F), washer (G), and the clutch rollers
(H). Inspect the rollers for wear replace if worn.
H G
F
K
11. Press the shaft and bearing out of the outer sheave using a
press.
6
8. Remove the clutch assembly from the holding tool.
Remove the large outer retaining ring (I) and the inner
retaining ring (J).
Press Shaft & Bearing Out
9. Press out the spring pins (K) in the inner sheave.
Inspect Bearing
6.23
CLUTCH SYSTEM
12. Inspect the bearing for wear. Spin the bearing, if the DRIVEN CLUTCH BUSHING REMOVAL/
bearing does not spin smoothly replace as needed. To INSTALLATION
remove the bearing, simply press the bearing from the shaft.
NOTE: Special Tool Required: EBS CLUTCH
13. Inspect the bearing for wear. Spin the bearing, if the
BUSHING REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
bearing does not spin smoothly replace as needed. To
remove the bearing, simply press the bearing from the shaft.
Table 6-1:
ITEM QTY PART DESCRIPTION PART #
A, B 1 EBS Puller Tool 5132027

C 1 EBS Puller Nut 5132501
D 1 EBS Main Adapter 5132029
EBS Bushing Removal
E 1 5132028
Tool Instructions
-- 1 Bushing Replacement Kit 2871226
-- 1 Piston Pin Puller 2870386
Inspect Sheave Surface
-- 1 Instructions 9915111
14. Inspect the cam assembly (helix) bushing for wear. If the NOTE: Bushings are installed at the factory using
bushing is worn or the shaft does not fit snug into the
Loctite™ 609. In order to remove bushings it will be
bushing, replace the cam assembly (cover).
necessary to apply heat evenly to the area around
each bushing. Clean all residual Loctite™ from
Inspect Bushing
bushing bore prior to installing new bushing.
Driven Clutch Bushing Removal

1. Install main puller adapter (Item 8) onto puller.
2. Install adapter reducer (Item 9).
3. Using a hand held propane torch, apply heat around outside
of bushing until tiny smoke tailings appear.
4. Flip sheave over so bushing faces downward and install
onto puller.
5. Install bushing tool (Item 2).
6.24
CLUTCH SYSTEM
6. Install left hand nut (C) and spacer onto puller rod and EBS DRIVEN CLUTCH REASSEMBLY
tighten by hand. Turn puller barrel for further tension if
needed. 1. Press a new bearing onto the output shaft using a press.
7. Turn clutch sheave counterclockwise until bushing is
removed and sheave comes free.
8. Remove nut (C) (left hand thread) from puller rod and set
aside.
9. Remove adapters from puller.
10. Remove bushing and removal tool from adapters. Discard
bushing.
Driven Clutch Bushing Installation

1. Install puller adapter (Item 10) onto puller.
2. Install adapter (Item 9) onto puller.
2. Install the shaft/bearing into the outer sheave.
3. Apply Loctite™ 609 evenly to bushing bore inside

moveable sheave.
4. Install sheave face down on puller.
5. Install new bushing on installation tool (Item 2) and install
assembly into sheave.
6. Install left hand thread nut (C) onto puller rod and hand
tighten against installation tool.
7. Turn clutch sheave counterclockwise, making sure bushing
is drawn straight into bore. Continue until bushing is
seated.
8. Remove nut (C) from puller rod and set aside.
9. Remove installation tool and clutch sheave from puller.
6.25
CLUTCH SYSTEM
3. Install the small and large retaining rings into the outer 5. Install the roller (A) onto the roller pin (B). (Both Sides).
sheave above the bearing.
6. Install the roller pin into the sheave assembly. (Both sides).
The flat side of the roller pin faces downward when the
shaft side is laying flat on the bench.
4. Line up the “X” on the moveable sheave with the “X” on
the stationary sheave or use the marks previously used. Put
the sheaves together.
Align X’s
Flat Side Down
7. Install the spring pins (C) to secure the roller pins. Install
until flush with sheave surface.
6.26
CLUTCH SYSTEM
8. Install the spacer washer. 12. Install the spider assembly onto the shaft with the retaining
ring on top of the spider. NOTE: Use the marks previously
Install Spacer Washer made to align the skip tooth spider, or use the “X” on top
of the spider and align it with the skip tooth on the shaft.
Align Marks
9. Install the spring over the shaft (arrow). 13. Place the clutch into Clutch Compression Tool PN
8700220. Using Compression Extensions PN PS-45909,
Press down on the top of the spider assembly, pushing the
spider onto the shaft.
Press Down on Spider
10. Install the clutch rollers (D) onto each side of the outside
spider. Install the washers (E) and E-clips (F) to secure the
rollers. Spin the roller, the rollers should spin freely.
11. Install the spider dampener (G) inside the outer spider and 14. Slowly compress the spider into place. If the spider appears
install the inside spider plate (H). to bind while compressing, stop and make sure the skip
tooth on the shaft and the spider are aligned. Once the
Outer Spider
D spider passes the retaining ring notch on the shaft, install
E F the retaining ring (A).
H A
6.27
CLUTCH SYSTEM
15. Install the cam assembly (helix) over the shaft. Line up the
“X” on the cam, “X” on spider, and “X” on the stationary
sheave or use the marks previously made before
disassembly. NOTE: If the cam assembly (helix) is
difficult to install, be sure the sheaves are aligned. To align
the sheaves place the clutch assembly on a flat surface with
the cam assembly (helix) side down. Press down on the
moveable sheave belt face with both hands and the helix
will release.
Press Down to Loosen Helix
16. Use a T25 torx to install the four torx screws and torque to
specification.
=T
T25 Torx:
42-52 in. lbs. (4.75 - 5.88 Nm)
6.28
CLUTCH SYSTEM
PVT TROUBLESHOOTING
General Range Operation Guidelines
Overheating
LOW RANGE: Heavy pulling, basic operational speeds less
IMPORTANT: During routine maintenance or than 7 MPH, riding through rough terrain (swamps, mountains,
whenever PVT system overheating is evident, it's etc..), low ground speeds.
important to check the inlet and outlet ducting for
obstructions. Obstructions to air flow through the
ducts will significantly increase PVT system
operating temperatures. The ATV should be operated HIGH RANGE: High ground speeds, speeds above 7 MPH.
in low range when pulling or plowing heavy loads, or
if extended low speed operation is anticipated.
Table 6-1: Cause and Remedy

DIAGNOSIS OF CLUTCH DRIVE BELT & COVER RELATED ISSUES:
POSSIBLE CAUSES SOLUTIONS/WHAT TO DO
Loading the ATV into a pickup or

Shift transmission to low range during loading of the ATV to prevent belt burning.
tall trailer when in high range.
Starting out going up a steep When starting out on an incline, use low range, or dismount the ATV after first applying the park
incline. brake and perform the “K” turn.
Driving at low RPM or low
Drive at higher speed or use Low Range. The use of Low Range is highly recommended for
ground speed (at approximately
cooler PVT operating temperatures and longer component life.
3-7 MPH).
Insufficient warm-up of ATVs
exposed to low ambient
Warm engine at least 5 min., then with transmission in neutral, advance throttle to approx. 1/8 6
throttle in short bursts, 5 to 7 times. The belt will become more flexible and prevent belt burning.
temperatures.
Slow and easy clutch Fast, effective use of the throttle for efficient engagement. Continuous operation at the point of
engagement. engagement (initial vehicle movement) increases PVT temperatures and component wear.
Towing/Pushing at low RPM/low
Use Low Range only.
ground speed.
Plowing snow, dirt, etc./utility
Use Low Range only.
use.
Shift the transmission to Low Range, carefully use fast, aggressive throttle application to engage
Stuck in mud or snow.
clutch. Warning: Excessive throttle may cause loss of control and vehicle overturn.
Climbing over large objects from Shift the transmission to Low Range, carefully use fast, aggressive, throttle application to
a stopped position. engage clutch. Warning: Excessive throttle may cause loss of control and vehicle overturn.
Shift the transmission to neutral. Using the throttle, vary the engine rpm from idle to 3/4 throttle.
Belt slippage from water or snow Engage transmission in the lowest possible range and test for belt slippage Repeat several times
ingestion into the PVT system. as required. During this procedure, the throttle should not be held at the full position for more
than 10 seconds. PVT seals should be inspected for damage if repeated leaking occurs.
Inspection/repair of clutch components should be performed by a certified Polaris MSD
Clutch malfunction.
technician.
6.29
CLUTCH SYSTEM
Problem, Cause and Remedy Chart
Table 6-2: Problem, Cause and Remedy

SITUATION POSSIBLE CAUSE REMEDY
Engine RPM below -Wrong or broken drive clutch spring. -Replace with recommended spring.
specified operating range -Install correct shift weight kit to match engine
-Drive clutch shift weight too heavy.
although engine is application.
properly tuned. -Driven clutch spring broken or installed wrong . -Replace spring; refer to proper installation location
a. Disassemble drive clutch; inspect shift weights for
-Drive clutch binding. wear and free operation.
Erratic engine operating -Belt worn unevenly - thin/burnt spots Replace belt
RPM during acceleration
or load variations. a. Replace ramp buttons.
-Driven clutch malfunction. b. Inspect movable sheave for excessive bushing
-Sheave face grooved. -Replace the clutch.

-Incorrect drive clutch spring (too high spring
-Install correct recommended spring.
rate).
-Drive clutch shift weights incorrect for
-Install correct recommended shift weights.
application (too light)
Engine RPM above -Disassemble and clean clutch, inspecting shift

-Drive clutch binding. weights and rollers. Reassemble without the spring
specified operating range.
-Disassemble, clean, and inspect driven clutch, noting
-Driven clutch binding. worn sheave bushing and ramp buttons and helix
-Clean sheaves with denatured alcohol or brake

-Converter sheaves greasy; belt slippage.
cleaner, install new belt.
-Drive belt worn too narrow. -Replace belt.
Harsh drive clutch
engagement. -Perform belt/sheave clearance adjustment with shim
-Excessive belt/sheave clearance with new belt.
washers beneath spider.
-Wrong belt for application. -Replace with correct belt.
Drive belt turns over -Clutch alignment out of spec. -Adjust alignment offset.
-Engine mount broken or loose -Inspect/adjust or replace.
-Plugged air intake or outlet -Clear obstruction.
-Belt slippage due to water, oil, grease, etc., -Inspect system. Clean , repair or replace as necessary.
rubbing on cover Seal PVT system ducts.
PVT cover overheating
-Clutches or weight being applied to cover while
(melting) Remove weight. Inform operator.
in operation
-Instruct operator on guidelines for operation in wet
-Use of High vs. low range terrain as outlined in Owner's Safety and Maintenance
-Cover seals or ducts leaking -Find leak and repair as necessary.

Water Ingestion -Instruct operator on guidelines for operation in wet
-Operator error terrain as outlined in Owner's Safety and Maintenance
-Belt worn out -Replace belt.

Belt Slipping -Water ingestion -Inspect and seal PVT system.
-Belt contaminated with oil or grease -Inspect and clean.
6.30
CLUTCH SYSTEM
Table 6-2: Problem, Cause and Remedy
SITUATION POSSIBLE CAUSE REMEDY
-Abuse (continued throttle application when -Caution operator to operate machine within
vehicle is stationary, excess load) guidelines.
-Vehicle operated with park brake on. Inspect brake
Belt burnt, thin spots -Dragging brake
system.
-Instruct firm, effective use of throttle for efficient
-Slow, easy clutch engagement
engagement.
-Belt worn or separated, thin spots, loose
-Replace belt.
belt
PVT noise
-Broken or worn clutch components, cover
-Inspect and repair as necessary.
hitting clutches
-Replace belt. Refer to belt burnt troubleshooting and
Engagement -Thin spots on belt, worn belt
instruct operator.
erratic or “jerks”
-Drive clutch bushings stick -Inspect and repair clutches.
6.31
CLUTCH SYSTEM
NOTES
6.32
FINAL DRIVE
CHAPTER 7
FINAL DRIVE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
TORQUE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
GEARCASE FLUID / CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
FRONT HUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
DISASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT (CV) SERVICE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
CV JOINT/BOOT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
PROP SHAFT - FRONT OR REAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7
U-JOINT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7
DISASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8
DRIVE AXLE EXPLODED VIEWS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10
DRIVE SHAFTS AND PROPSHAFTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10
FRONT GEARCASE - CENTRALIZED HILLIARD W/ ACTIVE DESCENT CONTROL . 7.11
OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11
ADC GEARCASE EXPLODED VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12
ADC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13
FRONT GEARCASE DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.14
GEARCASE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15
7
GEARCASE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16
COIL TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17
ADC DIFFERENTIAL HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT BLEEDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17
DISASSEMBLY / INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17
ADC GEARCASE PISTON REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.23
SETTING RING GEAR BACKLASH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.26
REAR HUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.27
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.27
DISASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.28
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.29
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.29
REAR DRIVE (CV) SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.30
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.30
SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.31
CV BOOT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.32
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.33
DRIVE SHAFT AND CV JOINT HANDLING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.33
REAR GEARCASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.34
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.34
DISASSEMBLY AND INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.34
REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.35
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.36
REAR GEARCASE EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.38
7.1
FINAL DRIVE
SPECIFICATIONS Gearcase Fluid / Capacity
Torque Table GEARCASE DESCRIPTION
Demand Drive LT
FT.LBS. Centralized Hilliard
COMPONENT NM Premium Hub Fluid
(IN.LBS.)
8.97 oz. (265 ml)
F/R Steel Wheel Nuts 30 41
Centralized Hilliard Demand Drive LT
F/R Aluminum Wheel Nuts 90 122 w/ ADC Premium Hub Fluid
9.3 oz. (275 ml)
Front Hub Nut 60 81
Rear Hub Nut 80 108 ADC Gearcase Polaris ADC Hydraulic
Pump Reservoir Fluid
Front Gearcase Mount Bolts 30 41
AGL Synthetic or ADF
Standard Gearcase Screws 14 19 Rear Gearcase
5.0 oz. (150 ml)
Rear Gearcase Mount Bolts 30 41
Rear Gearcase Bolts 25 34 FRONT HUB
Lower Hub Carrier Bolts 37 50 Disassembly
Upper Hub Carrier Bolts 37 50
NOTE: Follow steps 1-10 for wheel/hub removal in
ADC Pump Screws (17-23) 1.9 - 2.5 ‘Front Drive Shaft (CV) Service / Removal’
ADC Cover Screws 7 - 11 9.4 - 14.9 1. Remove outer snap ring.
ADC Bleed Valves (80) 9
IMPORTANT: Verify which type of wheel ATV is

equipped with (aluminum or steel) when torquing
wheel nuts.
Special Tools
2872608 Roller Pin Removal Tool

PU-48951 CV Boot Clamp Tool
2870772 1 3/4” Straight Wrench
ADC Gearcase Piston
PA-48542
Installation Tool
7.2
FINAL DRIVE
2. From the back side, tap on the outer bearing race with a drift FRONT DRIVE SHAFT (CV) SERVICE
punch in the reliefs as shown.
Removal
1. Set the ATV in park. Remove hub dust cap.
2. Remove cotter pin.
3. Loosen the hub retaining nut.
4. Loosen - but do not remove - the wheel nuts.
5. Safely lift and support the front of the ATV.
CAUTION
Serious injury could occur if machine tips or falls.
6. Remove wheel.
7. Remove the two brake caliper attaching bolts.
NOTE: Drive bearing out evenly by tapping on outer

race only. Once bearing is at bottom of casting,
support casting on outer edges so bearing can be
removed.
3. Inspect the bearing.
NOTE: Due to extremely close tolerances and
minimal wear, the bearings must be inspected
visually, and by feel. While rotating bearings by
hand, inspect for rough spots, discoloration, or
corrosion. The bearings should turn smoothly and
quietly, with no detectable up and down movement
and minimal movement sideways between inner and
outer race.
7
4. Inspect bearing housing for scratches, wear or damage.
Replace housing if damaged. CAUTION
Assembly Do not hang the caliper by the brake line. Use wire
to hang the caliper to prevent possible damage to
1. Support bottom of hubstrut housing. the brake line.
2. Start bearing in housing.
8. Remove hub.
3. Press bearing into place until outer race bottoms on
housing.
CAUTION
When using an arbor press be sure to press only on

the outer race to avoid bearing damage.
4. Install snap ring into groove.

NOTE: Follow steps 2-6 for wheel/hub installation in
‘Front Drive Shaft (CV) Service / Installation’
7.3
FINAL DRIVE
9. Remove cotter pin and nut from lower A-arm ball joint. Installation
Remove lower A-arm from ball joint.
1. Install new compression ring on drive shaft. Apply an
anti-seize compound to splines. Align splines of drive
shaft with front gearcase and install by lightly tapping on
drive shaft with rubber faced hammer.
2. Install drive shaft in strut.
3. Install lower ball joint, torque nut to specification and
install new cotter pin.
=T
Ball Joint Retaining Nut Torque:
30 ft. lbs. (41 Nm)
10. Pull strut assembly out while pivoting front drive shaft
downward until it clears strut assembly.
4. Install hub and tighten hub nut to specification.
=T
11. Pull strut assembly out while pivoting front drive shaft
downward until it clears strut assembly. Front Hub Retaining Nut Torque:
60 ft. lbs. (91 Nm)
5. Install brake caliper and tighten bolts to specification. Refer

to Chapter 9.
6. Install wheel.
7.4
FINAL DRIVE
Inspection 3. Disconnect A-arm from ball joint using a tie rod fork.
Check the front and rear driveshaft CV boots for any tears or
leaking grease. If the driveshaft boot loses all of the grease CV
joint failure will occur.
4. Slide strut off end of drive shaft and tie it up out of the way
of the shaft.
5. Remove clamps from rubber boot using the proper boot
clamp tool.
CV Joint/Boot Replacement 6. Remove the large end of the boot from the CV joint, slide
NOTE: When replacing a damaged boot, check the the boot back and separate the wheel spindle and CV joint
grease for contamination by rubbing it between two assembly from the axle shaft by pulling the shaft sharply
fingers. A gritty feeling indicates contamination. If outward, away from the CV joint. It may be necessary to
the grease is not contaminated, the boot can be tap the CV joint assembly outward with a soft faced
replaced without cleaning the CV joint. Use the hammer.
recommended amount of grease for boot
replacement only (see illustration). Retaining Ring
NOTE: Use only the Constant Velocity Joint grease
supplied with boot service kit. IF CV JOINT WAS
7
CLEANED, add the recommended amount of grease
to the joint in addition to the grease pack supplied
with boot kit (see illustration).
1. Remove wheel, brake caliper, and wheel hub. Refer to
“FRONT DRIVE AXLE REMOVAL” earlier in this
chapter for procedure.
2. Remove cotter pin and castle nut from A-arm ball joint.
Pull Shaft to Remove from

CV Joint
7.5
FINAL DRIVE
7. Remove small clamp and boot from driveshaft. 13. Install the small clamp on the boot.
NOTE: If the ATV has been operated with a damaged
boot, the CV joint grease may be contaminated. Front Shaft
Inspect the grease carefully for contamination, and
clean the joint thoroughly if necessary. Front drive
axle CV boot replacement requires 3.5 oz. of grease.
CV Joint Grease -3.5 oz.

(Refer to parts manual for boot kit)
CV Boot Clamp Tool:
(PN PU-48951)
Boot replacement with complete CV joint

cleaning requires the entire 3.5 oz. of grease.
8. Before installing the new boot, remove all grease from the
boot area and shaft.
NOTE: It is very important to use the correct type
and quantity of grease. Use only the grease
contained in the boot kit. DO NOT use a substitute
grease and DO NOT overfill or under fill the CV joint.
9. Slide the new clamp and boot (small end first) over the
splined shaft, then slide (tap) the CV joint into the splines
of the axle.
10. Add grease through large end of boot.
11. Install a new boot onto the axle shaft and fill the CV joint
and boot with the correct type and amount of grease.
12. While pulling out on the CV shaft, fully extend the CV joint
and slide a straight O-ring pick or a small slotted screw
driver between the small end of the boot and the shaft. This
will allow the air pressure to equalize in the CV boot in the
position that the joint will spend most of its life. Before you
remove your instrument, be sure the small end of the boot
is in its correct location on the axle. CARE MUST BE
TAKEN TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THE NEWLY
INSTALLED BOOT.
7.6
FINAL DRIVE
PROP SHAFT - FRONT OR REAR U-JOINT
Removal and Installation Disassembly
1. Using Roll Pin Removal Tool (PN 2872608), remove the
roll pin from prop shaft at rear of housing (front only) or CAUTION
transmission output shaft (rear only). Slide prop shaft back
and away from housing, then pull sharply forward to Always wear eye protection when working with
remove from transmission shaft. spring-tensioned components
2. For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
1. Remove internal or external snap ring from all bearing
caps.
NOTE: If removing rear propshaft, loosening and/or

removal of rear gearcase mounting bolts may be
NOTE: If yoke or bearing is removed, cross bearing
required to gain necessary clearance for propshaft
must be replaced. Note orientation of grease fitting
removal.
(if equipped) and mark inner and outer yoke for 7
See “REAR GEARCASE” on page 7.34 correct re-positioning during installation.
2. Support inner yoke as shown and drive outer yoke down
(bearing cap out) with a soft face hammer.
7.7
FINAL DRIVE
3. Support U-joint in vise as shown and drive inner yoke down Assembly
to remove remaining bearing ca
1. Install new bearing caps in yoke by hand. Carefully install
U-joint cross with grease fitting properly positioned
inward toward center of shaft. Take care not to dislodge
needle bearings upon installation of cross joint. Tighten
vise to force bearing caps in.
4. Force U-joint cross to one side and lift out of inner yoke.
2. Using a suitable arbor, fully seat bearing cap in one side.

Continually check for free movement of bearing cross as
bearing caps using a suitable arbor, fully seat bearing cap
in one side. Continually check for free movement of
bearing cross as bearing caps are assembled. are assembled.
3. Install snap ring to contain bearing cap just installed.

Repeat procedure for other side.
7.8
FINAL DRIVE

6. Seat all bearing caps against snap rings by supporting cross
shaft and tapping on each corner as shown.
7. When installation is complete, yokes must pivot freely in

all directions without binding. If the joint is stiff or binding,
tap the yoke lightly to center the joint until it pivots freely
in all directions.
7.9
FINAL DRIVE
DRIVE AXLE EXPLODED VIEWS
Drive Shafts and Propshafts
NOTE: Refer to your parts manual for the proper replacement parts.
Inner CV Joint Compression

Drive Axle Components
Ring Compression
Inner Boot Ring
Compression Outer Boot Outer CV Joint
Ring
Clamps
Drive Boot Replacement Kits
Clamp 3.5 oz. grease
Boot
Outer Clamp
Propshaft Assy. Prop Shaft Components O-Ring

Prop Shaft
Cross & Bearing Kit
Yoke, Front Gearcase Yoke, Prop to Transmission
Yoke, Prop to Transmission

Yoke, Rear Gearcase Prop Shaft
7.10
FINAL DRIVE
FRONT GEARCASE - CENTRALIZED HILLIARD W/ ACTIVE DESCENT CONTROL
Operation
Rollers
The AWD switch may be turned on or off while the vehicle is
moving, however, AWD will not enable until the engine RPM
drops below 3100. Once the AWD is enabled, it remains
enabled until the switch is turned off. Ring Gear
Engage the AWD switch before getting into conditions where

the front wheel drive may be needed. If the rear wheels are
spinning, release the throttle before switching to AWD.
CAUTION
Switching to AWD while the rear wheels are

spinning may cause severe drive shaft and Roll Cage
gearcase damage. Always switch to AWD while the
rear wheels have traction or are at rest.
CAUTION
With the AWD switch off, the vehicle drives through the
rearwheels only (2 wheel drive). When the AWD is enabled, the
front drive acts as an on-demand AWD system. This means, the If the rear wheels are spinning, release the throttle
front drive will engage once the rear wheels have lost traction, before turning the AWD switch on. If AWD is
and will remain engaged until the torque requirement goes away engaged while the wheels are spinning, severe
(i.e. rear wheels regain traction).
drive shaft and clutch damage could result.
AWD Disengagement: Once the rear wheels regain traction,

Roll Cage Output Hubs Armature Plate the front wheels will return to the “over-running” condition.The
vehicle is now back to rear wheel drive until the next loss of rear
wheel traction occurs.
7
Ring Gear Magnetic Coil
AWD Engagement: When the AWD switch is activated, the

AWD coil is powered by a 12 Vdc input which creates a
magnetic field. This magnetic field attracts an armature plate
that is keyed to the roll cage. When the ring gear and roll cage
are spinning (vehicle is moving), the energized coil and
armature plate will apply drag to the roll cage that indexes the
rollers inside the ring gear to an engagement position. While in
the engagement position, the front drive will be in an “over-
running” condition (not engaged), until the rear wheels lose
traction. Once the rear wheels begin to lose traction, the front
drive will engage by coupling the output hubs to the ring gear via
the rollers. The front drive will remain engaged until the torque
requirement goes away (i.e. rear wheels regain traction).
7.11
FINAL DRIVE
ADC Gearcase Exploded View
Ref. # Description Qty Ref. # Description Qty

1 O-ring 2 17 Roll Cage Assembly 1
2 1/4" Tubing 1 18 8-32 x 3/8" Screws 4
3 1/4-20 Screws 5 19 Spacer, Gear 1
4 Armature Plate 1 20 Pump Assembly 1
5 Bushing 1 21 Wire Connector 1
6 Vent 1 22 O-ring, Outer 2
7 Cap, Bleed Screw 2 23 O-ring, Inner 2
8 Spacer, Clutch Basket 1 24 Bleeder Valve 2
9 Cover Assembly 1 25 Cam Assembly 1
10 Cover Bracket 1 26 Armature Plate 1
11 Gear Case Sub-Assembly 1 27 Pinion Cover Assembly 1
12 Hose Clamp 2 28 Retaining Ring 1
13 Hub Sub-Assembly 2 29 Pinion Gear Assembly 1
14 Plastic Clip 2 30 Fill Plug 1
15 Reservoir 1 31 Drain Plug 1
16 Ring Gear 1 32 Piston Assembly 2
33 1/4-20 Screws 3
7.12
FINAL DRIVE
ADC Operation ADC Engagement: When the AWD switch is set to ‘4x4/
ADC’, a 12 Vdc current is present at the input shaft coil (1).
Engaging Front Gearcase: Active Descent Control (ADC) is Operation is controlled by the ECU grounding and ungrounding
controlled by the ECU and will not enable until the following the coil. The coil’s magnetic field attracts a splined armature
conditions are met: plate (2) on the pinion (input) shaft (4). The energized splined
armature plate attracts the unsplined eccentric cam (3), which
• Vehicle speed is below 15 Mph (24Kph) begins to turn with the input shaft. The eccentric cam drives a
hydraulic piston/pump assembly (5). The pressure created by
• Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) is at idle position the pump assembly forces hydraulic fluid through passages to
the piston assemblies (6) located in each case half. Hydraulic
• The AWD switch is switched to ‘AWD/ADC’ pressure forces the piston assemblies inward to compress the
splined clutch packs (7) forming a dynamic coupling to each
Once the conditions are met for engagement, ADC remains front drive axle, resulting in true all-wheel EBS operation upon
engaged as long as the conditions are met. deceleration.
With the AWD switch set to ‘2x4’, the vehicle drives only the Disengagement: Current to the ADC coil is turned off by the
rear wheels (2 wheel drive). When the AWD switch is set to ECU anytime the following conditions are met:
‘4x4’ the magnetic coils are active, the AWD coil indexes the
clutch mechanism so that both front axles will engage when • Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) moves off idle position
there is a loss of rear wheel traction. In addition to the rear wheel
engine braking, the ADC coil provides front wheel engine • The AWD switch is switched to ‘4x4’ or ‘2x4’
braking at speeds less than 15 Mph (24Kph) with the TPS at idle
position. • Vehicle speed is above 15 Mph (24Kph)
Hydraulic pressure stops and the pistons release, disengaging
the ADC function. The vehicle returns to rear wheel drive until
the next deceleration.
2
7
3
4
7
7
7.13
FINAL DRIVE
Front Gearcase Diagnosis 3. Inspect the armature plate for a consistent wear pattern.
There should be two distinct wear bands (one band inside
• Symptom: AWD Will Not Engage the other). If only one band of wear is present (or if there
is wear between the two bands, inspect the coil area as
1. Check the gearcase coil resistance. To test the gearcase
indicated in Step 4. A band with an interrupted wear mark
coil resistance, use the coil harness (Grey & Brown/
may indicate a warped plate, which may cause intermittent
White).
operation.
NOTE: To test the gearcase coil resistance, use the
AWD coil harness. The gearcase coil should Armature Plate
measure between 22.8 ohms and 25.2 ohms.
Check for Wear Bands

4. Check to make sure the coil is seated in the U-shaped insert
that is pressed into the gearcase cover. The top of the coil
should be seated below the U-shaped insert. The U-shaped
insert controls the pole gap. If the top of the coil is above
Front Gearcase Coil Resistance: the surface of the U-shaped insert it raises the armature
24 Ω ±10% plate, thereby increasing pole gap. If the pole gap
increases the coil will not be strong enough to engage the
2. Check the minimum battery voltage at the Grey & Brown/ AWD system. If this is the cause order a new Cover Plate
White wires that feed the hub coil wires. There should be Assembly.
a minimum of 11.80-12.0 Volts present for proper
operation. Cutaway View of Gearcase Cover
AWD Coil Applied Battery Voltage:

11.80-12.0 Vdc Coil
U-Shaped Insert
7.14
FINAL DRIVE
5. Inspect the rollers for nicks, scratches, and flat spots. Also Gearcase Removal
inspect the roll cage for cracks and ensure the rollers are
able to slide up and down and in and out freely within the 1. Stop engine, place machine in Park and set parking brake.
roll cage sliding surfaces.
2. Loosen left front wheel nuts slightly.
3. Elevate the machine until the front wheels are off the
Rollers ground and support machine under footrest/frame area.
CAUTION
Serious injury may result if machine tips or falls. Be

sure machine is secure before beginning this
service procedure. Wear eye protection when
removing and installing bearings and seals.
4. Remove left wheel nuts and wheel.

5. Remove cotter pin, lower ball joint nut and A-arm from
ball joint.
6. Pull the hub and strut assembly out and pull the drive-shaft
out of the hub.
7.15
FINAL DRIVE
7. Remove the roller pin from the front prop shaft. Use the Gearcase Installation
Roller Pin Removal Tool (PN 2872608).
1. To install gearcase, reverse removal procedures. Use new
8. Remove bolts securing the bottom of housing to the skid roll pin in front prop shaft.
plate frame. Bolts and fluid drain plug are accessible 2. Torque mounting bolts in skid plate to 30 ft.lbs. (41 Nm).
through the skid plate.
30ft.lbs. (41 Nm)
9. Remove vent line.

=T
10. Remove the front gearcase from left side of frame, pulling
both the remaining CV shaft and propshaft from the Gearcase Mounting Bolt Torque:
gearcase. Replace the circlips on the CV shaft ends prior 30ft.lbs. (41 Nm)
to reassembly.
Front Gearcase Removal

New Roll Pin
Remove 4 Bolts
3. Add the proper lubricant to the front gearcase. Check drain

plug for proper torque. Refer to Chapter 2 for fluid fill and
change information.
7.16
FINAL DRIVE
Coil Testing Disassembly / Inspection
Refer to the following tests in Chapter 10: NOTE: See “Gearcase Removal” on page 7.15
1. Drain and properly dispose of used oil. Remove any metal
See “ACTIVE DESCENT CONTROL (ADC) COIL” on
page 10.15 particles from the drain plug magnet.
2. Remove the piston pump assembly from the gearcase.
See “ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) COIL” on page 10.15
ADC Differential Hydraulic Circuit Bleeding

1. Make sure vehicle is parked on flat ground and allowed to
sit at least 30 minutes prior to bleeding hydraulic circuit.
2. Thoroughly clean area around and on remote reservoir and
hydraulic bleeders.
3. Remove reservoir cap and diaphragm assembly.
4. Make sure hydraulic oil inside reservoir is free of debris.
If any debris is found, use clean rag or suction device to
remove from the reservoir.
NOTE: Debris in reservoir may block porting and
produce inadequate bleeding of the system.
Decreased performance may be encountered with
inadequate bleed of the hydraulic circuit. NOTE: Piston pump assembly is a non-serviceable
item and should not be disassembled. Replace as an
5. Begin the bleeding process by filling reservoir to ‘MAX’
assembly if found to be damaged or non-working.
line with clean Polaris ADC oil.
6. Locate bleeder valves found on either side of differential 3. Remove bolts (arrows) retaining the outer cover plate
and remove the protective caps. assembly.
7. Turn bleeder valves counter-clockwise to loosen. Loosen
bleeder screw slowly, allowing oil and any trapped air to
flow out of fitting.
IMPORTANT: Do not allow hydraulic fluid in reservoir
7
to drain below minimum fill line. Close bleeder valve
before oil level falls below minimum fill line. Refilling
empty reservoir will result in air pockets becoming
trapped.
NOTE: If empty reservoir is encountered, filling of
fluid is still possible. Verify air is not trapped before
proceeding with step 7.
8. Continue steps 6-8 on both sides in sequence until no air
bubbles are seen when bleeding occurs.
9. Re-torque both bleeder valves to specification and reinstall
cover caps.
=T
Bleeder Valve Torque:
80 in. lbs. (9 Nm)
10. Fill reservoir with to a level midway between ‘MAX’ and

‘MIN’ fill lines. Verify no debris is found in reservoir oil.
11. Replace reservoir cap securely and wipe clean any residue.
7.17
FINAL DRIVE
4. Remove the outer cover plate assembly. Remove and 6. Remove the armature plate. Inspect the armature plate for
inspect the cover o-ring (1). Inspect thrust bearing (2) for wear, distortion or other damage. Replace component as
wear. Replace items as required. required.
NOTE: Thrust bearing (2) located between the two 7. Remove the spacer. Inspect for signs of wear or damage.
output assemblies is pressed into the clutch pack Replace component as required.
and is not removable. NOTE: locating pins (arrow) are for spacer
5. Remove the output clutch assemblies. Inspect the bearings, installation. Note for reassembly.
contact surfaces and splines of the output clutch for signs
of wear or damage. Visually inspect the clutch plate area.
If plates are steel-on-steel, or if the friction material is worn,
the assembly should be replaced.
NOTE: Excessive debris in the oil and/or noise

coming from the front drive on deceleration are key
indicators of clutch pack failure. Replace clutch as
an assembly if found to be worn or damaged.
NOTE: Locating pins / holes (circle) aid installation.
Note for reassembly.
7.18
FINAL DRIVE
8. Remove the ring gear (1) and spacer (2). 12. Inspect roll cage sliding surface (2). This surface must be
clean and free of nicks, burrs or scratches. Remove and
inspect the H-springs (4). Replace any components as
required.
1 2 4
2
9. Remove and inspect the bearing surfaces of the output hub.

10. Thoroughly clean all parts.
11. Inspect the rollers (1) for nicks, scratches and flat spots.
Inspect the roll cage (2) for damage or cracks. The rollers 13. Inspect the armature plate for a consistent wear pattern.
must slide up and down freely within the roller cage Uneven wear of the armature plate indicates a warped
surfaces. Inspect the ring gear (3) for consistent wear plate, which may cause intermittent operation.
patterns. Surfaces should be free of nicks or burrs.
NOTE: See “Front Gearcase Diagnosis” on
page 7.14
1 3 2
7.19
FINAL DRIVE
14. Inspect the magnetic coil (1) in the outer cover plate 16. Inspect the magnetic coil (1) and bushing in the input cover
assembly. Inspect the backlash pad (2) for excessive wear. plate assembly. Replace the input cover seal.
1 2
NOTE: See “FRONT GEARCASE DIAGNOSIS” in this 17. Remove the splined armature plate (1).
chapter.
NOTE: Ring gear backlash (2) is set at the factory.
No adjustment is required, unless the front cover is
replaced or the back lash pad screw is removed.
See the “FRONT GEARCASE ASSEMBLY” in this
chapter for details on backlash setting. 1
15. Remove the bolts retaining the input shaft cover and pinion
gear assembly.
18. Remove the eccentric cam assembly. Inspect the cam (1)
and bushing (2) for wear or damage. Replace component
as required.
7.20
FINAL DRIVE
19. Remove the snap ring retaining the input shaft assembly. ADC Gearcase Piston Replacement
Procedure
CAUTION
This repair procedure involves the

use of compressed air. Safety glasses
or a face shield are required.
1. Place ADC Piston Tool PA-48542 on top of the piston.

Using moderate hand pressure, hold the tool on top of the
piston while using compressed air at the gearcase passage
(circled) to force piston up and out of the case. (See photo)
AIR
20. Remove the input shaft assembly. Inspect the pinion gear
(1) for chipped, broken, or missing teeth. Inspect the input
shaft bearing (2) for signs of wear. Replace the input shaft
cover O-ring (3) prior to reassembly.
1 3
ADC Piston Tool
2 PA-48542
2. Repeat procedure for the other piston. (See photo) 7
21. Inspect the input shaft bushing. Replace case if worn.

AIR
PA-48542
3. Remove and discard the inner and outer o-rings from the
piston assembly.
NOTE: Never re-use o-rings. Always replace with
new.
7.21
FINAL DRIVE
4. Coat new piston and o-rings with a moderate amount of 6. Place ADC Piston Tool PA-48542 on top of the piston and
white lithium grease or assembly lube. Coat the edges of the verify alignment of the sight hole (circled) and piston mark
piston cavities. Install the inner and outer piston o-rings. with the casting marks. Support the case and press the
piston down evenly. The piston is fully seated and located
Outer in the pin bosses when the piston surface is just below the
cavity edge.
Inner
5. Place the piston in the piston cavity, aligning the pins with
the pin bosses. Using the casting and piston marks as a Tool PA-48542
guide as shown will aid pin alignment.
7. Repeat procedure for the other gearcase half.

NOTE: Verify that the o-rings are seated properly
and that no o-ring shavings exist outside of the
piston area, which is an indication of damage during
installation.
7.22
FINAL DRIVE
Assembly 5. Install the eccentric cam assembly (1).
1. Thoroughly clean the gearcase components before

beginning reassembly. 1
2. Install a new seal in the main gearcase halve.
3. Install the input shaft assembly. Install the pinion gear/

bearing assembly (1). Install a new seal and o-ring the
input shaft cover (2) prior to reassembly.
2
1
6. Install the splined armature plate (1).
4. Install the snap ring retaining the input shaft assembly. 1
7
7. Install the input shaft cover assembly, bolts and bracket.
Torque to specification.
=T
Input Cover Bolt Torque:
7-11 ft. lbs. (9.4-14.9 Nm)
7.23
FINAL DRIVE
8. Install a new seal (1) in the outer cover plate assembly. 10. Install the clutch pack (1), spacer (2) and ring gear (3).
Install a new o-ring on the backlash pad (2) stem . NOTE: Align locating pins / holes for installation.
1 2
3
2
1
NOTE: Ring gear backlash (2) is set at the factory. 11. Install the spacer.
No adjustment is required, unless the front cover is
NOTE: Align locating pins / holes for installation
(arrow).
9. Install the roll cage and rollers into the ring gear. Insert the
rollers as the roll cage is installed.
12. Install the armature plate. Verify the armature plate tabs
align with tab recesses in the roll cage.
7.24
FINAL DRIVE
13. Install new cover o-ring (1) on the cover plate assembly 15. Place cover assembly on Install bolts (arrows) retaining the
and a new passage o-ring (2) on the gear case. outer cover plate assembly and torque to specification.
14. Install the remaining output clutch assembly.

NOTE: Align locating pins / holes for installation. =T
7-11 ft. lbs. (9.4-14.9 Nm)
16. Install a new passage o-ring (dotted circle) on the gearcase

and install the piston pump assembly. Torque the screws to
specification.
=T
Pump Assembly Screw Torque:
17-23 in. lbs. (1.9-2.5 Nm)
NOTE: See “Gearcase Installation” on page 7.16
7.25
FINAL DRIVE
Setting Ring Gear Backlash 3. Turn the screw in until it is lightly seated, then turn the
screw out 1/4 turn.
NOTE: Ring gear backlash is set at the factory. No
4. Set the gearcase upright. Rotate the input shaft at least 4
adjustment is required, unless the front cover is
times. This ensures the ring gear completes one full
rotation.
1. The backlash screw has locking agent that holds it into
place. Use a heat gun to lightly heat up the locking agent
on the screw.
5. If a tight spot is felt during rotation, loosen the backlash

screw another 1/8 turn. Perform the step 16 again. Repeat
this procedure until the pinion shaft rotates smoothly 4
2. Using a 3/32 hex wrench, turn the back-lash screw out 3-4 times (1 revolution of ring gear).
turns. Re-apply Loctite 262™ onto the bottom screw
threads.
7.26
FINAL DRIVE
REAR HUB 8. Remove hub nut, domed washer and flat washer.
Removal
1. Place the ATV in Park and lock the parking brake.
Remove rear hub cap.
9. Remove hub.
B
C
2. Remove cotter pin (A).

3. Loosen the hub retaining nut (B).
4. Loosen the wheel nuts (C).
5. Safely support the rear of the ATV.
6.
7.
Remove wheel nuts and wheel.
Remove the rear brake caliper and safely suspend the
7
caliper from the frame with a piece of wire.
10. Remove upper control arm bolt as shown.
7.27
FINAL DRIVE
11. Remove both lower control arm bolts. 2. From the back side, tap on the outer bearing race with a drift
punch in the reliefs as shown or press out using a hydraulic
press.
12. Remove bearing carrier.

NOTE: Drive bearing out evenly by tapping on outer
Disassembly race only. Once bearing is at bottom of casting,
support casting on outer edges so bearing can be
1. Remove outer snap ring. removed.
3. Inspect bearing.
NOTE: Due to extremely close tolerances and
minimal wear, the bearings must be inspected
visually, and by feel. While rotating bearings by
hand, inspect for rough spots, discoloration, or
corrosion. The bearings should turn smoothly and
quietly, with no detectable up and down movement
and minimal movement sideways between inner and
outer race.
4. Inspect bearing housing for wear or damage. Replace
housing if damaged.
7.28
FINAL DRIVE
Assembly 3. Press bearing into place until outer race bottoms on
housing.
1. Support bottom of bearing carrier housing.
2. Start bearing in housing.

CAUTION
Use an arbor press only on the outer race

to avoid bearing damage.
4. Install snap ring into groove.
Installation
1. Insert bearing carrier on drive shaft.
2. Align bottom of carrier housing and lower control arm.
Grease and slide lower control arm bushings into place,
7
securing corner housing.
3. Install and torque both lower control arm bolts.
=T
Upper Control Arm Bolt Torque:
37 ft. lbs. (50 Nm)
7.29
FINAL DRIVE
REAR DRIVE (CV) SHAFT
=T
Removal
Lower Control Arm Bolt Torque:
37 ft. lbs. (50 Nm) 1. Remove rear hub, see “REAR HUB REMOVAL”.
2. Remove upper carrier bolt. Tip hub outward and remove
4. Lift bearing carrier until top aligns with upper control arm. shaft from carrier.
Install and torque upper control arm bolt and torque to
specification.
5. Pull drive shaft outward and install hub onto driveshaft
splines.
6. Install cone washers with domed side facing outward.
7. Install retainer nut, wheel and wheel nuts.
8. Remove jackstand and torque axle nut and wheel nuts to
specification.
3. Pull sharply outward to remove shaft from transmission.

Install a new compression ring upon assembly.
Pull outward sharply to remove

from transmission
=T
Wheel Nut Torque:
See “Torque Table” on page 7.2
=T
Rear Hub Nut Torque:
80 ft. lbs. (109 Nm) Compression Ring
9. Install a new cotter pin. Tighten nut slightly to align holes

if required.
7.30
FINAL DRIVE
Service 4. Refit CV joint on interconnecting shaft by tapping with a
soft-faced hammer on the joint housing. Take care not to
NOTE: The following procedure applies to BOTH damage threads on the outboard CV joint. The joint is fully
inner and outer CV joints. assembled when the compression ring is seated in the
1. Remove clamps from rubber boot(s) using CV Boot Clamp groove on the CV joint.
Tool PU-48951 (A) and slide back boot.
Tap joint onto shaft
5. Remove excess grease from the CV joint's external surfaces

2. Tap CV housing off shaft with a soft-faced hammer. and position the large boot joint over the CV housing,
making sure boot is seated in groove. Position clamp over
boot end and make sure clamp tabs are located in slots.
6. Install and tighten large boot clamp with the boot clamp
tool.
7. Remove excess grease from the CV shaft’s external
surfaces and position the small boot joint over the CV shaft,
making sure boot is seated in the shaft groove. While
7
pulling out on the CV shaft, fully extend the CV joint and
slide a straight O-ring pick or a small slotted screw driver
between the small end of the boot and the shaft. This will
allow the air pressure to equalize in the CV boot in the
position that the joint will spend most of its life. Position
the small clamp over boot end and make sure clamp tabs
are located in slots.
NOTE: Release any air pressure which may have
built up inside the boot has been released. The air
Tap CV housing off shaft
should be released after the joint has been centered
3. Place a new compression ring in the groove of the CV shaft. properly.
8. Tighten small boot clamp using the boot clamp tool.
7.31
FINAL DRIVE
CV Boot Replacement 8. Remove excess grease from the CV joint's external surfaces
and position the large boot joint over the CV housing,
1. Remove CV joint from end of shaft. making sure boot is seated in groove. Position clamp over
2. Remove boot from shaft. boot end and make sure clamp tabs are located in slots.
NOTE: When replacing a damaged boot, check the 9. Install and tighten large boot clamp with the boot clamp
grease for contamination by rubbing it between two tool.
fingers. A gritty feeling indicates contamination. If 10. Remove excess grease from the CV shaft’s external
the grease is not contaminated, the boot can be surfaces and position the small boot joint over the CV shaft,
replaced without cleaning the CV joint. Use the making sure boot is seated in the shaft groove. While
recommended amount of grease for boot pulling out on the CV shaft, fully extend the CV joint and
replacement only (see illustration). Proceed to step slide a straight O-ring pick or a small slotted screw driver
#5. between the small end of the boot and the shaft. This will
NOTE: Use only the Constant Velocity Joint grease allow the air pressure to equalize in the CV boot in the
supplied with boot service kit. IF CV JOINT WAS position that the joint will spend most of its life. Position
CLEANED, add the recommended amount of grease the small clamp over boot end and make sure clamp tabs
to the joint in addition to the grease pack supplied are located in slots.
with boot kit.
3. Thoroughly clean and dry the CV joint and inspect ball
tracks and cages for wear, cracks or other damage.
NOTE: Shiny areas in ball tracks and on the cage
spheres are normal. Do not replace CV joints
because parts have polished surfaces. Replace CV
joint only if components are cracked, broken, worn
or otherwise unserviceable.
11. Install the small clamp on the boot.

NOTE: CV Joint Grease Capacity:
Joint Capacity -
50 grams Joint Capacity - 50
grams
Boot Capacity -
30 Grams Boot Capacity - 50
4. Add the recommended amount of grease for CV joint grams
cleaning to the joint. Be sure grease penetrates all parts of
the joint. Outboard - 80g Total Inboard - 100g Total
5. Slide a new CV boot onto the shaft. Do not install the boot
clamps at this time.
6. Refit CV joint on the interconnecting shaft by tapping with
a soft-faced hammer on the joint housing. Take care not to CV Joint Grease:
damage threads on the outboard CV joint. The joint is fully 30g PN 1350046 50g PN 1350047
assembled when the compression ring is seated in the
groove on the CV joint. Outboard Joint - 30g if boot is replaced only. Another 50g (80
7. Add remaining grease through large end of boot. total) if joint is cleaned.
7.32
FINAL DRIVE
Inboard Joint - 50g if boot is replaced only. Another 50g (100 cotter pin and hub cap.
total) if joint is cleaned.
INSTALLATION =T
1. Slide shaft assembly into bearing carrier hub. Rear Hub Nut Torque:
80 ft. lbs. (109 Nm)
6. Install brake caliper and tighten bolts to specification. Refer

to Chapter 9.
7. Install rear wheel and torque wheel nuts to specification.
80 ft.lbs. (109 Nm)
2. Apply anti-seize compound to splines of shaft.

3. Install a new lock ring and install the shaft.
4. Lift bearing carrier into place and install bolt to upper
control arm. Torque bolt to specification.
Refer to Page 7.2 for Wheel Nut Torque.
8. Grease all fittings thoroughly with Premium U-Joint 7

Lubricant (PN 2871551).
Drive Shaft and CV Joint Handling Tips

Care should be exercised during driveshaft removal or when
servicing CV joints. Driveshaft components are precision parts.
Cleanliness and following these instructions is very important to

ensure proper shaft function and a normal service life.
• The complete driveshaft and joint should be handled by

getting hold of the interconnecting shaft to avoid
disassembly or potential damage to the driveshaft
joints.
=T • Over-angling of joints beyond their capacity could
result in boot or joint damage.
Upper Hub Carrier Bolt Torque:
• Make sure surface-ground areas and splines of shaft are
37 ft. lbs. (50 Nm) protected during handling to avoid damage.
5. Install hub, flat washer, domed washer (domed side out) • Do not allow boots to come into contact with sharp
and nut. Torque center hub nut to specification. Install new edges or hot engine and exhaust components.
• The driveshaft is not to be used as a lever arm to
position other suspension components.
• Never use a hammer and sharp tools to remove or to
install boot clamps.
7.33
FINAL DRIVE
• Be sure joints are thoroughly clean and that the proper REAR GEARCASE
amount and type of grease is used to refill when joint
boots are replaced and when joints are cleaned. Refer
to text for grease capacity of CV joints and CV joint Removal
boots.
1. Place ATV on a level surface and place transmission in
‘PARK’.
2. Loosen both rear wheel nuts.
3. Loosen both rear center hub nuts.
4. Lift and safely support rear of ATV so that the rear wheels
are off the ground.
5. Remove the roll pin from the rear transmission yoke and
pull vent line off the gearcase.
6. Remove both rear wheels and center hub nuts.
NOTE: Hub removal is not required to remove CV
shafts.
7. Remove both upper hub carrier bolts. Tilt hubs outward and
remove both CV shafts.
8. Remove the upper and lower bolts from the gearcase
mounts.
9. Pull gearcase out the rear of the vehicle. Some prying and
tapping with a soft-face hammer may be required. Use care
not to damage other components.
Disassembly and Inspection

1. Drain and properly dispose of used oil.
2. Remove the gearcase housing cover bolts and the gearcase
housing cover.
7.34
FINAL DRIVE
3. Remove the shim, thrust button, and thrust button shim 5. Inspect the ring gear for abnormal wear, broken, or chipped
from the gearcase. teeth. Spin the bearing to check the ball bearings for
smoothness. Replace the bearing if needed.
6. Remove the input shaft cover and the pinion shaft from the
gearcase housing. See next page.
Thrust Button
Shims
7. Inspect the ring gear for abnormal wear, broken, or chipped
teeth. Spin the bearing to check the ball bearings for
smoothness. Replace the bearing if needed.
7
4. Remove rear bevel gear from the gearcase housing. cover.
7.35
FINAL DRIVE
Reassembly
=T
1. Inspect the pinion shaft bushing for wear.
25 ft.lbs. (34 Nm)
4. Install the original shim(s), thrust button, and thrust button

shims into the gearcase cover.
2. Replace all O-rings, seals, and worn components.
5. Apply Crankcase Sealant (PN 2871557) to surface of case

and install cover bolts. Install the gearcase cover onto the
gearcase housing. Torque the cover bolts in a criss-cross
pattern to specification.
3. Install the pinion shaft into the gearcase housing. Install the
pinion shaft cover and torque the cover bolts to
specification.
=T
Cover Bolt Torque:
25 ft.lbs. (34 Nm)
7.36
FINAL DRIVE
6. Install the drain plug and fill plug. Replace the drain plug 4. Re-install CV shafts, hubs, carrier bolts, etc. and torque to
washers to ensure proper sealing after filling. specifications.
=T
Lower Control Arm Bolt Torque:
37 ft. lbs. (50 Nm)
=T
Upper Control Arm Bolt Torque:
Fill Plug 37 ft. lbs. (50 Nm)
Drain Plug
=T
Rear Hub Nut Torque:
=T 80 ft. lbs. (109 Nm)
Drain / Fill Plug Torque:

14-18 ft.lbs. (19-24 Nm) =T
Installation Wheel Nut Torque:

See “Torque Table” on page 7.2
1. To install the rear gearcase, reverse the removal
procedures. 5. Re-install gearcase vent line.
2. Pre-install the propshaft onto the transmission and insert 6. Refill the rear gearcase with Polaris Premium Gearcase
the roll pin. While installing the gearcase, align the Lubricant (PN 2871653). Refer to the “REAR
GEARCASE LUBRICATION” procedure in Chapter 2.
propshaft and gearcase input shaft for easier propshaft
installation. Use of anti-seize compound on the shaft 7
splines is recommended.
3. Torque the gearcase mounting bolts to specification.
=T
Gearcase Mounting Bolts
30 ft.lbs. (41 Nm)
7.37
FINAL DRIVE
Rear Gearcase Exploded View
7.38
TRANSMISSION
CHAPTER 8
TRANSMISSION
SPORTSMAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3-8.18
SPORTSMAN X2 / TOURING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.19-8.38
d
ve
er
es
R
h ts
ig
R
ll
-A
s
rie
st
du
In
8
r is
la
Po
©
8.1
8.2
NOTES
TRANSMISSION
©
Po
la
ris
In
du
st
rie
s
-A
ll
R
ig
h ts
R
es
er
ve
d
SPORTSMAN TRANSMISSION
CHAPTER 8
TRANSMISSION EXPLODED VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4
SPORTSMAN TRANSMISSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6
LUBRICANT / CAPACITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6
TRANSMISSION SERVICE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6
TRANSMISSION REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6
DISASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.12
TRANSMISSION INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.17
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.18
d
ve
er
es
R
h ts
ig
R
ll
-A
s
rie
st
du
In
8
r is
la
Po
©
8.3
TRANSMISSION EXPLODED VIEW
Sportsman Transmission
d
ve
er
es
R
hts
ig
R
ll
-A
s
rie
st
du
In
isr
la
Po
©
8.4
Transmission Exploded View Table
REF. QTY DESCRIPTION REF. QTY. DESCRIPTION

1 1 Nylon Lock Nut 35 1 Output Front Cover
2 1 Shift Drum Bell Crank 36 15 Hex Screw
3 8 Hex Screw 37 1 Gear Set, Lapped Bevel, 10T/31T
4 1 Sector Cover 38 1 Ball Bearing, includes 56, 61, 67
5 1 O-ring 39 1 Spacer
6 1 Detent Pawl 40 1 Retaining Ring
7 1 Compression Spring 41 1 Center Drive Bearing Cover
8 1 Shift Shaft 42 4 Torx Screws
9 1 31T Sector Gear 43 1 56T Helical Gear
10 2 Hollow Hex Plug 44 4 Ball Bearing
11 2 Triple Lip Seal 45 1 12 Face Park Plate
d
12 1 Main Gearcase 46 1 6 Face Park Engagement Dog
ve
13 1 Vent Tube 47 2 Wave Spring
er
14 1 O-ring 48 3 6 Face Engagement Dog
es
15 1 Shift Drum 49 2 Retaining Ring
R
16 1 Retaining Ring 50 2 Washer
ts
17 1 6 Pin Rotary Switch 51 1 33T- 6 Face Gear
h
18 1 O-ring 52 3 Needle Split Cage Bearing
ig
R
19 1 Detent Star 53 1 Reverse Shaft
20 1 Lockout Disc 54 1 24T, 6 Face
ll
-A
21 1 16T Sector Gear 55 1 Washer

22 2 Hex Nut 56 1 28T, 6 Face Gear, Includes 38, 61, 67
s
rie
23 4 Dowel Pin 57 1 51T Mid Output Helical Gear

24 1 Plain Bearing 58 2 Shift Fork
st
25 4 Ball Bearings 59 1 Shift Shaft Rail

du
26 1 22T/18T Sprocket 60 1 Silent Chain

In
27 1 22T/22T Spline Sprocket 61 1 Input Shaft Sub- Assy, Includes 38, 56, 67
8
is
28 1 Silent Chain 62 1 LH Main Cover

r
la
29 1 Thrust Washer 63 1 Dual Lip Seal

Po
30 1 Vent Plug 64 1 Transmission Mount Bracket

31 1 Front Main Output Shaft 65 2 Hex Screw
©
32 1 Shim, 2.0 x 1.5 66 1 Oil Fill Check Label

33 1 Thrust Button 67 1 Transmission Label
34 1 Shim, .450 x .265
8.5
SPECIFICATIONS TRANSMISSION SERVICE
Torque Specifications Transmission Removal
Table 8-1: Torque Specifications NOTE: Some transmission illustrations are depicted
with Park Lock. Park Lock has been removed.
FT.LBS.
COMPONENT NM 1. Disconnect link rod from gear selector handle.
(IN.LBS.)
2. Remove two bolts attaching gear selector mount to machine
Transmission Case Bolts 27-34 37-46 frame.
3. Lift gear selector out of mounting bracket and away from
Oil Deflector Screws (16-30) 2-3.3
frame.
Shift Cover Bolt 6-12 8-16 4. Remove seat, side panels, rear rack, rear cab, air box,
Bell Crank Nut 12-18 16-24 exhaust system, and footwells (as required for access).
5. Disconnect transmission vent line.
Trans. Drain/Fill Plug 14 19 6. Drain transmission lubricant.
d
Trans. Mounting Bolts 25 34.5 7. Disconnect shift link rod end from transmission bellcrank.
ve
Snorkel Lock Screw 8-12 11-16 Shift Link Rod
er
es
Lubricant / Capacity
R
Use only Polaris recommended products if possible.
h ts
= ig
R
ll
-A

s
(Gallon - PN 2873603) (12 oz. - PN 2873602) Transmission

rie
Switch
Capacity: 15 oz. (450 ml)
st
du
8. Disconnect gear position switch harness.

In
=T
is
Fill Plug Torque: 14 ft.lbs. (19 Nm)

r
la
Po
Drain Plug Torque: 14 ft.lbs. (19 Nm)

©
9. Remove auxiliary brake mounting bracket from frame and

secure out of way for transmission removal.
10. Remove PVT outer cover, both drive and driven clutch, and
inner PVT cover (refer to Clutch Chapter 6).
8.6
11. Use the Roll Pin Removal Tool (PN 2872608) to remove Disassembly
the pins from the front prop shaft and the rear prop shaft.
Remove the front propshaft yoke from the transmission. 1. Place the bellcrank in neutral position.
Shift Shaft
Cover
Remove Roll Pin

Bellcrank Detent Pawl Case
d
ve
2. Remove the nut, and washer that secure the bell crank.
er
12. To remove the rear propshaft, loosen or remove the bolts Remove the bellcrank.
es
that secure the rear gearcase. Move the rear gearcase back
3. Remove the e-clip and then remove the transmission switch
just enough to slide the rear propshaft from the transmission
R
(A).
shaft.
h ts
A
ig
R
ll
-A
s
rie
st
du
In
8
ris
la
Po
Remove or loosen Rear

Gearcase Bolts
©
13. Remove left side transmission bracket, rear bracket, and

lower right bracket bolt.
14. Remove front transmission-to-engine mount bolts. See
illustration.
15. Remove transmission from right side of frame.
8.7
4. Remove the five bolts that secure the cover. Remove the NOTE: It may be helpful to place a mark just above
detent spring (B). the keyed spline. Note the raised edge on the detent
gear for reassembly.
7. Remove the shift shaft and detent lever.
d
ve
5. Mark the detent gear (C) with a white pen. Remove the
er
detent gear from the case.
es
8. Note the timing marks on the shift gears. Remove the shift
R
gears from the case.
h ts
C R
ig
ll
-A
s
rie
st
du
In
is
NOTE: It may be helpful to place a mark just above

r
la
the keyed spline. Note the raised edge on the detent

Po
gear for reassembly.

NOTE: You may have to tap the shift drum from the
6. Mark the shift lockout disc, this will indicate which side of backside of the case to aid in removal.
©
the disc faces outward during assembly. Remove the shift

lockout disc.
8.8
9. Remove the upper gear cluster and shift forks. You may 12. Remove the bearing from the reverse shaft using a puller.
need to move the assembly back and forth to aid in removal.
d
13. Remove the park lock engagement dog. Remove the wave
ve
10. Set the upper gear cluster on a flat surface and inspect the spring and reverse engagement dog.
er
components.
es
R
h ts
ig
R
ll
-A
Engagement Dogs
s
rie
st
du
In
8
is
14. Remove the bearing from the input shaft with a puller.
r
11. Remove the shift forks from the assembly. Note the correct
la
position of each fork.

Po
©
8.9
15. Remove the snap ring and washer from the reverse shaft. 19. Use a press to remove the gear from the shaft.
d
ve
16. Remove low gear (33T) and the needle bearing. 20. Make note of the direction of the gear and hub location.
er
es
R
h ts
ig
R
ll
-A
s
rie
st
du
In
17. Remove the reverse gear shaft. 21. Remove the gear, split bearing, and washer from the reverse
shaft.
ris
la
Po
©
18. Remove the rest of the bearings from the shafts.
8.10
22. Slide off the shift dogs and wave springs. 25. Remove the pinion shaft retainer plate and the pinion shaft.
d
26. Remove the front housing cover screws.
ve
23. Remove the snap ring, washer, gear, and split bearing.
er
es
R
h ts
ig
R
ll
-A
s
rie
st
du
27. Remove the front housing cover, shim, thrust button, and
In
24. Remove bearing and the helical gear. thrust button shim. 8
ris
la
Po
©
8.11
28. Remove the shafts as an assembly. Assembly
1. Reinstall the chain onto the front output shaft and rear
output shaft.
d
29. Remove the silent chain from the assembly for shaft
ve
inspection.
er
2. Install front and rear output shafts into the case.
es
Note location of hubs
R
h ts
ig
R
ll
-A
s
rie
st
du
In
30. Clean all components in a parts washer and inspect for

is
wear. 3. Before installing the cover make sure the sealing surfaces
r
la
31. Inspect engagement dogs of gears and replace if edges are are clean and dry, and shafts are fully seated in the
Po
rounded. transmission case. Apply Crankcase Sealant (PN 2871557)

to the mating surfaces.
32. Inspect gear teeth for wear, cracks, chips or broken teeth.
©
Note the location of the hubs on the gear.

33. Remove seals from transmission case.
IMPORTANT: New seals should be installed after the
transmission is completely assembled.
34. Inspect bearings for smooth operation. Check for excessive
play between inner and outer race.
Apply Crankcase Sealant to mating surfaces.
8.12
4. Reinstall the thrust button shim, thrust button, and other 8. Apply Loctite™ 262 (Red) (PN 2871951) to screw threads
shims into the cover. Reinstall cover and torque bolts in a and torque screws to specification.
criss-cross pattern in 3 steps to specification.
NOTE: Verify case locating pins (knock pipes) are in
place.
d
ve
er
=T
es
R
Pinion Retainer Plate Bolt Torque:
6-12 ft.lbs. (8-16 Nm)
ts
=T
h
9. Install the a new needle bearing, the 24T reverse sprocket,
Cover Bolt Torque: ig
washer, and a new snap ring. Install the shift dogs and wave
R
27-34 ft.lbs. (36.5-46 Nm)
Torque in Sequence spring. Install the washer, a new needle bearing and the
ll
-A
high gear. Install the press fit gear and ball bearing.
5. Install new front and rear output shaft seals. Apply grease
s
to the seal lips. Cover the splines of the shaft to protect the
rie
seal lips during installation.

st
6. Install pinion shaft with bearing.

du
7. Install retainer plate with flat side toward bearing.

In
8
ris
la
Po
©
NOTE: Install a new snap ring at this time. When

installing the new snap ring, open the snap ring just
far enough to go over the shaft, to avoid stressing
the snap ring. If the snap ring is over-stressed, it
could come off the shaft and cause internal damage
to the transmission.
8.13
10. Slide the reverse shaft assembly through the silent chain. 14. As the engagement dogs are installed onto the shaft, place
the wave springs into the spring groove. Keep the spring
in place while the fork is being installed on the shaft and
while placing the shafts into the case.
d
ve
11. Install a new needle bearing, the low gear, the thrustwasher
and the snap ring. A new snap ring is recommended.
er
12. Install the engagement dogs, wave springs, and bearing.
es
NOTE: Use caution when installing the fork, as the
R
spring can easily fall out.
h ts
NOTE: Installing the shift rail will aid in keeping the
ig
shift forks, shift dogs, and the springs in place.
R
15. Carefully install the shaft assembly and gear cluster as a
ll
-A
unit into their respective bearing case recesses. Tap with a

soft face hammer to seat shaft assemblies.
s
rie
st
du
In
r is
13. Install the ball bearing onto the end of the input shaft.
la
Po
©
8.14
16. Position the shift forks up and so the pins point toward the 19. Lift the shift rail slightly and rotate the rail/fork assembly
9 o'clock position, before installing the shift drum so it meshes with the tracks on the shiftdrum. Be sure the
assembly. wave springs are properly in place and that the shift rail is
seated into the pocket on the backside of the case.
20. Install the helical gear and bearing onto the pinion shaft.
21. Clean the mating surfaces of the case and cover. Apply
Crankcase Sealant (PN 2871557) to the mating surfaces.
Be sure the locating pins (knock pipes) are in place.
Reinstall cover, LH mounting bracket and torque bolts in a
criss-cross pattern in 3 steps to specification.
d
ve
er
17. Replace and grease the O-rings on the shift drum before
es
installation.
R
h ts
ig
R
ll
-A
=T
s
rie
Cover Bolt Torque:

27-34 ft.lbs. (36.5-46 Nm)
st
du
22. Grease the seal lips of the input shaft seal. Apply
In
electricians tape or somehow cover the splines of the shaft

to protect the seal lips during installation. Install new input 8
is
shaft seal.
r
la
18. Install the shift drum into the case.

23. Install drain plug with a new sealing washer. Torque drain
Po
plug to specification.
©
NOTE: Make sure shift shaft pins are properly

positioned in the slot on selector arms.
8.15
24. Place a small amount of grease (PN 2871551) into the 27. Apply Crankcase Sealant (PN 2871557) onto the cover and
pocket before installing the sector gear. Install the shift gear case mating surfaces. Install the cover and hand tighten all
(16T) on the shift drum shaft. Install the sector gear in the of the bolts.
bushing pocket on the left side. Aligning the timing marks
on the gears.
NOTE: Note the location of the skip tooth on the
splines. Apply a light coating of grease on the gear
teeth.
25. Install the shift shaft and the detent star. Note the keyed
spline on the end of the shaft.
Install Cover Bolts
d
ve
28. Tighten bottom left corner bolt first. This helps to align the
er
cover and shafts to ensure smoother and precise shifting.
es
Torque the bolt to specification.
R
h ts
ig
R
ll
-A
26. Install the detent pawl and spring. Install a new o-ring onto
s
the shift shaft after the detent pawl is assembled to the shaft.
rie
Place a small amount of grease on the small o-ring on the

st
shift shaft and on the detent star. Grease the o-ring on the
du
end of the shift drum.

In
Tighten First
ris
la
29. Torque the remaining bolts to specification.

Po
=T
©
Cover Bolt Torque:

6-12 ft.lbs. (12-16 Nm)
30. Install a new bellcrank onto the shift shaft. Note the keyed
spline on the bellcrank and shaft. Install the washer and nut.
8.16
Torque the bellcrank nut to specification. Transmission Installation
1. Install transmission from right side of vehicle.
2. Align output shafts to propshaft yokes and roll pin holes.
3. Slide output shafts into propshaft yokes and insert roll pins.
4. Position transmission in frame.
5. Loosely install left side and rear mounting brackets.
6. Loosely install lower right bracket bolt.
7. Loosely install front mounting bolts.
8. Install PVT back cover, bolts and driven clutch and torque
to specification.
IMPORTANT: Align clutches as outlined in Chapter 6
9. Tighten mounting fasteners in order A-F as shown.
Tighten Bolts in Sequence
d
ve
=T
er
A D
es
Torque Bellcrank Nut:
C
R
12-18 ft.lbs. (16-24 Nm)
hts
NOTE: Rotate the bellcrank to line the flat side of the
switch up to the flat side of the shaft. ig
R
B
ll
-A
s
F
rie
st
E
du
In
8
ris
=T
la
Po
Transmission Mounting Bolt Torque:

25 ft.lbs. (34.5 Nm)
©
10. Tighten rear gearcase fasteners to specification. Refer to

31. Install the shift switch. Install the retaining clip. Chapter 7.
32. Install transmission and add Polaris AGL Gearcase 11. Install shift switch and shift rod.
Lubricant (PN 2873 602) in the recommended amount. 12. Install remaining body panels and fasteners as required.
Refer to Maintenance Chapter 2 for more information.
8.17
Troubleshooting
Check the following items when shifting difficulty is
encountered.
• Idle speed adjustment
• PVT mis-alignment
• Transmission oil type/quality
• Transmission torque stop adjustment (where applicable)
• Engine torque stop adjustment (where applicable)
• Drive belt deflection
• Loose fasteners on rod ends
• Loose fasteners on selector box
• Worn rod ends, clevis pins, or pivot arm bushings
d
ve
• Link rod adjustment and rod end positioning
er
• Shift selector travel
es
• *Worn, broken or damaged internal transmission
R
components
ts
NOTE: *To determine if shifting difficulty or problem
h
is caused by an internal transmission problem,
isolate the drive train by disconnecting the link rod ig
R
from the transmission bellcrank. Manually select
ll
each gear range at the transmission bellcrank and

-A
test ride the vehicle. If it functions properly, the

problem is outside the transmission. If transmission
s
rie
problems remain, disassemble the transmission and

inspect.
st
du
In
is
r
la
Po
©
8.18
X2 / Touring Transmission
CHAPTER 8
TRANSMISSION EXPLODED VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.20
TRANSMISSION EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.20
MOUNTING EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.22
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.23
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.23
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.23
LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.23
TRANSMISSION SERVICE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.23
GEAR SELECTOR REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.23
TRANSMISSION REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.23
TRANSMISSION INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.25
TROUBLESHOOTING CHECKLIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.26
d
TRANSMISSION DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.27
ve
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.32
er
TRANSMISSION FRONT OUTPUT SHAFT BACKLASH PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . 8.33
es
R
h ts
ig
R
ll
-A
s
rie
st
du
In
8
r is
la
Po
©
8.19
TRANSMISSION EXPLODED VIEWS
Transmission Exploded View
262 = THREAD LOCKING AGENT FOR ALL ‘FT. LBS.’ FASTENERS
242 = THREAD LOCKING AGENT FOR ‘INCH LBS. ‘ FASTENERS
d
ve
er
es
R
hts
ig
R
ll
-A
s
rie
st
du
In
r is
la
Po
©
8.20
262
242
262
d
ve
er
es
262
R
hts
ig
R
ll
-A
s
rie
st
du
In
8
isr
la
Po
262
©
262
8.21
Mounting Exploded View
x1
x1
x2
x4
d
ve
er
es
x4
R
hts
ig
R
ll
-A
s
rie
st
du
In
x1
isr
la
Po
x2
x3
©
8.22
SPECIFICATIONS TRANSMISSION SERVICE
Torque Specifications Gear Selector Removal
1. Disconnect linkage rod from gear selector handle.
COMPONENT FT. LBS. NM 2. Remove two bolts attaching gear selector mount to machine
(IN.LBS.) frame.
Transmission Case Bolts 25-30 36-43 3. Lift gear selector out of mounting bracket and away from
frame.
Bell Crank Nut 12-18 17-26
Transmission Fill/Drain Plug 20-25 29-36 Transmission Removal
Trans. Mounting Bolts 40 57 1. Place vehicle in “park”. Raise and securely support rear of
Gear Sector Cover 8-12 11-17 ATV at the frame. Remove both rear wheels.
2. Drain transmission lubricant (if required).
Oil Deflector Screws (20-30) 2-3.6
3. Remove seat, both side panels, both rear cab quarter panels
Snorkel Torx Screw 8-12 11-17 and both footwells. See Chapter 5.
d
ve
Bearing Cover 8-12 11-17 4. Disconnect the differential, speed sensor and gear selection
switch connectors from the transmission.
er
Carrier Cover 23-27 33-39 5. Disconnect transmission vent line (A).
es
Shift Fort Retainer Screws 8-12 11-17
R
Park Plate 8-12 11-17
h ts
Differential Solenoid 23-27 33-39
Speed Sensor 8-12 11-17 ig
R
A
ll
-A
Special Tools
s
TOOL
rie
PART NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
st
2871695 (Part of 2871702 Kit) Backlash Setting Tool

du
Rear Output Seal

In
2871698 (Part of 2871702 Kit)

Driver 6. Disconnect shift linkage rod end (B) from transmission 8
is
bellcrank (C).
Rear Driveshaft Seal
r
2871699 (Part of 2871702 Kit)

la
Guide
Po
Bearing Seal Driver

2871282
(50 mm)
©
B
PA-50231 Snorkel Tool C
Lubrication
Specified Lubricant
Polaris AGL Fluid
Gearcase Capacity
7. Remove PVT outer cover, drive and driven clutches, and
Approx. 32 oz. (948ml)
the inner PVT cover. (refer to Chapter 6).
Refer to Chapter 2 for transmission lubricant service.
8.23
8. Remove both rear drive shafts. Brake caliper removal is 14. Remove the middle transmission support bracket (K)
required. Do not let calipers hang by the brake line. (See completely from the ATV.
Chapters 7 and 9)
9. Remove both upper shock absorber mounting bolts and
swing shocks away from the transmission.
K
10. Remove the torsion bar mountings from the control arms.
11. Remove all fasteners (X) attaching the torsion mount, and
completely remove the mount (Z) from the ATV.
X
X
X
d
15. Remove the rear transmission support brackets (L)
ve
X completely from the ATV.
Z
er
es
R
12. Remove both upper control arms (I). Refer to Chapter 7 for
ts
more details.
h
H ig
R
ll
-A
L
s
rie
st
du
In
is
I
r
16. Lift and remove transmission out right side of frame while
la
pulling the output shaft from the propshaft yoke.

Po
13. Remove all lower transmission mounting fasteners (J) from

©
each side.
8.24
Transmission Installation 6. Reconnect the torsion bar to both lower control arms.
Torque to specification.
1. Apply Polaris Premium All Season Grease (PN 2871423)
to splines of front output shaft ,install new O–ring in prop
shaft. =T
2. With the help of an assistant, rotate transmission into place
from the right side of the frame, aligning the forward Lower Torsion Bar Bolt Torque: 17 ft.lbs. (24 Nm)
transmission bracket into the rear engine mounting holes
7. Install both upper shock absorber mounts and torque to
while ensuring that the output shaft and propshaft align and
specification.
slide together.
3. Loosely install lower transmission mounting fasteners and
forward engine mounting nuts. =T
Shock Bolt Torque: 30 ft.lbs. (43 Nm)
8. Apply anti-seize to splines of rear drive shafts and insert

drive shafts into carriers and transmission. Install rear
d
carriers and hubs.
ve
Torque lower carrier bolts to specification. Torque all other
er
control arm bolts and remaining carrier bolts to
es
specification.
R
Apply anti-seize to splines
h ts
ig
R
4. Install the rear support bracket, middle support bracket and
torsion bar support bracket. Torque all lower bracket bolts
ll
-A
to specification. Torque all upper rear and middle support

bracket bolts (circled) to specification.
s
rie
st
du
In
=T 8
ris
la
Upper Carrier Bolt Torque: 50 ft.lbs. (71 Nm)

Po
All Other Carrier Bolts: 35 ft.lbs. (50 Nm)

©
=T
Transmission Bracket Bolt Torque:
Lower - 40 ft.lbs. (57Nm)
Upper Rear / Middle Bolts - 17 ft.lbs. (24 Nm)
5. Install the upper control arms. Refer to Chapter 5 for

procedures and torque specifications.
8.25
9. Install the rear hubs, rear brake disc and brake caliper. Refer 16. Install the rear wheel nuts and torque to specification.
to Chapters 5 and 9 for procedures and torque
specifications.
d
ve
10. Install PVT system. Refer to Chapter 6 PVT section for Rear Wheel Nut Torque
procedures and torque specifications.
er
Refer to Chapter 2
11. Once the PVT system is installed. Tighten all remaining
es
transmission mounting bolts to specification. See page 8.2
R
for transmission bolt placement. 17. With the ATV on level ground, add Polaris AGL Gearcase
ts
Lubricant to the proper level. See Chapter 2 for proper fill
h
procedures and Torque Specifications.
=T
ig
R
Transmission Mount Bolt Torque:
ll
-A
40 ft.lbs. (57Nm) (PN 2873602) (12 oz.)

(PN 2873603) (Gallon)
12. Install transmission vent line. Be sure vent line is not kinked
s
rie
or pinched.
13. Install seat, both side panels, both rear cab quarter panels
st
Troubleshooting Checklist
and both footwells. See Chapter 5.
du
14. Reconnect the differential, speed sensor and gear selection Check the following items when shifting difficulty is
In
switch connectors to the transmission. encountered.

is
15. Reconnect the shift rod. Torque to standard specification. • Idle speed adjustment
r
la
• Transmission oil type/quality

Po
• Drive belt deflection

©
• *Worn, broken or damaged internal transmission

components
8.26
Transmission Disassembly 6. Remove the compression spring (7).
1. Place the transmission in the Neutral gear before

disassembly.
2. Drain and properly dispose of transmission oil. See Chapter
2.
3. Remove the bellcrank nut (1) and remove the bellcrank (2).
4. Remove the c-clip (3) that holds the gear selector switch (4)
onto the shaft and remove the selector switch.
3 4
2
1
7
7. Remove the detent star (8). Note how the detent star fits
d
onto the splined shaft and the raised edge facing outward
ve
for reassembly.
er
8. Remove the lockout disc (9). Note the raised edge facing
es
outward for reassembly.
R
9. Remove the shift shaft (10) and the shift gears (11,12).
NOTE: Note the timing marks on the shift gears (12,13)
ts
for reassembly.
h
5. Remove the sector cover bolts (5) and remove the sector
cover (6). Removal can be aided by using your thumbs to ig
R
press down on the shafts and pulling up the cover with your 12
13
ll
fingers. 7
-A
11
5 6
s
10
rie
st
du
In
9 8
is
8
r
la
Po
©
8.27
10. Remove all cover bolts. Using suitable pry tools, remove 12. Remove the cam chain tensioner spring (14). Slide the cam
the cover using the designated pry points. Tap cover with chain tensioner shoe (15), pins (16), and cam chain
soft face hammer to remove. The pry points are indicated tensioner cam (17) from the assembly.
by the white arrows in the photo below.
Pry points
17
16 16
d
14 15
ve
er
13. Remove the differential gear (18) and chain by gently
CAUTION prying underneath or tapping the differential gear from the
es
opposite side until it tips toward the output gear (19). The
R
Do not pry on case-halve sealing surfaces. Use differential gear is connected to the shift fork and must slide
only the designated pry points on the
ts
backwards to clear the fork arms once the chain is removed.
transmission.
h
ig
R
ll
-A
s
rie
st
du
In
18
is
19
17
r
la
14. Remove the T20 screws that secure the oil deflector (20)
Po
with a T20 hex socket or driver.

©
11. Note location of chain tensioner cam (17). If fully extended, 20

chain is worn beyond service limit. Replace chain and chain
tensioner shoe.
8.28
15. Remove the T27 screws that secure the output gear (21)
with a T27 hex socket or driver.
21
Gear Cluster Disassembly

16. Remove the shift drum (22) from the gearcase by moving
d
the drum up and to the right to clear the shift shaft.
ve
er
22
es
R
h ts
ig
R
Reverse
ll
Shaft
-A
Needle
Bearing (2)
s
rie
33T Gear (3)

st
Washer
du
Retaining Ring
In
17. Remove the output gear (21) and gear cluster assembly
from the gearcase by pulling both assemblies straight up. Engagement Bearing 8
is
Place the gear cluster assembly on a clean surface for Dog (1)
r
la
inspection. Input Shaft

Po
Bearing
Bearing
©
21
18. Remove the bearing from the reverse shaft using a bearing
puller. Slide the engagement dog (1) off of the reverse shaft.
19. Remove the retaining ring and washer from the reverse
shaft.
20. Remove the bearing from the input shaft using a bearing
puller.
21. Remove the 33T gear (3) and needle bearing (2) from the
reverse shaft.
8.29
22. The reverse shaft should slide out of the silent chain (4) to 26. To disassemble the shift fork rail remove the snap ring (10)
separate the assembly. from the end of the shift rail on either side.
10
4
10
CAUTION
23. Remove the rest of the bearings from the shafts. Use caution when disassembling the shift rail. The
d
compressed springs on the shift rail may pop off causing
ve
24. Remove the engagement dog (5) from the reverse shaft.
eye or face injury.
er
REVERSE SHAFT
es
Transmission Snorkel Shaft Removal
R
27. Remove the snorkel lock screw located inside the gearcase.
ts
Use a T27 hex socket or driver.
h
ig
R
ll
-A
s
rie
st
5
du
9
In
8
is
7
r
6
la
28. Remove the seal from the output shaft to access the snorkel
Po
Towards Inside tube for removal.

of Case
©
25. Remove the retaining ring (6) and then washer (7), gear (8),
and split bearing (9) from the reverse shaft.
8.30
29. Use Snorkel Tool PA-50231 to loosen and remove the front 31. Use a press to remove the snorkel tube from the snorkel
drive shaft snorkel tube. shaft
32. Remove the snap ring and shim retaining the bearing in the
snorkel tube.
PA-50231
Shim
d
ve
er
es
R
h ts
Snap Ring
ig
R
ll
-A
33. Lightly tap on the bearing from the opposite side to remove
it from the snorkel tube.
s
rie
30. Remove the snap ring and shim from the snorkel shaft.
st
du
In
8
ris
la
Po
©
8.31
34. To remove the remaining bearing on the snorkel shaft, 2. Reverse the disassembly procedure for the assembly of the
remove the retaining ring and press the bearing off. snorkel shaft assembly.
3. Apply a small amount of white lithium grease on the threads
d
Transmission Reassembly of the snorkel tube.
ve
er
1. Install all new seals in the gearcases. Use the Rear Output Grease
Seal Driver (PN 2871698) and Rear Driveshaft Seal Guide
es
(PN 2871699) to install the seals into the gearcases. See
R
illustration 1 to identify seals for replacement.
h ts
ig
R
ll
-A
s
rie
2871698
2871699
st
4. Install the snorkel shaft into the gearcase. Using Snorkel

du
Tool PA-50231, turn the snorkel tube approximately 10 full

In
rotations. Do not completely tighten the snorkel tube.

r is
la
Po
LH Gearcase
Cover Seals
©
PA-50231
Gearcase Seal
8.32
5. Inspect the output gear assembly, replace bearings if • Before turning the snorkel tube, look down into the
needed. Inspect the 91T gear for damage, chips, or gearcase at the snorkel lock screw hole opening (Photo
2) to reference your starting point. Next, slowly rotate
abnormal worn teeth. the snorkel tube counter-clockwise (Photo 1), counting
the number of notches passing through the thread hole
as you rotate the tube. Rotate the snorkel tube to the
7th notch from ‘seated’ position (Photo 1 & 2) using
tool PA-50231.
• Check the output shaft gear backlash again by feel. If
the output shaft lash appears to be too tight, rotate the
snorkel shaft counter-clockwise to the next notch (8th
notch).
d
ve
er
6. Install the output gear assembly. Be sure to properly mesh
the snorkel shaft bevel gear with the output bevel gear.
es
Install the 4 torx screws to secure the output gear assembly PA-50231
R
in place. Torque screws to specification. 1
ts
NOTICE! : It is important to set zero lash between the
h
output gear and the snorkel shaft gear. If there is binding or
excess lash, tighten or loosen the snorkel shaft until there ig
R
is zero lash. Count 7 notches of snorkel tube through
ll
lock screw hole.

-A
A
s
rie
st
du
In
8
r is
la
Po
2
©
=T
Output Gear Retaining Screw Torque:
8-12 ft.lbs. (11-17 Nm)
Transmission Output Shaft Backlash

procedure and Reassembly
1. The following steps must be performed to obtain proper
front output gear backlash adjustment:
• Upon completion of Step 6, make sure the snorkel gear 3

and output bevel gear are lightly seated or meshing so
there is ‘zero’ lash. Do not overtighten. Gears should
rotate freely without binding.
8.33
2. Once the snorkel gear backlash is found, to install the 4. Assemble the input shaft assembly if previously
snorkel lock screw and torque to specification. disassembled.
A. Ball Bearing Input Shaft Assembly
B. Input Shaft
C. Silent Chain
8-12 ft.-lbs. (11-17) Nm
A
B
5. Assemble the reverse shaft assembly if previously

=T disassembled.
d
ve
REVERSE SHAFT
Snorkel Locking Screw:
er
Q
R
P
es
8-12 ft. lbs. (11-16 Nm)
O
R
3. With the snorkel shaft assembly properly installed, remove N
M L
ts
the Torx screws and remove the output shaft assembly to
h
prepare for transmission reassembly. K
J
ig I
R
ll
H
-A
G F
E
s
rie
D
st
C
du
B
In
A
ris
Towards Inside
la
of Case
Po
A. Ball Bearing J. Washer

©
B. Engagement Dog K. retaining Ring

C. Retaining Ring L. Engagement Dog
D. Washer M. Washer
E. Gear N. Needle Bearing
F. Needle Bearing O. Gear
G. Reverse Shaft P. Washer
H. Needle Bearing Q. Retaining Ring
I. Sprocket R. Ball bearing
8.34
6. Inspect the shift drum for any damage or wear. Inspect the NOTE: To ease assembly use a plastic tie strap to hold
splines of the shift drum. Replace the O-rings on the end of the shift forks (D) and the shift drum (C) together during
the shift drum and lubricate them before assembly. assembly.
C
7. Stretch the silent chain on a flat surface and measure the

length of 8 pitches in a minimum of three places on the
d
9. With the gearcase on it’s side, hold the gear cluster
ve
chain. Replace the chain if the measurement is longer than assembly and output assembly together. Carefully install
the service limit.
er
each shaft into their respective recess in the gearcase.
es
R
= In. / mm.
hts
Silent Chain Service Limit (8 pitch):
3.0904” (7.8496 cm) ig
R
ll
8. The shift drum (C), reverse shaft (D), input shaft (E), and
-A
output gear assembly must be installed at the same time to

properly align all components.
s
rie
E
st
du
In
8
r is
la
Po
©
8.35
10. With all of the components in the correct positions install 12. Install the rear drive differential and drive chain, following
the 4 output gear assembly screws. Apply Loctite™ 262 these precautions:
(PN 2 871952) to the threads of the screws. Torque the
screws to specification. N OTE: If the transmission is in • The case half rear output seal should be removed prior
to installation of the differential, as seal damage can
locked in Park, place the transmission in Neutral. occur with seal installed due to the angle of entry.
• Install the differential sliding geardog onto the shift
fork arms at the same time the silent chain is installed.
• The differential gear bearing may be lightly tapped into
place. The output seal can be installed once the
assembly is in place.
d
ve
er
=T
es
R
Output Gear Retaining Screws:
ts
8-12 ft.lbs. (11-17 Nm)
h
11. Install the oil deflector shield into the gearcase. Apply ig
R
Loctite™ 242 to the threads of the screws. Torque the 13. Tensioner Installation:
ll
screws to specification. NOTE: Case-halve mating may be difficult due to tensioner

-A
pressure on the drive chain during installation. Release tension at

the ratcheting cam to aid case half installation. Release the
s
tensioner spring after the case halves are mated but not yet
rie
touching.
st
• Place the tensioner cam on the front spacer and

du
tensioner shoe on the rear spacer.

In
• Insert the pins through the cam and through the shoe.
is
• Place the spring over the front pin and hook the spring
r
la
leg under the cam.

Po
©
=T
Oil Deflector Retaining Screws:
16-30 in.lbs. (2-3.6 Nm)
8.36
14. Lift the leg of the spring up and over the rear pin. The 15. Apply a continuous bead of Crankcase Sealant (3-Bond)
tensioner cam will lift the shoe and tension chain. (PN 2871557) to the LH gearcase mating surface and install
Tensioner Assembly - Top View the cover. Install and tighten the 22 screws in a criss cross
pattern to evenly secure the cover. Torque the screws to
specification.
NOTE: Case-halve mating may be difficult due to tensioner
pressure on the drive chain during installation. Release tension at
Forward the ratcheting cam to aid case half installation. Release the
tensioner spring after the case halves are mated but not yet
touching.
25-30 ft.-lbs. (36-43 Nm)

Spring Leg
Tensioner
d
ve
er
es
R
h ts
Lock Cam
=T
ig
R
View From Left Side of Transmission Gearcase Bolt Torque:
ll
-A
25-30 ft.lbs. (36-43 Nm)

Forward
s
16. Place a small amount of grease (PN 2871 551) into the
rie
pocket before installing the sector gear.

st
du
In
8
ris
la
Po
Lift Spring Over Rear

Hook Spring Leg Under Cam Mounting Pin
©
8.37
17. Install the shift gear (16T) (G) on the shift drum shaft. 20. Install the compression spring (K).
Install the sector gear (F) in the bushing pocket on the left
side. Aligning the timing marks on the gears.
G
H
Timing marks
18. Install the O-ring (if not yet done) and lockout disc (H) onto 21. Apply Crankcase Sealant (3-Bond) (PN 2871557) onto the
d
cover and case mating surfaces. Install the cover and torque
ve
the shift drum shaft. Be sure to install the lockout disc (H)
and detent star (J) with the raised edge facing outward. the bolts to specification
er
es
=T
R
ts
Shift Shaft Cover Bolt Torque:
h
12-18 ft.lbs. (16-26 Nm)
ig
R
22. Install the bellcrank onto the shift shaft. Note the key
splined on the bellcrank and shaft. Install the nut. Torque
ll
-A
the nut to specification.

H
s
=T
rie
st
Bellcrank Nut Torque:

du
12-18 ft.lbs. (16-26 Nm)

19. Install the detent pawl (I) onto the shift shaft. Install the
In
detent star (J). Install a new O-ring onto the shift shaft. 23. Install the transmission switch and secure the switch with
is
Apply a small amount of grease onto the O-rings and end the retaining ring.
r
of the shift drum.

la
Po
©
8.38
BRAKES
CHAPTER 9
BRAKES
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
TORQUE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
COMPONENT SERVICE LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
BRAKE SYSTEM EXPLODED VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
X2, TOURING SYSTEM COMPONENT EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
SPORTSMAN SYSTEM COMPONENT EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4
BRAKE CALIPER EXPLODED VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
SPORTSMAN AND X2, TOURING FRONT CALIPER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
X2, TOURING REAR CALIPER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
SPORTSMAN REAR CALIPER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
OPERATION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
BRAKE NOISE TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7
BRAKE BLEEDING / FLUID CHANGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7
FRONT MASTER CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.9
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.9
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.9
FRONT BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.10
PAD REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.10
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.11
BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12
FRONT BRAKE DISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12
REMOVAL / REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.13
FRONT CALIPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.14
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.14
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.15
REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.15
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.16
REAR BRAKE PAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.17
X2, TOURING PAD REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.17
X2, TOURING PAD INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.18
SPORTSMAN REAR PAD REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.19
SPORTSMAN REAR PAD INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.20
BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.20
X2, TOURING REAR CALIPER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.21
9
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.21
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.22
REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.22
SPORTSMAN REAR CALIPER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.23
REMOVAL AND INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.23
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.24
REAR BRAKE DISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.25
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.25
REAR MASTER CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.26
X2, TOURING EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.26
OVERVIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.27
X2, TOURING REAR MASTER CYLINDER REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . 9.27
SPORTSMAN REAR MASTER CYLINDER REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 9.28
PEDAL REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.29
9.1
BRAKES
SPECIFICATIONS
Torque Table
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (Sportsman and X2, Touring)

ITEM TORQUE FT.LBS. (IN.LBS.) TORQUE NM
Front / Rear Caliper Mounting Bolts 18 24

Handlebar Master Cylinder Clamp Bolts (25 in.lbs.) 3.0
Hand Master Cylinder Reservoir Cover Screws (7 in.lbs.) 0.79
Brake Line Banjo Bolt 15.0 21
Brake Line Flared Fittings 12-15 16-21
18.0 Front 24
Brake Disc Bolts Front / Rear
27.0 Rear 36
Brake Switch 12-15 16-21
Caliper Mounting Bolts 18.0 24
Sportsman Caliper Slide Pins 30-35 41-48
Rear Master Cylinder-to-Frame Bolts 8 11
NOTE: Refer to tightening procedures in this chapter. Some special procedures are used when torquing
certain bolts and fasteners.
Component Service Limits
FRONT BRAKE CALIPER (Sportsman and X2, Touring)

ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Brake Pad Thickness .298” / 7.6 mm .180” / 4.6 mm

Brake Disc Thickness .150-.165” / 3.81-4.19 mm .140” / 3.556 mm
Brake Disc Thickness Variance -- .002” / .051 mm
Brake Disc Runout -- .010 / .254 mm
REAR BRAKE CALIPER (X2, Touring ONLY)


Brake Disc Runout -- .010” / .254 mm
REAR BRAKE CALIPER (Sportsman ONLY)


Brake Disc Runout -- .010” / .254 mm
9.2
BRAKES
BRAKE SYSTEM EXPLODED VIEWS
X2, Touring System Component Exploded View
1) Master Cylinder Cover Screws: 7 in.lbs. (0.79 Nm)
2) Banjo Style Fitting: 15 ft.lbs. (21 Nm)
3) Flare Style Fittings: 12-15 ft.lbs. (16-21 Nm)
4) Brake Switch: 12-15 ft.lbs. (16-21 Nm) *Apply Pipe Sealant to Threads
5) Dual Input Master Cylinder and Bleed Screw: 25-30 in. lbs. (2.8-3.4 Nm)
6) Front and Rear Caliper Bleed Screws: 36-60 in. lbs. (4.07-6.78 Nm)
2
1
3
4
2
6
3
9
3
2
*All Bleed Screws: 25-30 in.lbs. (2.80-3.40 Nm)
9.3
9.4
BRAKES
All Banjo Style All Flare Style

Fittings: 15 ft.lbs. Fittings: 12-15 ft.lbs.
(21 Nm) (16-21 Nm)
All Bleed Screws: 25-30

in.lbs. (2.80-3.40 Nm)
2 Screws - 7 in.lbs. (0.79 m)
Sportsman System Component Exploded View
Apply Pipe Sealant

To Threads
BRAKES
BRAKE CALIPER EXPLODED VIEWS
Sportsman and X2, Touring Front Caliper Assembly
A Apply Polaris DOT approved

3 Brake Fluid to Component
Apply Polaris All

Purpose Grease
B 3
E
G
H
C
A. Socket Set Screw

B. Bleeder Screw D
C. Caliper Asm.
D. Boot F
E. Square O-rings
F. Piston
G. Caliper Mount
H. Brake PAds
X2, Touring Rear Caliper Assembly

A A. Socket Set Screw
B. Bleeder Screw
C.Caliper Asm
Apply Polaris DOT-approved D. Boot
3 Brake Fluid to Component E. Caliper Seals
F. Piston
G. Caliper Mount
H. Brake Pads
E G
B
9
H
D
3 F
9.5
BRAKES
Sportsman Rear Caliper Assembly
16-18 ft.lbs. A
(22-24 Nm)
C
Apply Polaris DOT approved Brake fluid D
3 to component. E
30-35 ft.lbs. 3G B
(41-48 Nm) H 25-30 in lbs.
(2.80-3.40 Nm)
I
A. Anvil Bolts
K F B. Bleed Screws
3 C. Washers
D. O-rings
E. Rear Housing
F. Seals
G. Piston
M J H. Slide Pins
I. Bushings
J. Seal
K. Bracket
L. Pad
M.Front Housing
N. Retaining Clips
N L
HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM When the hand activated brake lever (A) is applied it contacts
piston (B) within the master cylinder. As the master cylinder
piston moves inward it closes a small opening (compensating
Operation Overview port C) within the cylinder and starts to build pressure within the
brake system. As the pressure within the system is increased,
Must be clear to Compensating port the piston (D) located in the brake caliper moves outward and
compensates for applies pressure to the brake pad. This pad contacts the brake
allow proper E temperature changes by disc and moves the caliper in its floating bracket, pulling the
diaphragm
movement allowing fluid back to stationary side pad into the brake disc. The resulting friction
master cylinder reduces brake disc and vehicle speed. As the lever pressure is
increased, the braking affect is also increased.
The friction applied to the brake pads will cause the pads to
F C wear. As these pads wear, the piston within the caliper moves
further outward and becomes self adjusting. Fluid from the
reservoir fills the additional area created when the caliper piston
moves outward.
Brake fluid level is critical to proper system operation. Too little
fluid will allow air to enter the system and cause the brakes to
A B feel spongy. Too much fluid could cause brakes to drag due to
fluid expansion.
Located within the master cylinder is the compensating port (C)
which is opened and closed by the master cylinder piston
assembly. The port is open when the lever is released and the
D master cylinder piston is outward. As the temperature within the
Move Brake Pad hydraulic system changes, this port compensates for fluid
expansion (heated fluid) or contraction (cooled fluid). During
system service, be sure this port is open. Due to the high
temperatures created within the system during heavy braking, it
is very important that the master cylinder reservoir has adequate
The Polaris disc brake system consists of the following space to allow for fluid expansion. Never overfill the
components or assemblies: brake lever; master cylinder; reservoir! Fill to 1/4, - 5/16, (.64 - .80 cm) from top of the
hydraulic hose; brake calipers (slave cylinder); brake pads; and cylinder.
brake discs, which are secured to the drive line.
9.6
BRAKES
This system also incorporates a diaphragm (E) as part of the BRAKE NOISE TROUBLESHOOTING
cover gasket; and a vent port (F) located between the gasket and
the cover. The combination diaphragm and vent allow for the air
above the fluid to equalize pressure as the fluid expands or POSSIBLE CAUSE REMEDY
contracts. Make sure the vent is open and allowed to function.
If the reservoir is over filled or the diaphragm vent is plugged the Operator error (riding the
expanding fluid may build pressure in the brake system leading brake / park brake Educate operator
to brake fail
applied)
When servicing Polaris ATV brake systems, use only Polaris Tighten wheel, hub nuts or
DOT-approved brake fluid. Loose wheel hub or bearings
replace bearings if worn
Brake disc warped or
WARNING excessively worn
Replace disc
Once a bottle is opened, use what is necessary and Brake disc misaligned or Inspect and repair as
discard the rest in accordance with local laws. Do loose necessary
not store or use a partial bottle of brake fluid. Brake If noise does not change when
fluid is hygroscopic, meaning it rapidly absorbs Noise is from other source
brake is applied check other
moisture. This causes the boiling temperature of (chain, axle, hub, disc or
sources. Inspect and repair as
the brake fluid to drop, which can lead to brake fade wheel)
necessary
and the possible loss of control.
Wrong pad for Change to a softer or harder
conditions pad (if available)
Brake Noise Troubleshooting
Dirt or dust buildup on the brake pads and disc is the most Brake Bleeding / Fluid Change
common cause of brake noise (squeal caused by vibration). If
cleaning does not reduce the occurrence of brake noise, a NOTE: When bleeding the brakes or replacing the
product such as Permatex™ Disc Brake Quiet can be applied to fluid, always start with the caliper farthest from the
the back of the pads. Follow directions on the package. This will
keep pads in contact with caliper piston(s) to reduce the chance master cylinder.
of squeaks caused by dirt or dust.
BRAKE NOISE TROUBLESHOOTING CAUTION
POSSIBLE CAUSE REMEDY Always wear safety glasses during these

procedures. Brake fluid will damage finished
Spray disc and pads with CRC surfaces. Do not allow brake fluid to come in contact
Brake Kleen™ or equivalent with finished surfaces.
Dirt, dust, or imbedded non-flammable aerosol brake
material on pads or disc cleaner. Remove pads and/or NOTE: Do not remove brake lever when reservoir
disc hub to clean imbedded fluid level is low.
material from disc or pads.
Pad(s) dragging on disc (noise
Adjust pad stop
This procedure should be used to change fluid or bleed brakes
during regular maintenance. 9
or premature pad wear)
1. Clean reservoir cover thoroughly.
Insufficient lever or pedal
Set to proper level
clearance 2. Remove screws, cover and diaphragm (C) from reservoir.
Master cylinder reservoir Check brake fluid level,
overfilled adjust as needed
Master cylinder
compensating port
restricted, Master cylinder
Clean piston(s) seal
piston not returning
completely, Caliper piston(s)
not returning
9.7
BRAKES
3. Inspect vent slots (A) in cover and remove any debris or 6. Slowly pump the brake lever until pressure builds and
blockage. holds.
C Sight Glass
7. While maintaining lever pressure, open bleeder screw.
Close bleeder screw and release brake lever.
D
NOTE: Do not release lever before bleeder screw is
B tight or air may be drawn into caliper.
A
8. Repeat procedure until clean fluid appears in bleeder hose
and all air has been purged. Add fluid as necessary to
maintain level in reservoir.
4. If changing fluid, remove old fluid from reservoir with a CAUTION

Mity Vac™ pump (PN 2870975) or similar tool.
Maintain at least 1/2", (1.27 cm) of brake fluid
in the reservoir to prevent air from
entering the master cylinder.
Fill Line
9. Tighten bleeder screw securely and remove bleeder hose.
Torque the bleeder screw to specification.
=T
Bleeder Screw Torque:
25-30 in.lbs. (2.80-3.40 Nm)
10. Repeat procedure Steps 5-9 for the remaining caliper(s).

5. Begin bleeding procedure with the caliper that is farthest
from the master cylinder. Install a box end wrench on 11. Add Polaris DOT-approved Brake Fluid to MAX level
caliper bleeder screw. Attach a clean, clear hose to fitting inside reservoir.
and place the other end in a clean container. Be sure the
hose fits tightly on fitting.
Bleeder Screw
NOTE: Fluid may be forced from supply port (B)

when brake lever is pumped. Place diaphragm (C) in
reservoir to prevent spills. Do not install cover. See
Illustration above.
9.8
BRAKES
12. Install diaphragm, sight glass, cap and screws. 15. Field test machine at low speed before putting into service.
Check for proper braking action and lever reserve. With
Master Cylinder Cap lever firmly applied, lever reserve should be no less than 1/
2”, (1.3 cm) from handlebar.
16. Check brake system for fluid leaks and inspect all hoses and
lines for wear or abrasion. Replace hose if wear or abrasion
Sight Glass
is found.
FRONT MASTER CYLINDER

Cap Screws
Removal
1. Clean master cylinder and reservoir assembly. Make sure
you have a clean work area to disassemble brake
Diaphragm components.
2. Remove master cylinder from handlebars.
13. Wiggle and press down on the cap to be sure it fits evenly
and snug. CAUTION
Brake fluid will damage finished surfaces.

Do not allow brake fluid to come in
contact with finished surfaces.
3. While holding upright, continue to remove master cylinder.

Cover the brake line to avoid spillage when removing the
brake line banjo bolt.
Installation
Cap Must be Even
1. Install master cylinder on handlebars. Torque mounting
bolts to specification. Torque the inner bolt first as
indicated in the illustration below.
14. Torque the screw to specification . 7 in.lbs. (.79 Nm)
25 in.lbs. (3 Nm)
7 in.lbs. (0.79 Nm)
Torque inner Bolt First
Torque Inner
Bolt First
=T
=T
Master Cylinder Mount Bolt Torque:
Master Cylinder Cover Screw Torque: 25 in. lbs. (3 Nm)
7 in.lbs. (0.79 Nm) Torque Inner Bolt First
9.9
BRAKES
2. Place new sealing washers on each side of banjo fitting on FRONT BRAKES
the brake line and torque banjo bolt to specification.
Torque to 15 ft.lbs. (21 Nm) Pad Removal
Sealing Washer 1. Elevate and support the of the ATV.
CAUTION
Banjo Bolt
Use care when supporting vehicle so that it does not
tip or fall. Severe injury may occur.
2. Remove the wheel.

3. Loosen pad adjuster screw 2-3 turns.
Brake Line
=T
Banjo Bolt Torque:
15 ft.lbs. (21 Nm)
3. Fill reservoir with DOT-approved brake fluid.
4. Remove caliper from mounting bracket.
NOTE: To speed up the brake bleeding procedure,

the master cylinder can be purged of air before
brake line is attached. Fill with DOT-approved brake
fluid and pump lever slowly two to three times with
finger over the outlet end to purge master cylinder of
air.
4. Follow proper bleeding procedures. Check all connections

for leaks and repair if necessary.
9.10
BRAKES
5. Push caliper piston into caliper bore slowly using a C-
clamp or locking pliers with pads installed.
Measure Pad
NOTE: Brake fluid will be forced through

= In. / mm.
compensating port into master cylinder fluid
reservoir when piston is pushed back into caliper. Front Brake Pad Thickness Service Limit:
Remove excess fluid from reservoir as required. .180” / 4.6 mm
6. Push mounting bracket inward and slip outer brake pad past
Assembly
edge. Remove inner pad.
1. Lubricate mounting bracket pins with a light film of
Polaris Premium All Season Grease (PN 2871423), and
install rubber dust boots.
7. Measure the thickness of the pad material. Replace pads if

worn beyond the service limit.
9
9.11
BRAKES
2. Compress mounting bracket and make sure dust boots are 5. Install the adjuster screw and turn clockwise until
fully seated. Install pads with friction material facing each stationary pad contacts disc, then back off 1/2 turn
other. (counterclockwise).
6. Verify fluid level in reservoir is up to MAX line inside

WARNING reservoir and install reservoir cap.
If pads are contaminated with grease, oil, or liquid 7. Install wheels and torque wheel nuts. It is required that a
soaked do not use the pads. Use only new clean pads. burnishing procedure be performed after installation of new
brake pads to extend service life and reduce noise.
3. Install caliper on hub strut, and torque mounting bolts.
NOTE: Front Wheel Nut Torque: Refer to Chapter 2.
Brake Burnishing Procedure

Start machine and slowly increase speed to 30 mph. Gradually
apply brakes to stop machine. Allow pads and disc to cool
sufficiently during the procedure. Do not allow pads or disc to
become hot or warping may result. Repeat this procedure 10
times.
18 ft.lbs. FRONT BRAKE DISC

(25 Nm)
Inspection
1. Visually inspect the brake disc for nicks, scratches, or
damage.
4. Slowly pump the brake lever until pressure has been built
up. Maintain at least 1/2, (12.7 mm) of brake fluid in the
reservoir to prevent air from entering the brake system.
9.12
BRAKES
2. Measure the disc thickness at eight different points around Removal / Replacement
the pad contact surface. Replace disc if worn beyond
service limit. NOTE: To reduce the possibility of warping, try
removing the brake disc mounting bolts before
applying heat to the bolts.
1. Apply heat to the hub in the area of the brake disc

mounting bolts to soften the bolt locking agent.
= In. / mm.
Brake Disc Thickness:

Service Limit: .140” / 3.556 mm 2. Remove bolts and disc.
3. Clean mating surface of disc and hub.
= In. / mm. 4. Install disc on hub.
5. Install new bolts and tighten to specification.

Brake Disc Thickness Variance Service Limit:
.002” (.051 mm) between measurements.
=T
3. Mount dial indicator as shown to measure disc runout.
Slowly rotate the disc and read total runout on the dial Brake Disc Bolt Torque:
indicator. Replace the disc if runout exceeds specifications. 18 ft.lbs. (24 Nm) Front
27 ft.lbs. (36 Nm) Rear
CAUTION
Always use new brake disc mounting bolts. The 9

bolts have a pre-applied locking agent which is
destroyed upon removal.
= In. / mm.
Brake Disc Runout Service Limit:

.010” / .254 mm
9.13
BRAKES
FRONT CALIPER 3. Remove mounting bracket, pin assembly and dust boot.
Removal
CAUTION

1. Loosen and remove brake line to caliper. Place a container

under caliper to catch fluid draining from brake line.
4. Remove piston, dust seals and piston seals.

5. Clean the caliper body, piston, and retaining bracket with
brake cleaner or alcohol.
NOTE: Be sure to clean seal grooves in caliper

body.
Clean Components
2. Push upper pad retainer pin inward and slip brake pads past
edge. Loosen pad adjuster.
9.14
BRAKES
Inspection Reassembly
1. Inspect caliper body for nicks, scratches or wear. Measure 1. Install new caliper seals (A) in the caliper body (B). Be
bore size and compare to specifications. Replace if damage sure groove is clean and free of residue or brakes may drag
is evident or if worn beyond service limit. upon assembly.
C
B
2. Coat piston with clean Polaris DOT-approved Brake Fluid

= In. / mm. (C). Install piston (D) with a twisting motion while pushing
inward. Piston should slide in and out of bore smoothly,
with light resistance.
Front Caliper Piston Bore I.D.:
Service Limit: 1.193” (30.30 mm) 3. Lubricate the mounting bracket pins with Polaris Premium
All Season Grease (PN 2871423), and install the rubber
2. Inspect piston for nicks, scratches, wear or damage. dust seal boots.
Measure diameter and replace if damaged or worn beyond
service limit.
3. Inspect the brake disc and pads as outlined for brake pad
replacement in this section. See “BRAKE PAD
INSPECTION” earlier in this chapter.
9.15
BRAKES
4. Compress the mounting bracket and make sure the dust 6. Install brake line and torque the banjo bolt to specification.
seals are fully seated. Install the brake pads. Clean the disc
and pads with brake parts cleaner or denatured alcohol to
=T
remove any dirt, oil or grease.
Brake Line Banjo Bolt Torque:
15 ft.lbs. (21 Nm)
7. Install the adjuster screw and turn until stationary pad

contacts disc, then back off 1/2 turn.
Installation
5. Install caliper on hub strut, and torque mounting bolts to
specification.
15 ft.lbs. (21 Nm)
8. Perform brake bleeding procedure as outlined earlier in this
chapter.
9. Install wheels and torque wheel nuts to specification. Refer

to Chapter 2.
18 ft.lbs.
(24 Nm)
=T
Brake Caliper Mounting Bolt Torque:
18 ft.lbs. (24 Nm)
9.16
BRAKES
REAR BRAKE PAD 5. Push caliper piston into the caliper bore slowly using a C-
clamp or locking pliers with pads installed.
X2, Touring Pad Removal
1. Elevate and support the rear of the ATV.
2. Remove the rear wheel
3. Loosen pad adjuster screw 2-3 turns.
NOTE: Brake fluid will be forced through

compensating port into master cylinder fluid
reservoir when piston is pushed back into caliper.
Remove excess fluid from reservoir as required.
6. Push caliper mounting bracket inward and slip outer brake

pad past the edge to remove.
4. Remove the two caliper mounting bolts and lift caliper off
the brake disc.
7. Remove the inner brake pad.
NOTE: When removing caliper, be careful not to

9
damage brake line. Support caliper so as not to kink
or bend brake line.
8. Clean the caliper with brake cleaner or alcohol.
9.17
BRAKES
9. Measure the thickness of the pad material. Replace pads if 3. Install caliper and torque the mounting bolts to
worn beyond the service limit. specification.
Measure
Thickness
= In. / mm.
=T
Rear Brake Pad Thickness
Service Limit: .180” (4.6 mm) Caliper Mount Bolt Torque:
18 ft.lbs. (24 Nm)
X2, Touring Pad Installation 4. Slowly pump the brake lever until pressure has been built
up. Maintain at least 1/2, (12.7 mm) of brake fluid in the
1. Lubricate mounting bracket pins with a light film of
reservoir to prevent air from entering the brake system.
Polaris Premium All Season Grease (PN 2871423), and
install rubber dust boots. 5. Install the adjuster screw and turn clockwise until the
stationary pad contacts the disc, then back off 1/2 turn
(counterclockwise).
2. Compress mounting bracket and make sure dust boots are

fully seated. Install pads with friction material facing each
other.
6. Verify fluid level in reservoir is up to the MAX line inside
reservoir and install reservoir cap.
WARNING
7. Install wheel(s) and torque wheel nut(s).
If brake pads are contaminated with grease,
oil, or liquid soaked do not use the pads. 8. It is recommended that a burnishing procedure be
Use only new clean pads. performed after installation of new brake pads to extend
service life and reduce noise.
9.18
BRAKES
Sportsman Rear Pad Removal NOTE: When removing caliper, be careful not to
damage brake line. Support caliper so as not to kink
1. Support the machine. Remove the rear tire. or bend brake line.
2. Remove the slide pin clips from the slide bolt.
5. Push caliper pistons into caliper bore slowly with pads
installed.
6. Remove the caliper slide pins and remove the brake pads
from the caliper.
3. Loosen the slide pins with a hex wrench. Remove Rear Pads
7. Clean the caliper with brake cleaner or alcohol.

8. Measure the thickness of the pad material. Replace pads if
worn beyond the service limit.
Measure
Thickness
4. Remove caliper mounting bolts and lift caliper off of disc.
9
= In. / mm.
Rear Brake Pad Thickness

Service Limit: .180” (4.6 mm)
9.19
BRAKES
Sportsman Rear Pad Installation 4. Install the slide bolt snap ring. Torque the slide pin to
specification.
1. Install new brake pads in caliper body.
Install Pads
30-35 ft.lbs.
(41-48 Nm)
WARNING =T
If the brake pads are contaminated with grease, Caliper Slide Bolt Torque:
oil, or liquid soaked do not use the pads, 30-35 ft.lbs. (41-48Nm)
use only new clean pads.
5. Slowly pump the brake lever until pressure has been built
2. Install and tighten the slide pin with a hex wrench. up. Maintain at least 1/2, (12.7 mm) of brake fluid in the
3. Install caliper and torque the mounting bolts to reservoir to prevent air from entering the master cylinder.
specification. 6. It is recommended that a burnishing procedure be
performed after installation of new brake pads to extend
service life and reduce noise.
Brake Burnishing Procedure

Start machine and slowly increase speed to 30 mph. Gradually
apply brakes to stop machine. Allow pads and disc to cool
sufficiently during the procedure. Do not allow pads or disc to
become hot or warping may result. Repeat this procedure 10
times.
18 ft.lbs. (24 Nm)
=T
Caliper Mount Bolt Torque:
18 ft.lbs. (24 Nm)
9.20
BRAKES
X2, TOURING REAR CALIPER 6. Remove piston, dust seals and piston seals.
Removal
CAUTION

1. Clean caliper area before removal.
2. Place a container below the caliper to catch brake fluid that

will drain from the brake line. Remove brake line from
caliper
7. Clean the caliper body, piston, and retaining bracket with

brake cleaner or alcohol.
NOTE: Be sure to clean seal grooves in caliper

body.
Clean Components
3. Remove the two caliper mounting bolts and the caliper.
4. Loosen the adjuster screw and remove the brake pads.

5. Remove mounting bracket, pin assembly and dust boot.
9.21
BRAKES
Inspection Reassembly
1. Inspect caliper body for nicks, scratches or wear. Measure 1. Install new caliper seals (A) in the caliper body (B). Be
bore size and compare to specifications. Replace if damage sure groove is clean and free of residue or brakes may drag
is evident or if worn beyond service limit. upon assembly.
C
B
2. Coat piston with clean Polaris DOT-approved Brake

= In. / mm. Fluid (C). Install piston (D) with a twisting motion while
pushing inward. Piston should slide in and out of bore
smoothly, with light resistance.
Rear Caliper Piston Bore I.D.
Service Limit: 1.193” (30.30 mm) 3. Lubricate the mounting bracket pins with Polaris Premium
All Season Grease (PN 2871423), and install the rubber
2. Inspect piston for nicks, scratches, wear or damage. dust seal boots.
Measure diameter and replace if damaged or worn beyond
service limit.
3. Inspect the brake disc and pads as outlined for brake pad
replacement in this section. See “BRAKE PAD
INSPECTION” earlier in this chapter.
9.22
BRAKES
4. Compress the mounting bracket and make sure the dust 4. Remove the slide bolt snap rings (A), the slide pins (B), the
seals are fully seated. Install the brake pads. Clean the disc bracket pad (C), and the brake pads (D).
and pads with brake parts cleaner or denatured alcohol to
remove any dirt, oil or grease. Caliper C
B
A
5. Remove the anvil bolts and separate caliper halves and

remove pistons with piston pliers.
SPORTSMAN REAR CALIPER
Removal and Inspection Caliper
1. Clean caliper area before removal.
2. Using a flare nut wrench, remove hand brake (inner) and
auxiliary brake (outer) lines (arrows). Place a container to
catch brake fluid draining from brake lines.
Seal
Pistons & O-ring
Anvil Bolts
6. Remove seals and O-rings. Clean the O-ring grooves.

7. Clean disc, caliper body, and pistons with brake cleaner or
alcohol.
8. Remove the slide bolt bushings. Inspect the bushings and
O-rings and replace if necessary. 9
3. Remove the two caliper mounting bolts and the caliper. O-ring
Bushing
9.23
BRAKES
9. Measure the inside diameter of the rear caliper. The caliper Assembly
body is a 2-step piston. The rear step is measured as well
as the outside step. 1. Install new O-rings in the slide bolt bushing holes. Be sure
O-ring and seal grooves are thoroughly cleaned of all
residue, or piston may bind in bore. Apply brake fluid to
piston seals and install carefully with a twisting motion to
ease assembly until fully seated.
Seals
.94in. (23.88) mm)
1.5 in. (38.1 mm)
= In. / mm.
Rear Caliper Piston Bore I.D. 2. Carefully assemble caliper body, making sure O-rings are
Inner Bore Service Limit: .94” (23.88 mm) properly positioned in groove. Tighten the caliper anvil
Outer Bore Service Limit: 1.5” (38.1 mm) bolts and then torque the anvil bolts evenly to specification.
10. Inspect caliper piston bore for scratches, severe corrosion, 16-18 ft.lbs. (22-24
or galling and replace if necessary.
Inspect
=T
11. Inspect surface of caliper piston for nicks, scratches, or Caliper Anvil Bolt Torque:
damage and replace if necessary. 16-18 ft.lbs. (22-24 Nm)
3. Install brake pads in caliper body with friction material

facing each other. Install the slide pins and the slide pin
retaining rings. Torque the slide pins to specification.
9.24
BRAKES
NOTE: The slide pins should be torqued when REAR BRAKE DISC
installed on caliper mount.
Inspection
1. Visually inspect disc for scoring, scratches, or gouges.
Replace the disc if any deep scratches are evident.
2. Use a micrometer and measure disc thickness at 8 different

points around perimeter of disc. Replace disc if worn
beyond service limit.
=T
Slide Pin Torque:
30-35 ft.lbs. (41-48 Nm)
4. Install caliper and torque mounting bolts to specification.
30-35 ft.lbs.
(41-48 Nm) Disc Thickness
18 ft.lbs.
= In. / mm.
(24 Nm)
Brake Disc Thickness:
Service Limit: .170” (4.318 mm)
= In. / mm.
9
=T
Brake Disc Thickness Variance:
Caliper Mounting Bolt Torque: Service Limit: .002” (.051 mm)
17 ft.lbs. (23 Nm) Between Measurements
5. Install brake line and tighten securely with a line wrench. 3. Mount dial indicator and measure disc runout. Replace the
Torque the brake lines to the proper torque specification. disc if runout exceeds specifications.
6. Follow bleeding procedure outlined in the “BLEEDING
PROCEDURE” in this chapter.
7. Field test unit for proper braking action before putting into
= In. / mm.
service. Inspect for fluid leaks and firm brakes. Make sure
the brake is not dragging when lever is released. If the brake Brake Disc Runout
drags, re-check assembly and installation. Service Limit: .010” / .254 mm
9.25
BRAKES
REAR MASTER CYLINDER
X2, Touring Exploded View
J I
A
H
F E
D A. Master Cylinder Bolts

B. Rear Brake Line
C. Rear Master Cylinder
D D. Bushing(s)
E. Washer(s)
F. Cotter Pin
G. Foot Pedal
H. Spring
G I. Front Brake Line
E J. Banjo Fitting
9.26
BRAKES
Overview 2. If required, remove the rear brake line from the master
cylinder. Use a suitable container to catch the brake fluid.
Polaris disc brake systems are light weight, low maintenance Dispose of brake fluid properly.
and perform well in the conditions ATV’s routinely encounter.
However, there are a few things to remember when replacing
disc brake pads or performing brake system service to ensure Brake Fluid Reservoir
proper system function and maximum pad service life.
• Perform a brake burnishing procedure after installing
new pads to maximize service life.
• Optional pads are available to suit conditions in your
area. Select a pad to fit riding style and environment.
Rear Brake Line Front Brake Line
• Do not over-fill the master cylinder fluid reservoir.
• Make sure the brake lever and pedal returns freely and
completely.
• Adjust stop pin on caliper (if applicable) after pad Frame
service.
• Check and adjust master cylinder reservoir fluid level
after pad service.
Rear Brake MC
• Make sure atmospheric vent on reservoir is
unobstructed. Brake Mount
• Test for brake drag after any brake system service and
investigate cause if brake drag is evident. Spring
• Make sure caliper moves freely on guide pins (where
applicable). Brake Lever
• Inspect caliper piston seals for foreign material that

could prevent caliper pistons from returning freely. 3. Remove the two bolts that secure the rear master cylinder
to the frame. Replace parts as needed.
4. To install the rear master cylinder, mount the master
CAUTION cylinder to the frame and torque bolts to specification.
Use only DOT-approved brake fluid as an assembly

aid for all procedures described in this chapter to
=T
prevent brake system contamination.
Master Cylinder to Frame Bolt Torque:
DO NOT USE LUBRICANTS OF ANY KIND FOR
8 ft.lbs. (11 Nm)
ASSEMBLY, AS THEIR USE CAN CAUSE
RUBBER COMPONENTS TO SWELL. 5. Reinstall the brake line and torque the banjo bolt to
specification.
X2, Touring Rear Master Cylinder Removal
and Installation
=T
9
Banjo Bolt Torque:
15 ft.lbs. (21 Nm)
6. Perform brake bleeding procedures as outlined in this

chapter.
1. Remove the RH footwell to gain access to the rear master

cylinder.
9.27
BRAKES
Sportsman Rear Master Cylinder Removal / 5. Reinstall the brake line and torque the banjo bolt to
Installation specification depending on the style of fitting.
1. Remove the RH footwell to gain access to the rear master

cylinder. =T
2. Remove the rear brake lines from the master cylinder. Use
a suitable container to catch the brake fluid. Dispose of Banjo Bolt Torque:
brake fluid properly. 15 ft.lbs. (21 Nm)
3. Remove the two bolts that secure the rear master cylinder
to the brake mount plate. Replace parts as needed.
=T
4. To install the rear brake master cylinder, mount the master
cylinder to the mount plate and torque bolts to specification. Flare Stye Brake Line Torque:
12-15 ft.lbs. (16-20 Nm)
=T
6. Perform brake bleeding procedures as outlined in this
Master Cylinder to Frame Bolt Torque: chapter.
8 ft.lbs. (11 Nm)
A SPORTSMAN
B
J
C
15 ft.lbs.
(21 Nm)
A. Brake Reservoir
B. Rear Foot Brake Line
C. Rear Master Cylinder
D D. Master Cylinder Bolts
E. Bushing
K F. Washer
I G. Cotter Pin
H. Foot Pedal
I. Mount Plate Bolts
J. Mount Plate
F K. Spring
G E H
9.28
BRAKES
Pedal Removal and Installation TROUBLESHOOTING
Brakes Squeal
• Dirty/contaminated friction pads
• Improper alignment
• Worn disc
• Worn disc splines
X2, Touring Shown
Poor Brake Performance
• Air in system
• Water in system (brake fluid contaminated)
• Caliper/disc misaligned
1. Remove the RH footwell to gain access to the rear master • Caliper dirty or damaged
cylinder.
2. Remove the cotter key. • Brake line damaged or lining ruptured
• Worn disc and/or friction pads
3. Remove the washers, bushings, and tension spring.
• Incorrectly adjusted lever
4. Reverse the steps for installation, use a new cotter key
during installation. • Incorrectly adjusted stationary pad
• Worn or damaged master cylinder or components
• Improper clearance between lever and switch
Lever Vibration
• Disc damaged
• Disc worn (runout or thickness variance exceeds
service limit)
Caliper Overheats (Brakes Drag)

• Compensating port plugged
• Pad clearance set incorrectly
• Auxiliary brake pedal incorrectly adjusted
• Brake lever or pedal binding or unable to return fully 9
• Parking brake left on
• Residue build up under caliper seals
• Operator riding brakes
Brakes Lock
• Alignment of caliper to disc
9.29
BRAKES
NOTES
9.30
ELECTRICAL
CHAPTER 10
ELECTRICAL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3
OVERVIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DIAGNOSTIC MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4
SETTING A NEW SERVICE INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6
EFI DIAGNOSTIC MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7
SPEEDOMETER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8
SPEEDOMETER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9
SPEEDOMETER TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10
TEST 1 - NO ALL WHEEL DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10
TEST 2 - NO DISPLAY / TEST 3 - NO REVERSE SPEED LIMIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
TEST 4 - NO AWD HUB SAFETY LIMITER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.12
TEST 5 - REVERSE SPEED LIMITER / TEST 6 - SPEED SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.13
TEST 7 - NO FUEL GAUGE / TEST 8 - TRANSMISSION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.14
ACTIVE DESCENT CONTROL (ADC) COIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15
OPERATION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15
DIAGNOSING SYSTEM FAILURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15
OPERATION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15
DIAGNOSING SYSTEM FAILURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15
COOLING SYSTEM COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.16
FAN CONTROL CIRCUIT OPERATION / TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.16
FAN CONTROL CIRCUIT BYPASS TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.16
COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.16
FAN MOTOR CURRENT DRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.17
GEAR POSITION INDICATOR SWITCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.17
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.18
ETC SWITCH OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.18
ETC OPERATION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.18
IGNITION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.19
FLYWHEEL IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.19
EFI - DC/CDI IGNITION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.19
ALTERNATOR/IGNITION COMPONENTS - 700/800 EFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.20
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR GAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.21
IGNITION SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.21
CHARGING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.21
CURRENT DRAW - KEY OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.21
CHARGING SYSTEM “BREAK EVEN” TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.22
ALTERNATOR OUTPUT TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.22
CHARGING SYSTEM TESTING FLOW CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.24
RELAYS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.25
FUSES/CIRCUIT BREAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.26
LIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.26
HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHT BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.26
10
HEADLIGHT HOUSING REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.27
HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHT ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.28
LOWER HEADLAMP REMOVAL / INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.28
LOW BEAM HEADLIGHT ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.29
HEADLAMP SWITCH TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.29
WORK LIGHT / DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.30
SPORTSMAN / TOURING BRAKE LIGHT / WORK LIGHT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . 10.30
X2 BRAKE LIGHT / WORK LIGHT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.31
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.32
10.1
ELECTRICAL
FUEL SENDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.33
TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.33
X2 / TOURING DIFFERENTIAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.33
SOLENOID TESTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.33
SOLENOID REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.33
DIFFERENTIAL RELAY OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.34
DIFFERENTIAL RELAY TESTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.34
X2 / TOURING SPEED SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.34
TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.34
REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.34
ACCESSORY POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.35
WIRE CONNECTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.35
STARTER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.36
SPORTSMAN STARTER LOCKOUT OVERVIEW AND DIAGNOSTIC . . . . . . . . . . . 10.36
X2 /TOURING STARTER LOCKOUT OVERVIEW AND DIAGNOSTIC . . . . . . . . . . . 10.37
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.38
VOLTAGE DROP TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.38
STARTER MOTOR REMOVAL / DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.38
BRUSH INSPECTION / REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.39
ARMATURE TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.40
STARTER REASSEMBLY / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.41
STARTER SOLENOID BENCH TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.41
STARTER DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.42
STARTER EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.43
STARTER SYSTEM TESTING FLOW CHART. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.44
BASIC WINCH WIRING- PRE-WIRED MODELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.45
BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.46
BATTERY IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.46
BATTERY ACTIVATION (CONVENTIONAL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.46
BATTERY TERMINALS/BOLTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.47
CONVENTIONAL BATTERY INSPECTION / REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.47
CONVENTIONAL BATTERY INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.47
CONVENTIONAL BATTERY TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.48
CONVENTIONAL BATTERY OCV - OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . 10.48
CONVENTIONAL BATTERY SPECIFIC GRAVITY TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.48
BATTERY LOAD TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.49
OFF SEASON STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.49
CHARGING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.49
LOW MAINTENANCE BATTERY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.50
LOW MAINTENANCE BATTERY CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.50
LOW MAINTENANCE BATTERY INSPECTION / REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.51
LOW MAINTENANCE BATTERY INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.51
LOW MAINTENANCE BATTERY - OCV- OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE TEST . . . . . . . 10.52
LOW MAINTENANCE BATTERY LOAD TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.52
LOW MAINTENANCE BATTERY OFF-SEASON STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.53
LOW MAINTENANCE BATTERY CHARGING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.53
TROUBLESHOOTING DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.54
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.54
ALL WHEEL DRIVE - EFI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.54
CHARGING CIRCUIT - EFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.54
COOLING FAN - EFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.55
FUEL PUMP - EFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.55
GEAR SWITCH - EFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.56
POWER CIRCUIT - EFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.56
REVERSE OVERRIDE - EFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.57
FAN CONTROL - EFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.57
START CIRCUIT - EFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.58
START ENABLE - EFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.58
10.2
ELECTRICAL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER Introduction
Refer To Illustration 1:
Overview
(A) Speedometer Needle (flashes during warning condition) The Polaris ATV Instrument Cluster is powered by battery
voltage (12 Vdc) and requires inputs from the engine RPM,
transmission gear, and speed sensor for proper operation. Two
(B) Speedometer harnesses plug into the cluster head; one from the speed sensor,
in MPH/KPH and one from the vehicle main harness. A non-serviceable
internal memory battery maintains odometer and hour meter
data when the machine is not running. The illumination lamp
inside the gauge is non-serviceable and is designed to last for the
life of the unit. (A) The speedometer needle indicates speed
from an electronic speed sensor. The needle also flashes during
a warning condition. The speedometer needle indicates speed in
MPH and KPH. NOTE: A flashing needle could indicate a hot
engine, low battery warning, or the No. 10 Pin could be
grounded. (B) The speedometer face features numbers in Mile
Per Hour (MPH) and Kilometers Per Hour (KPH). (C) The
Rider Information Center performs a number of functions (See
Illustration 2):
1. Odometer / Tachometer / Trip meter / Hour Meter / Clock
• Odometer records the miles traveled by the ATV.
• Tachometer displays engine RPM. This feature will
also display with the vehicle in motion NOTE: Small
RPM fluctuations from day to day are normal because
ILL. 1 of changes in humidity, temperature, and elevation
(C) Rider Information Center
• Trip meter records the miles traveled by the ATV if
reset before each trip or total miles to 999. To reset the
trip meter, select the trip meter mode. Press and hold
4 1 9 the mode button (override button) until the total
5 2 changes to 0. NOTE: In the Rider Information Center,
the trip meter display contains a decimal point, but the
odometer displays without a decimal point.
3 • Hour meter logs the total hours the engine has been in
operation.
• Clock - displays hours and minutes.
2. Programmable Service Interval / Diagnostic Mode
6
• Service Interval - The purpose of the programmable
service interval is to provide the consumer and the
dealer with a convenient way to schedule routine
7 9 8 ILL. 2 maintenance. When the ATV leaves the factory, this
feature is set at “50 hours". When the first 50 hours of
engine operation are finished the wrench icon will flash
for 10 seconds each time the ATV is started as a
reminder that ATV maintenance is due. NOTE: To reset
the Service Interval, follow the directions for
“SETTING NEW SERVICE INTERVAL” later in this
chapter.
3. Check Engine Warning Indicator 10
• The word HOT will display alpha numerically when the
engine is overheating. Do not continue to operate the
ATV if this warning appears. Refer to Chapter 3
“COOLING SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING” for
help with diagnosis of overheating.
10.3
ELECTRICAL
4. High/Low Battery Voltage Instrument Cluster Diagnostic Mode
• This warning usually indicates that the ATV is being NOTE: This gauge features auto shut-off protection
operated at an RPM too low to keep the battery if the voltage on the DC bus is excessive. This is
charged. A low battery warning may also occur under
normal operation if the machine is at idle and high usually the result of an open battery condition, and
electrical load (lights, cooling fan, accessories) is the gauge is designed to survive such an event.
applied. Driving at a higher RPM or connecting a
battery charger will usually clear the warning. This
indicator may also turn in the event of an overcharging NOTE: If the gauge will not indicate what gear it is in
situation, such as a faulty voltage regulator. and will not allow AWD operation, AWD can still be
enabled by holding in the mode/override button.
5. Engine Hour Display Indicator
• Displays number of hours of engine operation. 1. Turn the key switch off and wait 10 seconds.
2. Set the park brake and shift the transmission to neutral.
6. AWD Indicator 3. Hold the mode/reverse override button as you turn the key
• Illuminates when the electrical portion of the AWD switch on.
system is enabled. 4. Release the switch as soon as the display is activated.
7. Gear Indicator Use the mode/reverse override button to toggle through the
diagnostic screens.
• Specifies what position the shift lever and transmission
are in. This area is blank if a fault occurs. NOTE: The initial screen display refers to the
8. Mode Indicator software version installed on your ATV. This
information is only displayed briefly.
• Indicates which modes are being utilized.
Screen 1 - Clock: This screen allows for setting the time of day.
9. Fuel Gauge To reset the clock:
• The segments of the fuel gauge indicate the level of fuel 1. Enter the diagnostic mode.
in the fuel tank. When the last segment clears, a low
fuel warning is activated. All related icons will flash, 2. Toggle to the clock screen.
“FUEL” will display in the LCD, and the speedometer 3. Press and hold the mode button until the hour display
needle will blink. If riding, be sure to refuel flashes. Release the button.
immediately.
4. Press and release the mode button once to advance the
setting by one hour. Press and hold the mode button to
advance the hours quickly.
5. When the desired hour is displayed, wait approximately
four seconds, until the minute display flashes.
6. When the display stops flashing, the mode has been set.
7. Use the same procedure to reset the minutes.
Screen 2 - Battery: This screen indicates battery voltage. Refer

to Ill. 2.
Blink When Low On Fuel
Ill. 2
10.4
ELECTRICAL
Screen 3 - Tachometer: (Ill. 3) indicates engine RPM. Screen 5 - Gear Circuit Diagnostic:
This screen displays the resistance value (in ohms) being read at
the gear switch input of the gauge.
NOTE: 10--20% Variance from these reading is within
normal parameters.
Ill.3
Screen 4 - AWD Diagnostic Screen: This screen indicates

whether or not current is flowing through the AWD coil on
models with AWD.
23 Ohms in Park
AWD Off
158 Ohms in Neutral
AWD On
10
75 Ohms in Reverse
10.5
ELECTRICAL
Setting A New Service Interval
1. While in the service interval mode, press and hold the
mode/override button until the wrench icon flashes. When
it begins to flash, release the button.
2. The setting will increase by one hour each time the button
is pressed. Pressing and holding the button will allow the
numbers to escalate much faster.
3. When the desired time increment is displayed, release the
button and wait for the wrench to stop flashing. When the
wrench stops blinking, your service hours are set.
NOTE: If you scroll past the intended number, hold
the button down until the count turns over to 0. You
can then reset the number.
297 Ohms in Low Turn Service Interval OFF:
1. If the service interval is enabled (functioning) on your
ATV and you wish to turn it off, toggle to the service
interval mode.
2. Press and hold the mode button for approximately 7
seconds until the word OFF appears in the Rider
Information Center. The service interval is now OFF. To
enable (turn on) the service interval mode, repeat the steps
above in “Setting Service Interval After Countdown”.
Change Service Interval Time

If you would like to change the service interval time, (example:
change the interval from 50 hrs. to 55 hrs.). Follow the steps
below:
628 Ohms in High
1. While in the service interval mode, press and hold the
mode button for approximately 7 seconds until the word
Screen 6 - Programmable Service Interval:
OFF appears in the Rider Information Center.
The purpose of the programmable service interval is to provide 2. Wait 5 seconds and then press the mode button in until the
the consumer and dealer with a convenient reminder for routine wrench icon flashes. Press the mode button again to set the
maintenance. When the ATV leaves the factory, this feature is desired service increment. Release the button and wait for
set at 50 hours.
the wrench icon to stop flashing. The new service interval
Once the service interval mode is set with the hours when is now set.
service is due, the hours of actual engine operation are
subtracted from the set hours until 0 is reached. When the
counter reaches 0, the wrench icon will flash quickly for 10
seconds each time the vehicle is started as a reminder that the
periodic maintenance is due.
Set at 50 hours from factory.
10.6
ELECTRICAL
Screen 6 - Miles/Kilometers: toggle, The display in the trip 2. Turn the key switch ON and OFF 3 times within 5 seconds,
meter and odometer can be changed to display either kilometers leaving the key switch in the ‘ON’ position on the third turn.
or miles. The current display mode will be shown as “KM” or
“MP”. To change, hold in the mode button until the letters flash,
then press and release the button once. When the display stops
flashing, the mode has been set.
ON
3.The word “Wait” will appear, the EFI module is now

searching for blink codes. If any blink codes are stored they
MP = Miles will display in numerical order on the instrument cluster.
NOTE: The check engine icon will flash during this
mode.
KM = Kilometers
NOTE: As long as you are in the diagnostic mode, Example of how a failure code will appear.
the wrench icon will remain lit.
NOTE: To leave the diagnostic mode, turn the key

switch off and on.
NOTE: Any movement of the tires will trigger the

speedometer out of the diagnostic mode and into
standard display mode.
EFI Diagnostic Mode

NOTE: The EFI diagnostic mode is intended to 4. The word “End” will display after all of the codes have been
quickly view fault codes stored in the EFI module. displayed.
Polaris dealers are equipped with the proper
10
diagnostic tools to further diagnose the blink code.
To download blink codes (failure codes) from you EFI module:

1. Be sure the ATV key switch is off and with the shifter is in
Park.
10.7
ELECTRICAL
Speedometer Removal
EFI CODE FAILURE DESCRIPTION 1. Remove the three screws that secure the headlight pod
cover and disconnect the wire connectors from the
No RPM Signal instrument cluster.
21 Loss of Synchronization
22 TPS: Open or Short Circuit to Ground
22 TPS: Short Circuit to Battery
23 RAM Error: Defective ECU
25 Transmission Input - Invalid Gear
26 Vehicle Speed Sensor - Implausible
41 Intake Air Temp Sensor: Open or Short

Circuit to +Sensor Voltage
41 Intake Air Temp Sensor: Short Circuit to
Ground
42 Engine Temp Sensor Circuit:
Short to Ground
2. Push the instrument cluster out from the backside of the
42 Engine Temp Sensor Circuit: Open or Short
pod, while securely holding the pod.
to Battery
45 Barometric Pressure Sensor: Circuit Low
Input
46 Barometric Pressure Sensor: Circuit High
Input
51 Injector 1: Open Load
51 Injector 1: Short Circuit to Ground
51 Injector 1: Short Circuit to Battery
52 Injector 2: Open Load
52 Injector 2: Short Circuit to Ground
52 Injector 2: Short Circuit to Battery
54 Engine Temp Lamp: Open Load
54 Engine Temp Lamp: Short Circuit to Ground Bezel
Instrument Bezel
54 Engine Temp Lamp: Short Circuit to Battery
55 Diag Lamp: Open Load Rubber Mount
55 Diag Lamp: Short Circuit to Ground
Pod
55 Diag Lamp: Short Circuit to Battery
56 Pump Relay: Open Load
56 Pump Relay: Short Circuit to Ground
56 Pump Relay: Short Circuit to Battery Push Instrument
Cluster Outward
58 Cooling Fan: Open Load
58 Cooling Fan: Short Circuit to Ground NOTE: Do not remove the rubber grommet in the
58 Cooling Fan: Short Circuit to Battery pod. Only remove the rubber grommet if necessary.
The bezel is a snap-on assembly and is a serviceable
61 END of Check part.
10.8
ELECTRICAL
Speedometer Installation
1. Spray a soap and water mixture onto the outer surface area
of the instrument cluster. This will help the instrument
cluster slide into the pod assembly more easily.
2. Be sure the rubber grommet inside the pod is fully installed

and that the indexing key is in the headlight pod keyway.
Align Index
3. Hold the pod assembly securely and insert the instrument

cluster into the pod assembly. Twist the instrument cluster
gently in a clockwise motion to properly seat the instrument
cluster into the pod assembly. Apply pressure on the bezel
while pressing down on the instrument cluster.
10
NOTE: Do not allow alcohol or petroleum products

to come in contact with the instrument cluster lens.
10.9
ELECTRICAL
SPEEDOMETER TROUBLESHOOTING
Test 1 - No All Wheel Drive
10.10
ELECTRICAL
TEST 2 - No Display / TEST 3 - No Reverse Speed Limit
10
10.11
ELECTRICAL
TEST 4 - No AWD Hub Safety Limiter
10.12
ELECTRICAL
TEST 5 - Reverse Speed Limiter / TEST 6 - Speed Sensor
10
10.13
ELECTRICAL
TEST 7 - No Fuel Gauge / TEST 8 - Transmission Switch
10.14
ELECTRICAL
ACTIVE DESCENT CONTROL (ADC) ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) COIL
COIL
Operation Overview
Operation Overview
• AWD switch must be ‘ON’. 12Vdc power is present at
• AWD switch must be ‘ON’. 12Vdc power is present at the ADC hub coil.
the ADC hub coil. • The instrument cluster senses grounding at pin #16.
• ECU pin #11 controls the grounding of the ADC hub AWD icon should turn on at the instrument cluster.
coil for operation.
• System must be grounded to operate.
• ECU Pin #20 senses the gear signal indicating the
transmission is engaged and is not in Park or Neutral. Diagnosing System Failures
• ECU pin #27 senses the speed sensor signal for • Verify the AWD switch is functional.
determining if vehicle speed is below 15 Mph.
• Verify the AWD hub coil is functional. Test the AWD
• ECU senses the TPS position and will cancel ADC hub coil using an ohm meter.
operation if TPS moves off ‘idle’ position.
Diagnosing System Failures

• Verify the AWD switch is functional.
• Verify the ADC hub coil is functional. Test the ADC
hub coil using an ohm meter.
ADC Hub Coil Resistance:

12 Ω ± 5%
• Verify the TPS is functioning correctly. Test using

Digital Wrench Diagnostic Software. (Dealer Only)
AWD Hub Coil Resistance:
• Verify the wiring harness, wiring, connectors, 24 Ω ± 5%
connector pins, grounds and ECU pin locations are
undamaged, clean and connect properly.
• Verify the wiring harness, wiring, connectors,
• Verify continuity of wire connections with a known connector pins and grounds are undamaged, clean and
good volt/ohm meter. connect properly.
IMPORTANT: Verify all wires and wiring connections • Verify continuity of wire connections with a known
have been tested properly with a known good volt/ good volt/ohm meter.
ohm meter before suspecting a component failure.
80% of all electrical issues are caused by bad/failed IMPORTANT: Verify all wires and wiring connections
connections and grounds. have been tested properly with a known good volt/
ohm meter before suspecting a component failure.
NOTE: Refer to the ADC subsystem diagram located 80% of all electrical issues are caused by bad/failed
in ‘Wire Diagrams’ at the end of this chapter. connections and grounds.
10
10.15
ELECTRICAL
COOLING SYSTEM COMPONENTS Coolant Temperature Sensor
The coolant temperature sensor can be tested using an ohmmeter
Fan Control Circuit Operation / Testing or voltmeter.
Power is supplied to the fan via the Orange/Black wire when the 1. With the engine and temperature sensor at room
relay is ON. The ground path for the fan motor is through the
Brown harness wire. Refer to “RELAYS” later in this chapter temperature (68°F = 20°C), disconnect the harness
for more information on fan functions. connector.
2. With the meter in the ohms mode, place the meter leads
onto the sensor contacts.
CAUTION 3. Use the table Temperature / Resistance table to determine
if the sensor needs to be replaced.
Keep hands away from fan blades during operation.
Serious personal injury could result.
TEMPERATURE °F (°C) RESISTANCE
NOTE: The fan may not function or operation may
68 °F (20 °C) 2.5 k Ω ± 6%
be delayed if coolant level is low or if air is trapped in
the cooling system. Be sure cooling system is full 212 °F (100 °C) 0.186 Ω ± 2%
and purged of air. Refer to Maintenance Chapter 2
for cooling system information.
NOTE: If the coolant temperature sensor or circuit
malfunctions the radiator fan will default to 'ON'.
Fan Control Circuit Bypass Test
1. Disconnect harness from coolant temperature sensor on NOTE: The fan may not function or operation may
engine. be delayed if coolant level is low or if air is trapped in
2. With the ATV in “Park” and with the parking brake on, turn the cooling system. Be sure cooling system is full
the ignition key (and engine stop switch) “ON”. The fan and purged of air. Refer to Maintenance Chapter 2
should start running. for cooling system information.
3. If the fan does not run or runs slowly, check the fan motor
wiring, ground, motor condition and mechanical relay for
proper operation (refer to “FAN MOTOR CURRENT
DRAW” in this section). Repair or replace as necessary.
If the fan runs with the sensor harness disconnected, but
will not turn on when the engine is hot, check the coolant
temperature sensor and connector terminals.
10.16
ELECTRICAL
Fan Motor Current Draw GEAR POSITION INDICATOR SWITCH
A current draw test will provide a good indication of fan motor
condition. A worn or damaged fan motor will draw more Test Diagram
current, which causes a reduction in blade speed and reduced
cooling. NOTE: Also see “INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
TROUBLESHOOTING” for gear switch resistance.
Fan Motor
TRANSMISSION SWITCH
Org/Blk
High/Low/Neutral/Reverse/Park Switch
Org/Blk
Brn
Connect Ammeter Between

Org/Black Pins
Fan Harness
High Range
Low Range
Neutral
Reverse
Park
Green/White Brown/Red
1. Disconnect the harness from the coolant sensor. Violet (purple) White/Blue
2. Connect a DC ammeter in between the fan switch harness
Orange/Red Blue/Red
wires as shown.
3. Be sure fan blade is free to rotate.
4. Turn ignition key and engine stop switch to ON" position.
Read the current draw on ammeter with fan running.
5. If the fan motor draws more than 15 Amps, replace the
motor.
Fan Motor Current Draw:

Should Be Less Than 15 Amps
NOTE: This fan motor current draw specification

only applies to Sportsman EFI models.
10
10.17
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL functioning properly, the engine will lose spark and stop.
(ETC) SWITCH
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Switch (Composite Throttle Housing)
ETC Switch Operation
The Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system is designed to
stop the engine of an ATV in the event of a mechanical problem ETC Switch contacts are
with the throttle mechanism. The ETC switch is mounted closed in a fault condition
independently of the throttle actuator lever inside the throttle (throttle cable slack) Switch contacts are
block assembly. This is a normally closed switch, and is held in open during normal
the open position (contacts are separated (as shown below) by operations
throttle cable tension. The contacts are open" during normal
operation regardless of throttle lever position. In the event of a
mechanical problem in the throttle mechanism (cable tension is
lost), the switch contacts close, connecting the black wire to
ground, which prevents ignition spark. This is the same as
turning the key or engine stop switch “OFF”.
NOTE: Test the ETC switch at the harness
connector. ETC will not activate unless there is
throttle plate movement off of “zero” detected by the
ECU. Adjust throttle cable freeplay (ETC switch) and
make sure throttle mechanism is functioning
properly before testing the switch. Refer to A
Maintenance Chapter 2 for cable adjustment
procedure.
ETC Operation Test

1. Remove throttle block cover by carefully releasing all tabs
around edge of cover.
2. Place transmission in neutral and apply parking brake.
3. Start engine and open throttle lever slightly until engine
RPM is just above idle speed.
4. Hold throttle cable with fingers at point “A” as shown
below and release throttle lever. If the ETC system is
10.18
ELECTRICAL
IGNITION SYSTEM
Flywheel Identification
The flywheel can be identified by the stamp mark in location A. Refer to I.D." location in chart below. Do not use the cast mark
to determine flywheel application.
Kokusan Flywheel
Timing
Marks
Production Date
A Part Number
Engine Application Cast Comment

Kokusan Flywheel 4010912 500 W
EFI - DC/CDI Ignition Overview

The Sportsman EFI system has incorporated into it's design a DC/ CDI ignition system.
The DC/CDI system relies on battery power for ignition. Instead of generating DC voltage via magnetic induction, a 12 Vdc current
is supplied directly to the ECU from the battery. 12 volt DC current charges an internal capacitor to build up the initial ignition charge.
An A/C signal from the Crank Shaft Position Sensor is processed by the ECU, which determines ignition timing by calculating from
a point pre-determined in the crankshaft rotation. This signal releases the electrical charge which saturates the coil for ignition. DC/
CDI systems have the ability to ignite with as little as 6 volts of power.
Some of the advantages of DC ignition are:
• Stronger, more consistent spark at low rpm for better performance
• Easier starts
• Simpler component design for ease trouble shooting and maintenance
NOTE: DC/CDI systems and components are not interchangeable with any other system.
Typical Timing Curve Display
10
10.19
ELECTRICAL
Alternator/Ignition Components - 700/800 EFI
Ignition Coils
Battery to Solenoid Cable
Starter Solenoid
Cable
30 Amp/hr. Battery Coil Wires
Solenoid Switch (starter) Control Module
Relays
Negative Battery Cable Fuses

Spark Plugs
Pre-Wire Winch Cables
Voltage Regulator
Stator Assembly
Flywheel
Crank Position Sensor
10.20
ELECTRICAL
Crankshaft Position Sensor Gap CHARGING SYSTEM
Measure trigger coil gap with a feeler gauge. The gap should be
.059 inch (1.0 mm). Current Draw - Key Off
CAUTION
Do not connect or disconnect the battery cable or

ammeter with the engine running. Damage will
occur to electrical components.
Connect an ammeter in series with the negative battery cable.

Check for current draw with the key off. If the draw is excessive,
loads should be disconnected from the system one by one until
the draw is eliminated. Check component wiring as well as the
component for partial shorts to ground to eliminate the draw.
Current Draw Inspection (key off)

Crankshaft Position Sensor Gap:
.059" ± .010 inch
(1.0 ± .26 mm)
Ignition System Troubleshooting

No Spark, Weak, or Intermittent Spark
• Spark plug gap incorrect YB30L-B
• Fouled spark plug
• Faulty spark plug cap or poor connection to high Current Draw - Key Off:
tension lead Maximum of .01 DCA (10 mA)
• Related wiring loose, disconnected, shorted, or
corroded
• Engine Stop switch or ignition switch faulty
• ETC switch mis-adjusted or faulty
• Wire harness or connections wet, corroded
• Poor ignition coil ground (e.g. coil mount loose or
corroded)
• Incorrect wiring (inspect color coding in connectors
etc.)
• Faulty ignition coil winding (measure resistance of
primary and secondary)
• Sheared flywheel key
10
• Flywheel loose or damaged
• Faulty ECU
10.21
ELECTRICAL
Charging System “Break Even” Test Alternator Output Test
Three tests can be performed using a multimeter to determine
CAUTION the condition of the stator (alternator).
Do not connect or disconnect the battery cable or

ammeter with the engine running. Damage will
occur to electrical components.
The “break even” point of the charging system is the point at

which the alternator overcomes all system loads (lights, etc.)
and begins to charge the battery. Depending on battery
condition and system load, the break even point may vary
slightly. The battery should be fully charged before performing
this test.
WARNING
Never start the engine with an ammeter connected

in series. Damage to the meter or meter fuse will
result. Do not run test for extended period of time. TEST 1: Resistance Value of Each Stator Leg
Do not run test with high amperage accessories.
1. Measure the resistance value of each of the three stator
1. Connect a tachometer to the engine. legs: Y1 to Y2, Y1 to Y3, and Y2 to Y3. Each should
2. Using an inductive amperage metering device, (set to DC measure 0.19 Ω ± 15 %.
amps) connect to the negative battery cable.
3. With engine off and the key, kill switch, and lights in the CONNECT METER
ON position, the ammeter should read negative amps TEST READING IN OHMS
WIRES TO:
(battery discharge). Reverse meter lead if a positive
reading is indicated. Charge Coil Y1 to Y2 0.19 Ω ± 15%
4. Shift transmission into Park and start the engine. With the
Charge Coil Y1 to Y3 0.19 Ω ± 15%
engine running at idle, observe meter readings.
5. Increase engine RPM while observing ammeter and Charge Coil Y2 to Y3 0.19 Ω ± 15%
tachometer.
Y1, Y2, or Y3 to
6. Note RPM at which the battery starts to charge (ammeter Charge Coil Open (Infinity)
Ground
indication is positive).
7. With lights and other electrical loads off, the “break even”
NOTE: If there are any significant variations in
point should occur at approximately 1500 RPM or lower.
ohm's readings between the three legs; it is an
8. With the engine running, turn the lights on and engage indication that one of the three stator legs maybe
parking brake lock to keep brake light on. weak or failed.
9. Repeat test, observing ammeter and tachometer. With
lights on, charging should occur at or below 2000 RPM.
10.22
ELECTRICAL
TEST 2: Resistance Value of Stator Leg to Ground
1. Measure the resistance value of each of the stator legs to
ground: Y1 to Ground, Y2 to Ground, Y3 to Ground.
NOTE: Any measurement other than Infinity (open)
will indicate a failed or shorted stator leg.
TEST 3: Measure AC Voltage Output of Each Stator Leg at

Charging RPM
1. Set the selector dial to measure AC Voltage.
2. Start the engine and let it idle.
3. While holding the ATV at a specified RPM, separately
measure the voltage across each “leg” of the stator by
connecting the meter leads to the wires leading from the
alternator (Y1 to Y2, Y1 to Y3, Y2 to Y3).
4. Refer to the table below for approximate Voltage AC
readings according to RPM. Test each leg at the specified
RPM in the table. Example: The alternator voltage output
reading should be approximately 18 Vac at 1300 RPM
between each 'leg'.
NOTE: If one or more of the stator leg output AC
voltage varies significantly from the specified value,
the stator may need to be replaced.
AC VOLTAGE (VAC )
ATV RPM READING
READING
1300 18 Vac ± 25%

3000 42 Vac ± 25%
5000 64 Vac ± 25%
10
10.23
ELECTRICAL
Charging System Testing Flow Chart
Whenever charging system problems are suspected, proceed with the following system check after verifying that all wires are in good
condition, connected and not kinked or pinched.
Using a multitester set on D.C. volts, measure the

battery open circuit voltage (See earlier test). It Remove the battery and properly service.
should be 12.4 volts or more. Is it? Reinstall the fully charged battery or a fully
No charged shop battery.
Yes
Meter Setting DC Volts

With the transmission in Park, start the engine and
increase RPM to between 3000 and 4000. Read
battery voltage with the multitester. Readings Check Key Off Current Draw
should increase to between 13 and 14.6 VDC. Yes
Are they?
No
Check for owner modification, and

Meter Setting DC Amps discuss operating habits. The battery
Perform system Break Even Amperage Test" will continually discharge if operated
Yes below the “Break Even” RPM.
Does charging occur as specified? Continued problems would call for
battery inspection.
No
Ohm stator wires If bad, replace stator. If good,

continue with alternator output test.
Inspect the wiring harness between the
Meter Setting AC Amps panel and the stator for damage. If no
Disconnect the wires from the regulator/rectifier. damage is found, remove the recoil and
Using a multitester, perform an Alternator Output No flywheel. Inspect the flywheel magnets,
(AC amp) test. See test procedure on Page 10.20 stator coils and stator wire harness for
for procedure. Is output above 7 amps? damage. Repair or replace any damaged
components.
Yes
Meter Setting: DC Volts

Reconnect the alternator wires. Note: Red wire Check regulator/rectifier connections and
must be connected to harness. Battery voltage must No ground, battery connections, circuit
be present on red wire terminal on harness side of breaker and connecting wires. Repair or
voltage regulator connector. Is it? replace faulty wiring or components.
Yes
If all of the previous tests indicate a good

condition, but the charging voltage does not rise
above battery voltage at the connector or wire
harness, replace the voltage regulator.
10.24
ELECTRICAL
RELAYS POWER RELAY
Operation COLOR FUNCTION
The relays, located next to the ECU, assist with component KEY-ON Battery power supply, switched
operation such as the fan, fuel pump, etc. on by the key and LH control switches,
Red/White
enables power to relay. Tied to Fan Relay
The fan relay, controlled by the ECU, operates the fan.
terminal.
The power relay, controlled by the ECU, turns on power for
components such as the fuel pump, injectors, etc. Relay “ON” command. The ECU supplies a
Gray/White ground which closes the relay, supplying
The differential relay, controlled by the AWD switch and ECU, power to run the fuel pump, injectors, etc.
operates the differential solenoid.
Fused 15-amp, unswitched battery power
Orange
IN supply for EFI component operation.
EFI power output. 'ON' when ECU sends a
signal on the GRY/W wire, closing the
Red/Black
relay. Supplies 15-amp power for ECU-
controlled operation of EFI components.
NOTE: See “Differential Relay Testing” on

page 10.34.
FAN RELAY
COLOR FUNCTION
Fused 20-amp, unswitched FAN power

Red
supply.
Fan 'ON' Command. Ground is supplied by
Yellow /Black
the ECU, closing the relay to turn on the fan.
KEY-ON Battery power supply, switched
Red / White on by the key and LH control switches,
enables power to relay.
KEY-ON Battery power supply, switched
Orange / Black on by the key and LH control switches,
10
enables power to relay.
10.25
ELECTRICAL
FUSES/CIRCUIT BREAKER LIGHTING
Operation High Beam Headlight Bulb Replacement
The fuse panel, located next to the ECU, assists with component
protection such as the Instrument Cluster/ECU, EFI system,
Chassis Power and Accessories.
A 20-amp circuit breaker protects the fan circuit. Remove 3 Screws
CAUTION
Do not service while headlight is hot. Serious burns

may result. Protect lamp during install.
1. Remove three Phillips screws on the headlight pod.

2. Lift pod cover up.
3. Disconnect instrument cluster harness (A) and work light
switch (B).
A B
10.26
ELECTRICAL
4. Turn the headlight lamp socket counter-clockwise and 3. Unplug headlamp harness (C).
remove.
Turn Harness Assembly
C
Loosen Tighten
4. Remove O-Ring (D) from headlight pivot pins. (Both

5. Carefully remove headlamp bulb from housing. Sides)
6. Remove the headlamp and replace with a new headlamp.
NOTE: Do not touch the lamp with bare fingers.
Hold the plastic part (1) of the lamp. Oil from your
skin leaves a residue, causing a hot spot that will
shorten the life of the lamp.
D
7. Install the new headlamp and harness assembly into the

headlight assembly. Turn the headlight harness clockwise
to secure the headlamp into place. 5. Pull the headlight housing up to release from the locking
tabs.
Headlight Housing Replacement
1. Remove three Phillips screws on the headlight pod.
2. Disconnect instrument cluster harness (A) and work light l
switch (B).
Pull Upward
A B
10
6. Lift the adjusting knob up to remove from the locking tabs.

7. Carefully pull the assembly up and out of pod.
10.27
ELECTRICAL
8. Reverse the steps to install the new housing and reassemble 1. Place the vehicle on a level surface with the headlight
the pod. approximately 25' (7.6 m) from a wall.
25’ (7.6 m)
Lamp Center Height
2” (5.1 cm)
5 1/8” (13 cm)
NOTE: The distance from the headlamp parting line

to the end of the adjustment knob stop is 5 1/8”, (13 2. Measure the distance from the floor to the center of the
cm). See illustration. headlight and make a mark on the wall at the same height.
9. Adjust the headlight aim by turning the adjusting knob. 3. Start the engine and turn the headlight switch to high beam.
4. Observe headlight aim. The most intense part of the
High Beam Headlight Adjustment headlight beam should be aimed 2” (5.1 cm) below the
mark placed on the wall in Step 2.
The headlight beam can be adjusted to any position desired by NOTE: Rider weight must be included on the seat.
turning the adjusting knob located on the bottom right side of the
headlight pod. On machines with separate low beam lights, the
drop should be 8, (20.3 cm) in 25' from the center of
Raise Headlight - Turn knob counter- counterclockwise the low beam lamp.
Lower Headlight - Turn knob clockwise
5. Adjust beam to desired position.
Lower Headlamp Removal / Installation
Turn Harness Assembly
Loosen Tighten
1. Turn the back of the headllamp harness in a counter-

clockwise direction to loosen.
10.28
ELECTRICAL
2. Pull the harness assembly out from the headlight assembly. Low Beam Headlight Adjustment
1. The low beam can be adjusted slightly upward or
downward.
Loosen Screw
3. Remove the lamp and replace with a new headlamp.

NOTE: Do not touch the new lamp with bare fingers.
Hold the plastic part (1) of the lamp. Oil from your
skin leaves a residue, causing a hot spot that will
shorten the life of the lamp.
2. Loosen the phillips screw located at the rear of the
headlamp.
3. Tilt the headlamp upward or downward.
4. Tighten the screw.
Headlamp Switch Test

1. Remove the headlight pod cover.
4. Install the harness assembly into the headlight assembly. 2. Set meter to DC Volts and probe the headlamp plug wires
Turn the headlight harness clockwise to secure the (Brown and Yellow) at back of connector for 12 Volts.
headlamp into place. 3. Turn ignition and headlight on. If there is no power,
continue with checks to the harness and fuses.
Lower Headlamp Housing Removal (if required)
5. Remove the screw that secures the lower headlamp.
Brown
Yellow
Remove Screw
Upper Headlamp Plug Wires
Brown
Green
10
6. Pull the headlamp out of the locking tab.
10.29
ELECTRICAL
Work Light / Differential Switch Sportsman / Touring Brake Light / Work Light
Replacement
Remove the headlight pod cover to locate the switch wires. The
switch snaps out by pushing in on the tabs on both sides of the The brake light (A) and the work light (B) are both located in the
switch. rear tail lamp housing.
A B
A
Squeeze Tabs - Push To

Remove 1. To remove the worklight electrical connector (B), pull
down on the connector lock and pull the connector from
the bulb assembly.
• Check for continuity between the switch contacts -

Place meter leads between two contacts with switch in
‘ON’ position.
• Probe the worklight plug wires at back of vehicle, there
should be at least 12Vdc at the plug.
• Check for 12 Vdc at the blue wire.
Brown
Blue
Worklight Connector Wires
10.30
ELECTRICAL
2. To remove the brake light electrical connector (B), press in X2 BRAKE LIGHT / WORK LIGHT
on the tab on the connector to unlock the connector and pull REPLACEMENT
the connector from the bulb assembly.
The brake light (A) and the work light (B) are both located in the
rear tail lamp housing.
1. X2 only - Open the tailgate and remove the 2 torx head
screws (A) securing the rear taillights on each side of the
cargo box as illustrated below.
A
A
3. To remove either of the bulbs, turn the holder assembly

counter-clockwise to remove and pull out. Turn the holder
assembly clockwise to install. Refer to the parts manual for
the correct bulb part number.
2. X2 only - Remove the taillight assembly from the cargo
box.
CAUTION
Use caution when disconnecting smaller light bulbs.

Follow the procedures to avoid damaging the
connector. Damaging connectors may require wire 10
harness replacement.
10.31
ELECTRICAL
3. X2 and Touring - Carefully pull out the red locking tab on Brake Light Switch
the connector.
1. Remove the front cover.
Brake Lamp Switch
4. X2 and Touring - Once the red tab is pulled out, press in

on the black tab and pull out to disconnect harness.
Black Tab
Red Tab
Brake Switch
Location
5. X2 and Touring - Disconnect the two wire harnesses
connected to each of the taillights. Twist bulb housing to
2. Disconnect wire harness from switch.
remove from lamp assembly.
3. Connect an ohmmeter across switch contacts. Reading
should be infinite (∞).
4. Apply brake at handlebar lever and check for continuity
between switch contacts. Replace switch if there is no
continuity or greater than .5 ohms resistance when the brake
is applied with slight pressure.
Install Remove
10.32
ELECTRICAL
FUEL SENDER X2 / TOURING DIFFERENTIAL
SYSTEM
Testing
Solenoid Testing
1. Drain the fuel tank and remove it from the atv.
2. Set the fuel tank on a flat surface. Disconnect from the wire harness. Using a digital ohmmeter,
3. Hook up an ohm meter to the fuel sender harness Violet/ test the solenoid at the connector leads and compare to the
specification. Replacement of solenoid is required as it is not
White wire (B) and Brown wire (C). serviceable.
4. With the sender float in the empty position and compare
to specification.
Fuel Sender - Empty: 5 Ω ± 5%
5. Slowly tilt invert the tank so that gravity moves the sender
float to the full position and compare to specification.
Fuel Sender
Empty: 5 Ω ± 5%
Half: 57 Ω ± 5%
Full: 90 Ω ± 5%
Differential Solenoid Resistance:
1.45 Ω ± 5 %
Fuel Sender - Full: 90 Ω ± 5%

Solenoid Replacement
6. If the readings are not to specification, or if the reading is 1. Remove the solenoid using a suitable tool.
erratic or LCD display “sticks”, check the following before 2. Coat threads of new solenoid with anti-seize compound or
replacing the fuel pump assembly. sealant.
3. Thread new solenoid into gearcase housing. Tighten to
• Loose float specification.
• Float contact with tank
• Bent Float Rod =T
If none of the conditions exists, the sender assembly is faulty. Differential Solenoid Torque
Fuel pump assembly replacement is required. 23-27 ft. lbs. (31-37 Nm) 10
10.33
ELECTRICAL
Differential Relay Operation X2 / TOURING SPEED SENSOR
• The AWD switch must be turned to ‘TURF’ mode.
Testing
• Speed must be below 15mph and transmission must not
be in ‘Park’. Using the special tools listed, test the speed sensor according to
the tester instructions. Remove sensor and inspect the o-ring
• 12Vdc is constant at the differential relay. seal for damage or wear and replace as required. Replacement
of sensor is required as it is not serviceable.
• ECU senses grounding on pin #26 from the AWD
switch.
• ECU grounds pin #13, activating the relay.
• Relay powers the differential solenoid.
Differential Relay Testing

• Test for 12Vdc constant at the relay with the AWD
switch turned to ‘TURF’ mode.
• Test for continuity to ground at pin #26 of the ECU
connector from the AWD switch.
• Test for continuity to ground at ECU pin #13.
• Test for continuity at ECU connector pin #13 to the
solenoid.
• Test the AWD/TURF switch for proper function.
IMPORTANT: Verify all wires and wiring connections
have been tested properly with a known good volt/
ohm meter before suspecting an ECU failure. 80% of
all electrical issues are caused by bad/failed
connections and grounds.
Speed Sensor Special Tools:

Static Timing Light Harness
PN 2871745
Hall Sensor Probe Harness
PN 2460761
Replacement
1. Remove the sensor retaining using a suitable tool.
2. Coat o-ring of new sensor with anti-seize compound or
sealant.
3. Push new sensor into gearcase housing. Install bolt and
tighten to specification.
=T
Speed Sensor Bolt Torque
8-12 ft. lbs. (11-17 Nm)
10.34
ELECTRICAL
ACCESSORY POWER NOTE: Refer to the accessory instructions for
accessory hook-up and installation.
Wire Connections
Winch Installation Orange/White Wires Located In This Area
The Sportsman models have the main winch cables routed and
installed from the factory. This enables quick installation.
Refer to Chapter 2 for more information on winch installation
and operation.
Accessory Power Wires
The accessory power leads for all accessories are located under
the front cover. The wires are 12 Volt wires and are Orange /
White in color. To locate the wires, remove the front cover. The
wires will be located in the main wire loom on the right side.
If you have trouble locating the Orange / White wires remove
the left side panel and search under the front fender area.
Orange/White Wires
Accessory Wires
Power Point
Acc #1
(Located
Below Head
Lamps)
10
Acc. 2
10.35
ELECTRICAL
STARTER SYSTEM
Sportsman Starter Lockout Overview and Diagnostic
The Sportsman starter lockout is controlled by the ECU. Pin #20 senses the transmission signal and determines if the switch is in
Neutral or Park. Pin #24 senses when the brake is applied. When the conditions are met, the ECU will activate Pin #16 to ground
the starter solenoid. Note the ground for the transmission switch runs to the wire harness splice. The ECU will allow starting in
Neutral or Park without the brake applied. Applying the brake overrides this system and allows starting regardless of transmission
shift position.
Items to check when diagnosing a no-start condition are:
• Transmission switch for proper function
• Starter solenoid for proper function
• Brake switch for proper function
• Wire harness, loose connections/pins (including the ECU) leading to and from these components
• Proper ground to frame
Should all these items be found in working order, the ECU may be at fault.
5P'SBNF(SPVOE
5P4UBSUFS4PMFOPJE
5P3%8)4QMJDF
10.36
ELECTRICAL
X2 /TOURING Starter Lockout Overview and Diagnostic
The Sportsman X2 and Touring starter lockout is controlled by the ECU. Pin #20 senses the transmission signal and determines if
the switch is in Neutral or Park. Pin #24 senses when the brake is applied. When the conditions are met, the ECU will activate Pin
#16 to ground the starter solenoid. Note the ground for the transmission switch runs to the wire harness splice. The ECU will allow
starting in Neutral or Park without the brake applied. Applying the brake overrides this system and allows starting regardless of
transmission shift position.
Items to check when diagnosing a no-start condition are:
• Transmission switch for proper function
• Starter solenoid for proper function
• Brake switch for proper function
• Wire harness, loose connections/pins (including the ECU) leading to and from these components
• Proper ground to frame
Should all these items be found in working order, the ECU may be at fault.
5P4UBSUFS4PMFOPJE
5P3%8)4QMJDF
10
10.37
ELECTRICAL
Troubleshooting Starter Motor Removal / Disassembly
Starter Motor Does Not Run NOTE: Use electrical contact cleaner to clean starter
motor parts. Some solvents may leave a residue or
• Battery discharged - Low specific gravity
damage internal parts and insulation.
• Loose or faulty battery cables or corroded connections
(see Voltage Drop Tests)
• Related wiring loose, disconnected, or corroded
• Poor ground connections at battery cable, starter motor
or starter solenoid (see Voltage Drop Tests)
• Faulty key switch
• Faulty kill switch
• Faulty starter lockout function
• Faulty starter solenoid or starter motor
• Engine problem - seized or binding (Can engine be
rotated easily?)
Starter Motor Turns Over Slowly
• Battery discharged - low specific gravity 1. Remove the starter from the engine.
• Excessive circuit resistance - poor connections (see 2. Remove the two bolts, washers, and sealing O-Rings.
Voltage Drop Test) Inspect O-Rings and replace if damaged.
• Engine problem - seized or binding (Can engine be
rotated easily?)
• Faulty or worn brushes in starter motor
Starter Motor Turns - Engine Does Not Rotate
• Faulty starter drive
• Faulty starter drive gears or starter motor gear
• Faulty flywheel gear or loose flywheel
Voltage Drop Test

The Voltage Drop Test is used to test for bad connections. When
performing the test, you are testing the amount of voltage drop
through the connection. A poor or corroded connection will
appear as a high voltage reading. Voltage shown on the meter
when testing connections should not exceed .1 VDC per NOTE: Note the alignment marks on both ends of
connection or component. the starter motor casing. These marks must align
To perform the test, place the meter on DC volts and place the during reassembly.
meter leads across the connection to be tested. Refer to the
voltage drop tests on the starter system in this chapter.
Voltage should not exceed

.1 DC volts per connection
10.38
ELECTRICAL
3. Remove the front bracket assembly and the rear bracket 2. Measure resistance between insulated brush and starter
assembly. Remove the shims from the armature shaft and housing. Reading should be infinite. (OL). Inspect
inspect the O-rings located on the armature housing. insulation on brush wires for damage and repair or replace
as necessary.
O-Rings
Shims
NOTE: The shims will be replaced during 3. Slide positive brush springs to the side, pull brushes out of
reassembly. their guides and remove brush plate. Slide brush end frame
off end of starter.
BRUSH INSPECTION / REPLACEMENT NOTE: The electrical input post must stay with the
1. Measure resistance between starter input terminal and field coil housing.
insulated brushes. The reading should be .3 ohms or less.
4. Measure resistance between ground brush and brush plate.
Remember to subtract meter lead resistance.
Resistance should be .3 ohms or less.
Brush Inspection
1. Measure length of each carbon brush. Replace brush
10
assembly when worn to 5/16” (8 mm) or less. The brushes
must slide freely in their holders.
Brush Length
Limit 5/16” (8 mm)
10.39
ELECTRICAL
Brush Replacement 4. Measure the resistance between each commutator segment
and the armature shaft. The reading should be infinite (no
1. Remove terminal nut with lock washer, flat washer, large
continuity).
phenolic washer, the small phenolic spacers, and sealing
O-ring. Inspect O-ring and replace if damaged.
2. Slide positive brush springs to the side, pull brushes out of

their guides and remove brush plate.
CAUTION
Some cleaning solvents may damage the insulation 5. Check commutator bars for discoloration. Bars discolored
in the starter. Care should be exercised when in pairs indicate shorted coils, requiring replacement of the
selecting an appropriate solvent. If the commutator starter motor.
needs cleaning use only electrical contact cleaner. 6. Place armature in a growler. Turn growler on and position
a hacksaw blade or feeler gauge lengthwise 1/8” (.3 cm)
Armature Testing above armature coil laminates. Rotate armature 360°. If
hacksaw blade is drawn to armature on any pole, the
1. Remove armature from starter casing. Note order of shims armature is shorted and must be replaced.
on drive end for reassembly.
CAUTION
Use care when handling starter housing. Do not

drop or strike the housing as magnet damage is
possible. If magnets are damaged, starter must be
replaced.
2. Inspect surface of commutator. Replace if excessively

worn or damaged.
3. Using a digital multitester, measure the resistance between
each of the commutator segments. The reading should be
.3 ohms or less.
10.40
ELECTRICAL
Starter Reassembly / Installation 9. Lightly grease pinion shaft and install pinion, spring
stopper, and snap ring.
1. Install brush plate to field magnet housing aligning index
tab.
10. Install the starter onto the engine case. Hand tighten each
of the starter bolts. Torque the bottom bolt first to 9
2. Install O-ring, two small phenolic spacers, large phenolic ft.lbs. (12 Nm). Then torque the top bolt to the same
washer, flat washer, lock washer, and terminal nut. specification.
3. While holding brush springs away from brushes, push NOTE: It is important to tighten the bottom starter
brushes back and hold in place. bolt first (circle), as the bottom hole acts as a pilot
4. Slide armature into field magnet housing. Release brushes. hole to properly align the starter drive (bendix) with
5. Lightly grease the drive roller bearing and reinstall drive the flywheel. This helps to prevent binding and
end frame on armature. Inspect seal for wear or damage. starter damage.
Replace drive end cap if necessary.
Roller Bearing
Seal
Starter Solenoid Bench Test

6. Be sure wire insulation is in place around positive brush
To measure the resistance of the pull-in coil, connect one meter
wire and pushed completely into slot on phenolic plate.
lead to the solenoid lead wire and the other to ground. The 10
7. Using Dielectric Grease (PN 2871329), lubricate brush end resistance should be 2.8-3.6 ohms. Refer to “Electric Starter
bushing and install shims. System Testing” in this section to further test the solenoid.
8. Align brush plate and install cover and screws.
10.41
ELECTRICAL
Starter Drive
Pinion Gear - Anti-kick Out Shoe, Garter Spring Replacement
If the garter spring is damaged, the overrun clutch may fail to return properly. Use either of the following methods to remove and
install a new garter spring:
H
G
A F
D
A. Gear Assembly E
B. Thrust Washer C
C. Busing
D. Retaining Ring
E. Thrust Washer
F. Stopper
G. Cover
H. Spring
1. Screw the overrun clutch out to the engaged position on the pinion shaft assembly. Use a small piece of wire with the end bent
in a hook and pick the old spring out of its channel. Slide it off the end of the shaft. Slide the new spring over the overrun
clutch and into the spring groove. Make sure that the spring is positioned between the shoe alignment pins and the back flange
of the anti kick-out shoes.
2. Remove the retaining ring, thrust washer, spring retainers and clutch return spring. Screw the overrun clutch off the end of the
pinion shaft. Remove the old spring and install a new one. Lightly grease the pinion shaft and reinstall the clutch, spring,
retainers, end washer and lock ring in the reverse order. Make sure the end washer is positioned properly so that it will hold
the lock ring in its groove.
10.42
ELECTRICAL
Starter Exploded View
* Indicates - Do not reuse. 1. Rubber Ring* 10. Gear Assembly

Replace with new parts. 2. Brush Spring 11. Through Bolt
3. Thrust Washer
4. Gear Assembly
12. Cover
13. Stopper
10
5. O-Ring* 14. Snap Ring
6. Brush Complete 15. Washer
7. O-Ring* 16. Flange Bolt
8. Thrust Washer 17. Thrust Washer
9. Shaft Complete 18. Flange Bushing
10.43
ELECTRICAL
STARTER SYSTEM TESTING FLOW CHART
Condition: Starter fails to turn motor. NOTE: Make sure engine crankshaft is free to turn
before proceeding with dynamic testing of starter system. A digital multitester must be used
for this test
With the tester on the VDC position, place the
tester's black lead on the battery negative and the
red lead on the battery positive. Reading should Remove battery and properly service. Install
be 12.4 V D. C. or greater. No fully charged shop battery to continue test.
Yes
Disconnect coil engagement wire from the starter Check voltage on both sides of circuit
solenoid. Connect tester black wire to battery breaker, ignition switch/engine stop switch
ground. Connect red tester lead to harness wire at and starter button. The voltage on both sides
solenoid. Turn on ignition switch and depress the No should be the same. NOTE: The ignition
starter button. Tester should read battery voltage. switch and engine stop switch must be on and
the starter button depressed. Replace
component if failed .
Test starter solenoid coil by connecting an ohmmeter between the solenoid

wire and the solenoid mounting plate. Resistance should be 3.4°Ω. Check
Yes solenoid ground path by measuring resistance between mounting plate and
battery negative terminal (-).
Voltage Drop
Testing
Reconnect the solenoid. Connect the tester black No Clean the battery-to-solenoid cable ends
lead to the battery positive and the red lead to the or replace the cable.
solenoid end of the battery-to-solenoid wire.
Depress starter button. Reading should be less
than .1 V D.C.
Yes
Connect the black tester lead to solenoid end of

battery-to-solenoid cable. Connect red tester lead
to solenoid end of solenoid-to-starter cable. No
Replace the starter solenoid.
Depress starter button. Reading should be less than
.1 V D.C.
Yes
Connect the black tester lead to the solenoid end of

the solenoid-to-starter cable. Connect the red
tester lead to the starter end of the same cable. No Clean the solenoid-to-starter cable ends or
Depress the starter button. The reading should be replace the cable.
less than .1 V D.C.
Yes
If all of these indicate a good condition, yet the starter still fails to
turn, the starter must be removed for static testing and inspection.
10.44
ELECTRICAL
BASIC WINCH WIRING- PRE-WIRED MODELS
10
10.45
ELECTRICAL
BATTERY Battery Activation (Conventional)
Battery Identification
WARNING
NOTE: It is important to identify what type of battery
you have installed in your ATV. Different types of Battery electrolyte is poisonous. It contains sulfuric
batteries require different service procedures. acid. Serious burns can result from contact with
Proper servicing and upkeep of your battery is very skin, eyes or clothing. Antidote:
important for maintaining long battery life.
External: Flush with water.
Your ATV may have a Conventional Battery or a Sealed Low
Maintenance Battery. To identify which type of battery your
ATV has, refer to the illustration below and follow the correct Internal: Drink large quantities of water or milk.
service and charging procedures that follow in the manual. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten egg, or
vegetable oil. Call physician immediately.
Conventional Battery
Eyes: Flush with water for 15 minutes and get
Removable prompt medical attention.
Caps
Batteries produce explosive gases. Keep sparks,

flame, cigarettes, etc. away. Ventilate when
charging or using in an enclosed space. Always
Top View shield eyes when working near batteries. KEEP
OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN.
Electrolyte Level
Indicator WARNING
The gases given off by a battery are explosive. Any

spark or open flame near a battery can cause an
explosion which will spray battery acid on anyone
close to it. Should there be contact with battery
acid, wash the affected area with large quantities of
cool water and seek immediate medical attention.
Sealed Low
To ensure maximum service life and performance from a new
Maintenance Battery battery, perform the following steps.
NOTE: Do not service the battery unless it will be
No Caps (Non- put into regular service within 30 days. After initial
Removable) service, add only distilled water to the battery.
Never add electrolyte after a battery has been in
service.
Top View
NOTE: New Battery: Battery must be fully charged
before use or battery life will be significantly
No Electrolyte reduced 10-30% of the battery's full potential.
Level Indicator
To activate a new battery:
1. Remove vent plug from vent fitting. Remove cell caps.
2. Fill battery with electrolyte to upper level marks on case.
3. Set battery aside to allow for acid absorption and
stabilization for 30 minutes.
10.46
ELECTRICAL
4. Add electrolyte to bring level back to upper level mark on Inspect the battery fluid level. When the battery fluid nears the
case. lower level, remove the battery and fill with distilled water only
to the upper level line. To remove the battery:
NOTE: This is the last time that electrolyte should
be added. If the level becomes low after this point,
add only distilled water.
5. Charge battery at 1/10 of its amp/hour rating. Examples: Maintain

1/10 of 9 amp battery = .9 amp; 1/10 of 14 amp battery = between
1.4 amp; 1/10 of 18 amp battery = 1.8 amp (recommended upper and
lower level
charging rates). marks
6. Check specific gravity of each cell with a hydrometer to
assure each has a reading of 1.270 or higher.
Battery Terminals/Bolts
Terminal Preparation
Use Polaris corrosion resistant Nyogel™ grease (PN 2871329)
on battery bolts and terminals when installing a battery. This
will help to prevent corrosion and maintain good electrical
connection. See “BATTERY INSTALLATION”. 1. Disconnect holder strap and remove covers.
2. Disconnect battery negative (-) (black) cable first, followed
Conventional Battery Inspection / Removal by the positive (+) (red) cable.
The battery is located under the seat on Sportsman models.
CAUTION
Whenever removing or reinstalling the battery,

disconnect the negative (black) cable first and
reinstall the negative cable last!
3. Remove the battery.

4. Remove the filler caps and add distilled water only as
needed to bring each cell to the proper level. Do not overfill
the battery.
NOTE: Refill using only distilled water. Tap water
contains minerals which are harmful to a battery.
NOTE: Do not allow cleaning solution or tap water

inside the battery. Battery life may be reduced.
5. Reinstall the battery caps.

The X2 and Touring battery is located under fuel tank and can
be accessed by removing the right hand side panel. Conventional Battery Installation
1. lean battery cables and terminals with a stiff wire brush.
Corrosion can be removed using a solution of one cup 10
water and one tablespoon baking soda. Rinse well with
clean water and dry thoroughly.
2. Route the cables correctly.
3. Reinstall battery, attaching positive (+) (red) cable first and
then the negative (-) (black) cable. Coat terminals and bolt
threads with Nyogel™ Grease (PN 2871329).
BATTERY
10.47
ELECTRICAL
4. Install clear battery vent tube from vehicle to battery vent.
WARNING
Vent tube must be free from obstructions and kinks and

securely installed. If not, battery gases could accumulate Battery Hydrometer (PN 2870836)
and cause an explosion. The vent tube should be routed
away from frame and body to prevent contact with Route
the cables correctly.
5. Reinstall the holder strap.
Conventional Battery Testing

Whenever a service complaint is related to either the starting or
charging systems, the battery should be checked first.
Following are three tests which can easily be made on a battery
to determine its condition: OCV Test, Specific Gravity Test and OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
Load Test.
STATE OF CONVENTIONAL
LOW MAINTENANCE
Conventional Battery OCV - Open Circuit CHARGE LEAD - ACID
Voltage Test
100% 12.60V 12.70V
Battery voltage should be checked with a digital multitester.
Readings of 12.6 volts or less require further battery testing and Charged 12.40V 12.50V
charging. See charts and Load Test below.
75% Charged 12.10V 12.20V
NOTE: Lead-acid batteries should be kept at or near
50% Charged 11.90V 12.0V
a full charge as possible. Electrolyte level should be
kept between the low and full marks. If the battery is 25% Charged less than 11.80V Less than 11.90V
stored or used in a partially charged condition, or
0% Charged -- --
with low electrolyte levels, hard crystal sulfation will
form on the plates, reducing the efficiency and
service life of the battery. SPECIFIC GRAVITY
Conventional Battery Specific Gravity Test STATE OF CONVENTIONAL

LOW MAINTENANCE
CHARGE* LEAD - ACID
A tool such as a Battery Hydrometer (PN 2870836) can be used
to measure electrolyte strength or specific gravity. As the 100% 1.265 1.275
battery goes through the charge/discharge cycle, the electrolyte
goes from a heavy (more acidic) state at full charge to a light Charged 1.210 1.225
(more water) state when discharged. The hydrometer can
measure state of charge and differences between cells in a multi- 75% Charged 1.160 1.175
cell battery. Readings of 1.270 or greater should be observed in
a fully charged battery. Differences of more than .025 between 50% Charged 1.120 1.135
the lowest and highest cell readings indicate a need to replace
the battery. 25% Charged less than 1.100 Less than 1.115
0% Charged -- --
* Measurement at 80° F
NOTE: Subtract .01 from the specific gravity reading
at 40° F
10.48
ELECTRICAL
Battery Load Test NOTE: Recharge to full capacity every 30 to 60 days
during a non-use period. If the battery is stored
during the winter months, electrolyte will freeze at
CAUTION higher temperatures as the battery discharges. The
chart below indicates freezing points by specific
To prevent shock or component damage, remove gravity.
spark plug high tension leads and connect securely
to engine ground before proceeding. ELECTROLYTE FREEZING POINTS
NOTE: This test can only be performed on machines SPECIFIC GRAVITY OF

FREEZING POINT
with electric starters. This test cannot be performed ELECTROLYTE
with an engine or starting system that is not working
properly. 1.265 -75° F
1.225 -35° F
A battery may indicate a full charge condition in the OCV test
and the specific gravity test, but still may not have the storage
capacity necessary to properly function in the electrical system. 1.200 -17° F
For this reason, a battery capacity or load test should be
conducted whenever poor battery performance is encountered. 1.150 +5° F
To perform this test, hook a multitester to the battery in the same
manner as was done in the OCV test. The reading should be 12.6 1.100 +18° F
volts or greater. Engage the starter and observe the battery
voltage while cranking the engine. Continue the test for 15 1.050 +27° F
seconds. During cranking the observed voltage should not drop
below 9.5 volts. If the beginning voltage is 12.6 volts or higher
and the cranking voltage drops below 9.5 volts during the test, Charging Procedure
replace the battery.
1. Remove the battery from the ATV to prevent damage from
Off Season Storage leaking or spilled acid during charging.
To prevent battery damage during extended periods of non-use, 2. Charge the battery with a charging output no larger than 1/
the following basic battery maintenance items must be 10 of the battery's amp/hr rating. Charge as needed to raise
performed: the specific gravity to 1.270 or greater.
• Remove the battery from the machine and wash the 3. Install battery in vehicle with positive terminal toward the
case and battery tray with a mild solution of baking front. Coat threads of battery bolt with a corrosion resistant
soda and water. Rinse with lots of fresh water after dielectric grease (PN 2871329).
cleaning. NOTE: Do not get any of the baking soda
into the battery or the acid will be neutralized. 4. Connect battery cables.
• Using a wire brush or knife, remove any corrosion from
the cables and terminals. WARNING
• Make sure that the electrolyte is at the proper level.
Add distilled water if necessary. To avoid the possibility of explosion, connect
positive (red) cable first and negative (black) cable
• Charge at a rate no greater than 1/10 of the battery's last.
amp/hr capacity until the electrolyte's specific gravity
reaches 1.270 or greater.
5. After connecting the battery cables, install the cover on the
• Store the battery either in the machine with the cables battery and attach the hold down strap.
disconnected, or store in a cool place.
10
10.49
ELECTRICAL
6. Install clear battery vent tube from vehicle to battery vent. NEW BATTERIES: Batteries must be fully charged before
use or battery life can be reduced by 10-30% of full potential.
Charge battery for 3-5 hours using a variable rate charger. Do
WARNING not use the alternator to charge a new battery. A high rate battery
charger can cause battery damage.
Vent tube must be free from obstructions and kinks Low Maintenance batteries are permanently sealed at the time of
and securely installed. If not, battery gases could manufacture. The use of lead-calcium and AGM technology
accumulate and cause an explosion. Vent should instead of lead-antimony allows the battery acid to be fully
absorbed. For this reason, a Low Maintenance battery case is
be routed away from frame and body to prevent dark and the cell caps are not removable, since there is no need
contact with electrolyte. Avoid skin contact with to check electrolyte level.
electrolyte, as severe burns could result.
If electrolyte contacts the vehicle frame, NEVER attempt to add electrolyte or water to a Low
Maintenance battery. Doing so will damage the case and shorten
corrosion will occur. the life of the battery. Refer to the Battery Activation and
Maintenance Video (PN 9917987) for proper instruction on
7. Route cables so they are tucked away in front and behind servicing Low Maintenance batteries.
battery.
NOTE: New Batteries: Batteries must be fully
charged before use or battery life will be reduced by
Low Maintenance Battery 10-30% of full potential. Charge battery for 3-5 hours
Battery Check: at a current equivalent of 1/10 of the battery's rated
amp/hour capacity. Do not use the alternator to
NOTE: All Low Maintenance batteries are fully charge a new battery. (Refer to Battery Activation
charged and tested at the factory before installation. and Maintenance video PN 9917987)
Expected shelf life varies on storage conditions. As
a general rule before placing the battery into service, NEVER attempt to add electrolyte or water to a Low
check the battery condition and charge accordingly. Maintenance battery. Doing so will damage the case and shorten
the life of the battery. Refer to the Battery Maintenance Video
(PN 9917987) for proper instruction on servicing Low
1. Check the date label on the side of the battery to calculate Maintenance batteries.
when to check voltage. The battery should be checked
every 3 months. TO SERVICE A LOW MAINTENANCE BATTERY:
2. Check the voltage with a voltmeter or multimeter. A fully 1. Remove battery from the vehicle.
charged battery should be 12.8 V or higher. 2. Test battery with a voltage meter or load tester to determine
3. If the voltage is below 12.8 V, the battery will need to be battery condition. This will determine the length of time
recharged. required to charge the battery to full capacity. Refer to
capacity table.
3. Charge battery using a variable rate charger.
Low Maintenance Battery Charging

If battery voltage is 12.8 V or less, the battery may need
recharging. When using an automatic charger, refer to the
charger manufacturer's instructions for recharging. When using
a constant current charger, use the following guidelines for
recharging.
NOTE: Always verify battery condition before and 1-
2 hours after the end of charging.
WARNING
An overheated battery could explode, causing

severe injury or death. Always watch charging
times carefully. Stop charging if the battery
becomes very warm to the touch. Allow it to cool
before resuming charging.
10.50
ELECTRICAL
BATTERY CHARGING REFERENCE TABLE The X2 and Touring battery is located under fuel tank and can
be accessed by removing the right hand side panel.
STATE OF CHARGE
VOLTAGE ACTION
CHARGE TIME
None, check
voltage at 3 mos. None
100% 12.8-13 V
after manufacture Required
date
May need slight
75-100% 12.5-12.8 V 3-6 Hours
charge BATTERY
50-75% 12.0-12.5 V Needs Charge 5-11 Hours
At least 13
hours, verify
25-50% 11.5-12.0 V Needs Charge
state of
charge
11.5 V At least 20 1. Remove the seat and Disconnect holder strap.
0-25% Needs Charge
or less hours 2. Disconnect battery negative (-) (black) cable first, followed
by the positive (+) (red) cable.
Low Maintenance Battery Inspection /
Removal CAUTION
The battery is located under the seat on Sportsman models.
Whenever removing or reinstalling the battery,
disconnect the negative (black) cable first and
reinstall the negative cable last!
3. Remove the battery.
Low Maintenance Battery Installation

1. Clean battery cables and terminals with a stiff wire brush.
Corrosion can be removed using a solution of one cup
water and one tablespoon baking soda. Rinse well with
clean water and dry thoroughly.
2. Route the cables correctly.
3. Reinstall battery, attaching positive (+) (red) cable first and
then the negative (-) (black) cable. Coat terminals and bolt
threads with Nyogel™ Grease (PN 2871329).
4. Reinstall the holder strap.
10
10.51
ELECTRICAL
Low Maintenance Battery - OCV- Open Low Maintenance Battery Load Test
Circuit Voltage Test
Battery voltage should be checked with a digital multitester.
Readings of 12.8 volts or less require further battery testing and
CAUTION
charging. See charts and Load Test.
To prevent shock or component damage, remove
NOTE: Lead-acid batteries should be kept at or near spark plug high tension leads and connect securely
a full charge as possible. If the battery is stored or to engine ground before proceeding.
used in a partially charged condition, or with low
electrolyte levels, hard crystal sulfation will form on NOTE: This test can only be performed on machines
the plates, reducing the efficiency and service life of with electric starters. This test cannot be performed
the battery. with an engine or starting system that is not working
properly.
NOTE: Use a voltmeter or multimeter to test battery
voltage. A battery may indicate a full charge condition in the OCV test
and the specific gravity test, but still may not have the storage
OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE capacity necessary to properly function in the electrical system.
For this reason, a battery capacity or load test should be
conducted whenever poor battery performance is encountered.
STATE OF LOW MAINTENANCE CONVENTIONAL To perform this test:
CHARGE BATTERY BATTERY
1. Hook a multitester to the battery in the same manner as was
100 % 13.0V 12.70V done in the OCV test. The reading should be 12.8 volts or
greater.
75% Charged 12.80V 12.50V
2. Engage the starter and observe the battery voltage while
50% 12.50V 12.20V cranking the engine. Continue the test for 15 seconds.
25% 12.20V 12.0V 3. During cranking the observed voltage should not drop
below 9.5 volts.
0% Charged less than 12.0V less than 11.9V 4. If the beginning voltage is 12.8 volts or higher and the
cranking voltage drops below 9.5 volts during the test,
* Measurement at 80° F replace the battery.
NOTE: Subtract .01 from the specific gravity reading

at 40° F.
10.52
ELECTRICAL
Low Maintenance Battery Off-season Low Maintenance Battery Charging
Storage Procedure
Battery voltage should be checked with a digital multitester. 1. Remove the battery from the ATV to prevent damage from
Readings of 12.8 volts or less require further battery testing and leaking or spilled acid during charging.
charging. See charts and Load Test.
2. Charge the battery with a variable rate charging output.
• Remove the battery from the machine and wash the Charge as needed to raise the specific gravity to 1.270 or
case and battery tray with a mild solution of baking greater.
soda and water. Rinse with lots of fresh water after
cleaning. 3. Install battery in vehicle with positive terminal toward the
front. Coat threads of battery bolt with a corrosion resistant
• Using a wire brush or knife, remove any corrosion from Nyogel™ Grease (PN 2871329).
the cables and terminals.
4. Route cables so they are tucked away in front and behind
• Make sure that the electrolyte is at the proper level. battery.
• Charge at a rate no greater than 1/10 of the battery's 5. Connect battery cables.
amp/hr capacity until the electrolyte's specific gravity
reaches 1.270 or greater.
WARNING
• Store the battery either in the machine with the cables
disconnected, or store in a cool place.
To avoid the possibility of sparks and explosion,
NOTE: Stored batteries lose their charge at the rate connect positive (red) cable first and negative
of 1% per day. Recharge to full capacity every 30 to (black) cable last.
60 days during a non-use period. If the battery is
stored during the winter months, electrolyte will 6. After connecting the battery cables, install the cover on the
freeze at higher temperatures as the battery battery and attach the hold down strap.
discharges. The chart below indicates freezing
points by specific gravity.
ELECTROLYTE FREEZING POINTS

SPECIFIC GRAVITY OF
FREEZING POINT
ELECTROLYTE
1.265 -75° F
1.225 -35° F
1.200 -17° F
1.150 +5° F
1.100 +18° F
1.050 +27° F
10
10.53
ELECTRICAL
TROUBLESHOOTING DIAGRAMS
Overview
IMPORTANT: Illustrations are representative and may not apply to all models. Refer to the wire diagrams for the
correct wire circuit and technical information (if applicable).
All Wheel Drive - EFI
Charging Circuit - EFI
10.54
ELECTRICAL
Cooling Fan - EFI
Fuel Pump - EFI
10
10.55
ELECTRICAL
Gear Switch - EFI
Power Circuit - EFI
10.56
ELECTRICAL
Reverse Override - EFI
Fan Control - EFI
10
10.57
ELECTRICAL
Start Circuit - EFI
Start Enable - EFI
10.58
800 TOURING EFI INTERNATIONAL
CHAPTER 11
800 TOURING EFI INTERNATIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2
OVERVIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2
EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3
800 TOURING EFI INTERNATIONAL STEERING POST AND LOCK ASSEMBLY . . . . 11.4
STEERING ASSEMBLY EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4
800 TOURING EFI INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5
TURN / HAZARD SIGNAL DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5
NOTE: This chapter illustrates components that are unique to the Sportsman 800 Touring EFI International.
Except where noted, any servicing of these components or other components
on the ATV can be done using this service manual’s procedures and illustrations.
11
11.1
800 TOURING EFI INTERNATIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM
Overview
The Sportsman Touring International brake system consists of a complete hydraulic brake system. All-wheel braking is integrated
into the foot brake and hand brake systems and allows 4 wheel braking from either control separately, or at the same time.
When the foot brake is applied, all brake calipers are active, as braking pressure is routed from the foot brake master cylinder through
the proportioning valve and distribution block, exiting one line to the front calipers, while the other line exits the proportioning valve
and feeds the outer line to the rear calipers.
When the hand brake is applied, all brake calipers are active, as braking pressure is routed from the hand brake master cylinder
through the distribution block, exiting one line to the front calipers, while the other line feeds the inner line to the rear calipers.
11.2
Exploded View
Hand Brake Supply
Foot Brake Supply
11
11.3
800 TOURING EFI INTERNATIONAL STEERING POST AND LOCK ASSEMBLY
Steering Assembly Exploded View
The 800 Touring EFI International Sportsman is equipped with a locking mechanism to prevent theft or unauthorized use. Steering
post removal may be required for lock service or repair.
Lock System Item Number / Description:
11. Lock Collar
12. Lock Set
13. Bolt, Lock Set
14. Bolt(s), Lock Collar
15. Nut(s), Lock Collar
11.4
800 TOURING EFI INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL
Turn / Hazard Signal Diagram
11
11.5
NOTES
11.6
WIRE DIAGRAM
2009 SPORTSMAN 800 EFI WIRE DIAGRAM
WD-1
WIRE DIAGRAM
WD-2
WIRE DIAGRAM
2009 SPORTSMAN 800 X2 / 800 TOURING EFI WIRE DIAGRAM
WD-3
WIRE DIAGRAM
WD-4
WIRE DIAGRAM
2009 SPORTSMAN 800 TOURING EFI INTERNATIONAL WIRE DIAGRAM
WD-5
WIRE DIAGRAM
WD-6
WIRE DIAGRAM
SPORTSMAN ACTIVE DESCENT CONTROL (ADC) WIRE DIAGRAM
WD-7
WIRE DIAGRAM
INTENTIONAL BLANK PAGE
WD-8
WIRE DIAGRAM
SPORTSMAN 800 EFI CIRCUIT BREAKOUT
WD-9
WIRE DIAGRAM
WD-10
WIRE DIAGRAM
WD-11
WIRE DIAGRAM
WD-12
WIRE DIAGRAM
WD-13
WIRE DIAGRAM
WD-14

Polaris Sportsman 800 EFI 2009 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Polaris Sportsman 800 EFI 2009 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Polaris Sportsman 800 EFI 2009 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GENERAL INFORMATION

Engine Designation Numbers

TRANSMISSION I.D. LOCATION

Table 1-1: Publications

Table 1-2: Paint Codes

Table 1-3: Key Numbers

2009 SPORTSMAN 800 EFI

Table 1-4: Sportsman 800 EFI

Engine Displacement 760cc Front Gearcase Capacity- CH 8.97 / 265 ml

Number of Cylinders 2 Rear Gearcase Capacity 5 oz. / 150ml

2009 SPORTSMAN X2 800 EFI

Table 1-8: Sportsman X2 800 EFI

Engine Displacement 760cc Front Gearcase Capacity- ADC 9.3 / 275 ml

Number of Cylinders 2 Gear Ratio : Low 23.91:1

Fuel System Ground Clearance 11.25 in. / 28.6 cm

Alternator Output 500 w @ 6000 RPM Rear Tire Size 25 x 11 - 12

2009 SPORTSMAN TOURING 800 EFI

ENGINE MODEL: EH076OLE

Table 1-12: 2009 Sportsman Touring

Engine Displacement 760cc Front Gearcase Capacity- ADC 9.3 / 275 ml

Number of Cylinders 2 Gear Ratio : Low 23.91:1

Fuel System Ground Clearance 11.25 in. / 28.6 cm

Alternator Output 500 w @ 6000 RPM Rear Tire Size 25 x 11 - 12

Bolt Size Threads/In Grade 2 Grade 5 Grade 8

Unit of Measure Multiplied by Converts to

°C to °F: 9 (°C + 40) ÷ 5 - 40 = °F

Maintenance Chart Key

Table 2-1: REQUIRED MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

ITEM MAINTENANCE INTERVAL REMARKS

Hours Calendar Miles (KM)

Front Suspension -- Pre-Ride --

Rear Suspension -- Pre-Ride --

ADC Fluid Level -- Pre-Ride --

Brake Fluid Level -- Pre-Ride --

Brake Systems -- Pre-Ride --

Frame Fasteners -- Pre-Ride --

, E Engine Oil Level -- Pre-Ride --

Air Box Sediment

Air filter, main

Recoil housing Drain water as needed, check often if operating in

, E Brake Pad Wear 10 H Monthly 60 (100) Inspect periodically

Battery 20 H Monthly 125 (200) Check terminals; clean; test

E = Emission Control System Service (California)

= Have an authorized Polaris Dealer perform these services.

ITEM MAINTENANCE INTERVAL REMARKS

Hours Calendar Miles (KM)

Front gearcase oil

Rear gearcase oil

Transmission Oil 25 H Monthly 155 (250) Inspect level; change yearly

Engine oil change

Shift Linkage 50 H 6M 310 (500) Inspect, lubricate, adjust

Steering 50 H 6M 310 (500) Lubricate

Front Suspension 50 H 6M 310 (500) Lubricate

Rear Suspension 50 H 6M 310 (500) Lubricate

Drive belt 50 H 6M 310 (500) Inspect; adjust; replace as needed

Cooling system Inspect coolant strength seasonally; pressure test

Oil tank vent hose

, E Valve Clearance 100 H 12 M 620 (1000) Inspect;

E = Emission Control System Service (California)